CAESAR II 2011 R1 User Guide

Copyright

Copyright © 1985 - 2012 Intergraph CAS, Inc. All Rights Reserved.

Including software, file formats, and audiovisual displays; may be used pursuant to applicable software license agreement; contains confidential
and proprietary information of Intergraph and/or third parties which is protected by copyright law, trade secret law, and international treaty,
and may not be provided or otherwise made available without proper authorization from Intergraph Corporation.

U.S. Government Restricted Rights Legend

Use, duplication, or disclosure by the government is subject to restrictions as set forth below. For civilian agencies: This was developed at
private expense and is "restricted computer software" submitted with restricted rights in accordance with subparagraphs (a) through (d) of the
Commercial Computer Software - Restricted Rights clause at 52.227-19 of the Federal Acquisition Regulations ("FAR") and its successors, and is
unpublished and all rights are reserved under the copyright laws of the United States. For units of the Department of Defense ("DoD"): This is
"commercial computer software" as defined at DFARS 252.227-7014 and the rights of the Government are as specified at DFARS 227.7202-3.

Unpublished - rights reserved under the copyright laws of the United States.

Intergraph Corporation
P.O. Box 240000
Huntsville, AL 35813

Terms of Use

Use of this software product is subject to the End User License Agreement ("EULA") delivered with this software product unless the licensee has
a valid signed license for this software product with Intergraph Corporation. If the licensee has a valid signed license for this software product
with Intergraph Corporation, the valid signed license shall take precedence and govern the use of this software product. Subject to the terms
contained within the applicable license agreement, Intergraph Corporation gives licensee permission to print a reasonable number of copies of
the documentation as defined in the applicable license agreement and delivered with the software product for licensee's internal, non-
commercial use. The documentation may not be printed for resale or redistribution.

Warranties and Liabilities

All warranties given by Intergraph Corporation about equipment or software are set forth in the EULA provided with the software or applicable
license for the software product signed by Intergraph Corporation, and nothing stated in, or implied by, this document or its contents shall be
considered or deemed a modification or amendment of such warranties. Intergraph believes the information in this publication is accurate as of
its publication date.

The information and the software discussed in this document are subject to change without notice and are subject to applicable technical
product descriptions. Intergraph Corporation is not responsible for any error that may appear in this document.

The software discussed in this document is furnished under a license and may be used or copied only in accordance with the terms of this
license. No responsibility is assumed by Intergraph for the use or reliability of software on equipment that is not supplied by Intergraph or its
affiliated companies. THE USER OF THE SOFTWARE IS EXPECTED TO MAKE THE FINAL EVALUATION AS TO THE USEFULNESS OF THE SOFTWARE
IN HIS OWN ENVIRONMENT.

Intergraph is not responsible for the accuracy of delivered data including, but not limited to, catalog, reference and symbol data. Users should
verify for themselves that the data is accurate and suitable for their project work.

Trademarks

Intergraph, the Intergraph logo, PDS, SmartPlant, FrameWorks, I-Convert, I-Export, I-Sketch, SmartMarine, IntelliShip, INtools, ISOGEN, MARIAN,
SmartSketch, SPOOLGEN, SupportManager, SupportModeler, COADE, CAESAR II, CADWorx, PV Elite, CODECALC, and TANK are trademarks or
registered trademarks of Intergraph Corporation or its subsidiaries in the United States and other countries. Microsoft and Windows are
registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation. All rights reserved. Oracle, JD Edwards, PeopleSoft, and Retek are registered trademarks of
Oracle Corporation and/or its affiliates. Other brands and product names are trademarks of their respective owners.
Contents

Chapter 1 Introduction 1-1

What is CAESAR II? ................................................................................................................................ 1-2
What are the Applications of CAESAR II? .............................................................................................. 1-3
What Distinguishes CAESAR II From Other Pipe Stress Packages? ....................................................... 1-4
About the CAESAR II Documentation..................................................................................................... 1-5
Program Support/User Assistance ............................................................................................................ 1-6
Software Revision Procedures .................................................................................................................. 1-8
Identifying Builds .......................................................................................................................... 1-8
Can Builds Be Applied To Any Version? ..................................................................................... 1-8
Announcing Builds ........................................................................................................................ 1-8
Obtaining Builds............................................................................................................................ 1-8
What is Contained In A Specific Build?........................................................................................ 1-8
Installing Builds ............................................................................................................................ 1-9
Detecting/Checking Builds............................................................................................................ 1-9
Archiving and Reinstalling an Old, Patched Version .................................................................... 1-9
Updates and License Types .................................................................................................................... 1-10
Full Run ....................................................................................................................................... 1-10
Lease............................................................................................................................................ 1-10
Limited Run................................................................................................................................. 1-10

Chapter 2 Quick Start and Basic Operation 2-1

CAESAR II Quick Reference ................................................................................................................... 2-2
Starting CAESAR II ...................................................................................................................... 2-2
Basic Operation ........................................................................................................................................ 2-7
Piping Input Generation ................................................................................................................ 2-7
Error Checking the Model ........................................................................................................... 2-11
Building Load Cases.................................................................................................................... 2-13
Executing Static Analysis ............................................................................................................ 2-15
Static Output Review................................................................................................................... 2-16

Chapter 3 Main Menu 3-1

The CAESAR II Main Menu .................................................................................................................... 3-2
File Menu.................................................................................................................................................. 3-3
Input Menu................................................................................................................................................ 3-6
Analysis Menu .......................................................................................................................................... 3-7
3D Graphics Highlights: Temperature and Pressure................................................................................. 3-9
Output Menu ........................................................................................................................................... 3-10
Tools Menu ............................................................................................................................................. 3-11
C2Isogen Export .......................................................................................................................... 3-12
Diagnostics Menu ................................................................................................................................... 3-16
ESL Menu ............................................................................................................................................... 3-17
View Menu ............................................................................................................................................. 3-18
Help Menu .............................................................................................................................................. 3-19

Chapter 4 Piping Input 4-1

2 Contents

Spreadsheet Overview .............................................................................................................................. 4-2

Customize Toolbar ........................................................................................................................ 4-3
Data Fields ................................................................................................................................................ 4-4
Node Numbers............................................................................................................................... 4-4
Element Lengths ............................................................................................................................ 4-4
Element Direction Cosines ............................................................................................................ 4-5
Pipe Section Properties.................................................................................................................. 4-5
Operating Conditions: Temperatures and Pressures ...................................................................... 4-6
Special Element Information ......................................................................................................... 4-7
Boundary Conditions ..................................................................................................................... 4-8
Loading Conditions ....................................................................................................................... 4-8
Piping Material .............................................................................................................................. 4-8
Material Elastic Properties ............................................................................................................ 4-9
Densities ........................................................................................................................................ 4-9
Auxiliary Data Area................................................................................................................................ 4-10
Flange Checks - Equipment Screening ........................................................................................ 4-10
Bend Data .................................................................................................................................... 4-11
Rigid Weight ............................................................................................................................... 4-12
Restraints ..................................................................................................................................... 4-13
Expansion Joint ........................................................................................................................... 4-14
Displacements ............................................................................................................................. 4-15
Equipment Checks/Screening ...................................................................................................... 4-16
Forces .......................................................................................................................................... 4-17
Entering Line Numbers ............................................................................................................... 4-18
Uniform Loads ............................................................................................................................ 4-19
Wind/Wave.................................................................................................................................. 4-20
Allowable Stresses ...................................................................................................................... 4-21
Stress Intensification Factors/Tees .............................................................................................. 4-23
Flexible Nozzles .......................................................................................................................... 4-24
Hangers........................................................................................................................................ 4-25
Node Names ................................................................................................................................ 4-26
Offsets ......................................................................................................................................... 4-27
Menu Commands .................................................................................................................................... 4-28
File Menu .................................................................................................................................... 4-28
Edit Menu .................................................................................................................................... 4-30
Model Menu ................................................................................................................................ 4-35
Break ........................................................................................................................................... 4-35
Environment Menu ...................................................................................................................... 4-38
Tools Menu.................................................................................................................................. 4-63
3-D Modeler............................................................................................................................................ 4-69
3D Graphics Configuration ......................................................................................................... 4-74
User Options ................................................................................................................................ 4-77
HOOPS Toolbar Manipulations .................................................................................................. 4-79
3D Graphic Highlights: Diameters, Wall, Insulation, Cladding & Refractory Thickness, Materials, Piping
Codes ........................................................................................................................................... 4-80
3D Graphics Highlights: Corrosion and Densities ...................................................................... 4-81
3D Graphics Highlights: Displacements, Forces, Uniform Loads, Wind/Wave Loads............... 4-83
Limiting the Amount of Displayed Info; Find Node, Range & Cutting Plane ............................ 4-85
Save an Image for Later Presentation: TIF, HTML, BMP, JPEG and PDF ................................ 4-87
3D Graphics Interactive Feature: Walk Through ........................................................................ 4-89
Resizing Models ......................................................................................................................... 4-89

Chapter 5 Error Checking and Static Load Cases 5-1

Error Checking.......................................................................................................................................... 5-2
Fatal Error Message....................................................................................................................... 5-3
Warning Message .......................................................................................................................... 5-4
Contents 3

Note Message ................................................................................................................................ 5-5

Static Load Case Editor ............................................................................................................................ 5-6
Building Static Load Cases ....................................................................................................................... 5-8
Load Case Definition in CAESAR II ............................................................................................ 5-8
Load Cases with Hanger Design ................................................................................................... 5-9
Load Cases with Thermal Displacements...................................................................................... 5-9
Load Cases with Thermal Displacements and Settlement ........................................................... 5-10
Load Cases with Pitch and Roll................................................................................................... 5-10
Load Cases for Other Types of Occasional Loads ...................................................................... 5-11
Static Seismic Load Cases ........................................................................................................... 5-13
Providing Wind Data .............................................................................................................................. 5-17
Specifying Hydrodynamic Parameters.................................................................................................... 5-19
Execution of Static Analysis ................................................................................................................... 5-20
Notes on CAESAR II Load Cases .......................................................................................................... 5-23
Definition of a Load Case........................................................................................................... 5-23
Load Case Options Tab ............................................................................................................... 5-28
User Control of Produced Results Data....................................................................................... 5-29
Output Status ............................................................................................................................... 5-29
Output Type................................................................................................................................. 5-29
Snubbers Active?......................................................................................................................... 5-29
Hanger Stiffness .......................................................................................................................... 5-29
Friction Multiplier ....................................................................................................................... 5-30
Elastic Modulus ........................................................................................................................... 5-30
User-Controlled Combination Methods ...................................................................................... 5-31
Algebraic ..................................................................................................................................... 5-31
Scalar ........................................................................................................................................... 5-31
SRSS............................................................................................................................................ 5-31
ABS ............................................................................................................................................. 5-31
Max.............................................................................................................................................. 5-32
Min .............................................................................................................................................. 5-32
SignMax ...................................................................................................................................... 5-32
SignMin ....................................................................................................................................... 5-32
Recommended Load Cases.......................................................................................................... 5-33
Recommended Load Cases for Hanger Selection........................................................................ 5-34

Chapter 6 Static Output Processor 6-1

Entering the Static Output Processor ........................................................................................................ 6-2
Standard Toolbar ...................................................................................................................................... 6-4
Reports Navigation Toolbar...................................................................................................................... 6-6
Custom Reports Toolbar ........................................................................................................................... 6-8
Report Template Editor ............................................................................................................................ 6-9
Filtering Reports ..................................................................................................................................... 6-12
Report Options ........................................................................................................................................ 6-14
Displacements ............................................................................................................................. 6-14
Restraints ..................................................................................................................................... 6-15
Restraint Report - In Local Element Coordinates........................................................................ 6-16
Restraint Summary ...................................................................................................................... 6-18
Nozzle Check Report................................................................................................................... 6-19
Flange Reports............................................................................................................................. 6-20
Global Element Forces ................................................................................................................ 6-21
Local Element Forces .................................................................................................................. 6-22
Stresses ........................................................................................................................................ 6-23
Stress Summary ........................................................................................................................... 6-24
Code Compliance Report ............................................................................................................ 6-25
Cumulative Usage Report............................................................................................................ 6-26
4 Contents

General Computed Results ..................................................................................................................... 6-27

Load Case Report ........................................................................................................................ 6-27
Hanger Table with Text ............................................................................................................... 6-28
Input Echo ................................................................................................................................... 6-28
Miscellaneous Data ..................................................................................................................... 6-29
Warnings ..................................................................................................................................... 6-30
Output Viewer Wizard ............................................................................................................................ 6-31
Printing or Saving Reports to File Notes ................................................................................................ 6-32
3D/HOOPS Graphics in the Static Output Processor ............................................................................. 6-34
Animation of Static Results Notes .......................................................................................................... 6-38

Chapter 7 Dynamic Input and Analysis 7-1

Dynamic Capabilities in CAESAR II ....................................................................................................... 7-2
Model Modifications for Dynamic Analysis ................................................................................. 7-3
Major Steps in Dynamic Input....................................................................................................... 7-5
Dynamic Analysis Input Processor Overview .......................................................................................... 7-6
Entering the Dynamic Analysis Input Menu ................................................................................. 7-6
Input Overview Based on Analysis Category ........................................................................................... 7-8
Modal ............................................................................................................................................ 7-8
Specifying the Loads ..................................................................................................................... 7-8
Snubbers ........................................................................................................................................ 7-8
DLF/Spectrum Generator - The Spectrum Wizard ........................................................................ 7-9
Save to File .................................................................................................................................. 7-10
OK ............................................................................................................................................... 7-10
Cancel .......................................................................................................................................... 7-10
Spectrum Name ........................................................................................................................... 7-12
Importance Factor........................................................................................................................ 7-13
Seismic Coefficient Ca ................................................................................................................ 7-13
Seismic Coefficient Cv ................................................................................................................ 7-13
Spectrum Name ........................................................................................................................... 7-14
Importance Factor Ip .................................................................................................................... 7-15
Site Coefficient Fa ....................................................................................................................... 7-15
Site Coefficient Fv....................................................................................................................... 7-15
Mapped MCESRA at Short Period (SS)...................................................................................... 7-15
Mapped MCESRA at One Second (S1)....................................................................................... 7-15
Response Modification Rp ........................................................................................................... 7-15
Spectrum Name ........................................................................................................................... 7-16
Importance Factor........................................................................................................................ 7-17
Site Coefficient Fa ....................................................................................................................... 7-17
Site Coefficient Fv....................................................................................................................... 7-17
Mapped MCESRA at Short Period (SS)...................................................................................... 7-17
Mapped MCESRA at One Second (S1)....................................................................................... 7-17
Response Modification R ............................................................................................................ 7-17
Spectrum Name ........................................................................................................................... 7-21
Opening Time (milliseconds) ...................................................................................................... 7-21
Spectrum Name ........................................................................................................................... 7-23
Max. Table Frequency................................................................................................................. 7-23
Number of Points......................................................................................................................... 7-23
Enter Pulse Data .......................................................................................................................... 7-23
Generate Spectrum ...................................................................................................................... 7-24
Control Parameters ...................................................................................................................... 7-28
Advanced Parameters Show Screen ............................................................................................ 7-28
Harmonic ................................................................................................................................................ 7-29
Specifying the Loads ................................................................................................................... 7-29
Modifying Mass and Stiffness Model.......................................................................................... 7-30
Control Parameters ...................................................................................................................... 7-31
Contents 5

Earthquake (Spectrum) ........................................................................................................................... 7-32

Specifying the Loads ................................................................................................................... 7-32
Spectrum Load Cases .................................................................................................................. 7-34
Static/Dynamic Combinations ..................................................................................................... 7-35
Modifying Mass and Stiffness Model.......................................................................................... 7-36
Control Parameters ...................................................................................................................... 7-36
Advanced Parameters .................................................................................................................. 7-36
Relief Loads (Spectrum) ......................................................................................................................... 7-37
Specifying the Loads ................................................................................................................... 7-37
Relief Load Synthesis .................................................................................................................. 7-37
Water Hammer/Slug Flow (Spectrum) ................................................................................................... 7-38
Specifying the Load..................................................................................................................... 7-38
Pulse Table/DLF Spectrum Generation ....................................................................................... 7-38
Spectrum Definitions ................................................................................................................... 7-38
Force Sets .................................................................................................................................... 7-38
Spectrum Load Cases .................................................................................................................. 7-38
Static/Dynamic Combinations ..................................................................................................... 7-38
Modifying Mass and Stiffness Model.......................................................................................... 7-38
Time History ........................................................................................................................................... 7-39
Specifying The Load ................................................................................................................... 7-39
Time History Profile Definitions ................................................................................................. 7-39
Force Sets .................................................................................................................................... 7-39
Time History Load Cases ............................................................................................................ 7-40
Static/Dynamic Combinations ..................................................................................................... 7-40
Modifying Mass and Stiffness Models ........................................................................................ 7-40
Control Parameters ...................................................................................................................... 7-40
Advanced ..................................................................................................................................... 7-41
Error Handling and Analyzing the Job ................................................................................................... 7-42
Performing the Analysis .............................................................................................................. 7-42
Modes .......................................................................................................................................... 7-42
Harmonic ..................................................................................................................................... 7-43
Selection of Phase Angles ........................................................................................................... 7-44
Spectrum...................................................................................................................................... 7-44
Time History................................................................................................................................ 7-44

Chapter 8 Dynamic Output Processing 8-1

Entry into the Processor ............................................................................................................................ 8-2
Report Types............................................................................................................................................. 8-4
Displacements ............................................................................................................................... 8-4
Restraints ....................................................................................................................................... 8-4
Local Forces .................................................................................................................................. 8-6
Global Forces ................................................................................................................................ 8-7
Stresses .......................................................................................................................................... 8-8
Forces/Stresses .............................................................................................................................. 8-9
Cumulative Usage ....................................................................................................................... 8-10
Mass Participation Factors .......................................................................................................... 8-11
Natural Frequencies ..................................................................................................................... 8-12
Modes Mass Normalized ............................................................................................................. 8-12
Modes Unity Normalized ............................................................................................................ 8-13
Included Mass Data ..................................................................................................................... 8-14
Input Listing ................................................................................................................................ 8-14
Mass Model ................................................................................................................................. 8-15
Boundary Conditions ................................................................................................................... 8-16
Notes on Printing or Saving Reports to a File ........................................................................................ 8-17
3D/HOOPs Graphics in the Animation Processor .................................................................................. 8-18
6 Contents

Save Animation to File ................................................................................................................ 8-19

Animation of Static Results - Displacements .............................................................................. 8-20
Animation of Dynamic Results – Modal/Spectrum..................................................................... 8-21
Animation of Dynamic Results – Harmonic ............................................................................... 8-21
Animation of Dynamic Results – Time History .......................................................................... 8-21

Chapter 9 Structural Steel Modeler 9-1

Overview of Structural Capability in CAESAR II.................................................................................... 9-2
3D/HOOPS Graphics ................................................................................................................................ 9-8
Sample Input ........................................................................................................................................... 9-10
Structural Steel Example #1.................................................................................................................... 9-11
Structural Steel Example #2.................................................................................................................... 9-18
Structural Steel Example #3.................................................................................................................... 9-31

Chapter 10 Buried Pipe Modeling 10-1

Modeler Overview .................................................................................................................................. 10-2
Using the Underground Pipe Modeler .................................................................................................... 10-3
Notes on the Soil Model ......................................................................................................................... 10-9
CAESAR II Basic Model (Peng) ............................................................................................... 10-10
American Lifelines Alliance Soil Model ................................................................................... 10-12
Recommended Procedures.................................................................................................................... 10-17
Example ................................................................................................................................................ 10-18

Chapter 11 Equipment Component and Compliance 11-1

Equipment and Component Evaluation .................................................................................................. 11-2
Intersection Stress Intensification Factors .............................................................................................. 11-3
Bend Stress Intensification Factors......................................................................................................... 11-6
Pressure Stiffening ...................................................................................................................... 11-8
Flanges Attached to Bend Ends ................................................................................................... 11-8
Bends with Trunnions.................................................................................................................. 11-8
Stress Concentrations and Intensification.................................................................................... 11-9
WRC 107 Vessel Stresses ..................................................................................................................... 11-10
WRC 107 Stress Summations.................................................................................................... 11-15
WRC Bulletin 297 ................................................................................................................................ 11-17
Flange Leakage/Stress Calculations ..................................................................................................... 11-18
Bolt Tightening Stress Notes ..................................................................................................... 11-23
Using the CAESAR II Flange Modeler ..................................................................................... 11-24
Leak Pressure Ratio ................................................................................................................... 11-24
Effective Gasket Modulus ......................................................................................................... 11-24
Flange Rating ............................................................................................................................ 11-24
Remaining Strength of Corroded Pipelines B31G ................................................................................ 11-27
Expansion Joint Rating ......................................................................................................................... 11-31
Structural Steel Checks - AISC............................................................................................................. 11-38
Global Parameters ..................................................................................................................... 11-38
Structural Code .......................................................................................................................... 11-39
Allowable Stress Increase Factor .............................................................................................. 11-39
Stress Reduction Factors Cmy and Cmz ................................................................................... 11-39
Young’s Modulus ...................................................................................................................... 11-39
Material Yield Strength ............................................................................................................. 11-39
Bending Coefficient................................................................................................................... 11-39
Form Factor Qa ......................................................................................................................... 11-39
Allow Sidesway......................................................................................................................... 11-40
Contents 7

Resize Members Whose Unity Check Value Is . . .................................................................... 11-40

Minimum Desired Unity Check ................................................................................................ 11-40
Maximum Desired Unity Check ................................................................................................ 11-40
Local Member Data ................................................................................................................... 11-41
Member Start Node ................................................................................................................... 11-42
Member End Node .................................................................................................................... 11-42
Member Type ............................................................................................................................ 11-42
In- And Out-Of-Plane Fixity Coefficients Ky And Kz.............................................................. 11-42
Unsupported Axial Length ........................................................................................................ 11-43
Unsupported Length (In-Plane Bending)................................................................................... 11-43
Unsupported Length (Out-Of-Plane Bending) .......................................................................... 11-43
Double Angle Spacing............................................................................................................... 11-43
Young’s Modulus ...................................................................................................................... 11-43
Material Yield Strength ............................................................................................................. 11-43
Axial Member Force.................................................................................................................. 11-43
In-Plane Bending Moment ........................................................................................................ 11-43
Out-of-Plane Bending Moment ................................................................................................. 11-43
In-Plane “Small” Bending Moment........................................................................................... 11-43
In-Plane “Large” Bending Moment........................................................................................... 11-43
Out-of-Plane “Small” Bending Moment ................................................................................... 11-44
Out-of-Plane “Large” Bending Moment ................................................................................... 11-44
AISC Output Reports ................................................................................................................ 11-44
Differences Between the 1977 and 1989 AISC Codes .............................................................. 11-45
NEMA SM23 (Steam Turbines) ........................................................................................................... 11-46
NEMA Turbine Example .......................................................................................................... 11-47
API 610 (Centrifugal Pumps) ............................................................................................................... 11-53
Vertical In-Line Pumps ............................................................................................................. 11-58
API 617 (Centrifugal Compressors) ..................................................................................................... 11-59
API 661 (Air Cooled Heat Exchangers) ............................................................................................... 11-61
Heat Exchange Institute Standard For Closed Feedwater Heaters ........................................................ 11-66
API 560 (Fired Heaters for General Refinery Services) ....................................................................... 11-67
Chapter 1 Introduction

In This Chapter
What is CAESAR II? ............................................................ 1-2
What are the Applications of CAESAR II? .......................... 1-3
What Distinguishes CAESAR II From Other Pipe Stress Packages?1-4
About the CAESAR II Documentation................................. 1-5
Program Support/User Assistance ........................................ 1-6
Software Revision Procedures .............................................. 1-8
Updates and License Types................................................... 1-10
 1-2 Introduction

What is CAESAR II?

CAESAR II is a PC-based pipe stress analysis software program developed, marketed and sold by Intergraph
CAS. This software package is an engineering tool used in the mechanical design and analysis of piping systems.
The CAESAR II user creates a model of the piping system using simple beam elements and defines the loading
conditions imposed on the system. With this input, CAESAR II produces results in the form of displacements,
loads, and stresses throughout the system. Additionally, CAESAR II compares these results to limits specified by
recognized codes and standards. The popularity of CAESAR II is a reflection of our expertise in programming
and engineering, as well as our dedication to service and quality.
 Chapter 1 Introduction 1-3

What are the Applications of CAESAR II?

CAESAR II is most often used for the mechanical design of new piping systems. Hot piping systems present a
unique problem to the mechanical engineer. These irregular structures experience great thermal strain that must
be absorbed by the piping, supports, and attached equipment. These “structures” must be stiff enough to support
their own weight and also flexible enough to accept thermal growth. The loads, displacements, and stresses can
be estimated through analysis of the piping model in CAESAR II. To aid in this design by analysis, CAESAR II
incorporates many of the limitations placed on these systems and their attached equipment. These limits are
typically specified by engineering bodies (such as the ASME B31 committees, ASME Section VIII, and the
Welding Research Council) or by manufacturers of piping-related equipment (API, NEMA, or EJMA).

CAESAR II is not limited to thermal analysis of piping systems. CAESAR II also has the capability of modeling and
analyzing the full range of static and dynamic loads, which may be imposed on the system. Therefore, CAESAR II
is not only a tool for new design but it is also valuable in troubleshooting or redesigning existing systems. Here,
one can determine the cause of failure or evaluate the severity of unanticipated operating conditions such as
fluid/piping interaction or mechanical vibration caused by rotating equipment.
 1-4 Introduction

What Distinguishes CAESAR II From Other Pipe Stress

Packages?
Intergraph CAS treats CAESAR II more as a service than a product. Our staff of experienced pipe stress engineers
are involved in day-to-day software development, program support, and training. This approach has produced a
program, which most closely fits today’s requirements of the pipe stress industry. Data entry is simple and
straight forward through annotated input screens and/or spreadsheets. CAESAR II provides the widest range of
modeling and analysis capabilities without becoming too complicated for simple system analysis. Users may
tailor their CAESAR II installation through default setting and customized databases. Comprehensive input
graphics confirms the model construction before the analysis is made. The program’s interactive output
processor presents results on the monitor for quick review or sends complete reports to a file or printer.
CAESAR II not only uses standard analysis guidelines, and provides the latest recognized opinions for these
analyses.

CAESAR II also offers seamless interaction with our CADWorx/Plant, an AutoCAD based design and drafting
system for creating orthographic, isometric, and 3D piping drawings. The two-way-link automatically generates
stress analysis models of piping layouts, or creates spectacular stress isometrics in minutes from CAESAR II
models. CAESAR II is a field-proven engineering analysis program. It is a widely recognized product with a large
customer base and an excellent support and development record. Intergraph CAS is a strong and stable company
where service is a major commitment.
 Chapter 1 Introduction 1-5

About the CAESAR II Documentation

To address the sheer volume of information available on CAESAR II and present it in a concise and useful manner
to the analyst the program documentation is presented in four separate manuals:
1. The User Guide describes the basic operation and flow of the many routines found in CAESAR II. This
manual gives an overview of the program capabilities, and introduces model creation, analysis, and
output review. It is intended as a general road map for the program. This general document is the first
source of information.
2. The Technical Reference Manual explains the function of, input for, and output from each module of the
program. This manual also explains much of the theory behind CAESAR II calculations. The Technical
Reference Manual should be referred to whenever the user needs more information than is provided by
the User Guide.
3. The Application Guide provides examples of how to use CAESAR II. These examples illustrate methods
of modeling individual piping components as well as complete piping systems. Here one can find
tutorials on system modeling and analysis. The Application Guide is a reference providing quick “how
to” information on specific subjects.
4. The Quick Reference Guide provides the user with version and technical change details in addition to
installation, and commonly referenced information.
Users can view and print any of the above manuals by clicking the HELP/ONLINE DOCUMENTATION from the Main
Menu found in CAESAR II.
 1-6 Introduction

Program Support/User Assistance

Our staff understands that CAESAR II is not only a complex analysis tool but also, at times, an elaborate process.
One that may not be obvious to the casual user. While our documentation is intended to address the questions
raised regarding piping analysis, system modeling, and results interpretation, not all the answers can be quickly
found in these volumes.

Intergraph CAS understands the engineer’s need to produce efficient, economical, and expeditious designs. To
that end, Intergraph CAS has a staff of helpful professionals ready to address any CAESAR II issues raised by all
users. CAESAR II support is available by telephone, fax, by mail, and the internet. To further aid internet users
when contacting technical support, Intergraph CAS has added an option that generates an e-mail template with
the basic machine and CAESAR II version details for a user. This information is typically what is needed to
resolve technical support issues. To use this option, from the Help Menu select Email CAESAR II Support.
 Chapter 1 Introduction 1-7

This selection launches the default e-mail client and populates an e-mail with the information displayed in the
figure below. Note, your information will vary.

Note that the e-mail is properly addressed to Technical Support and contains all information relevant to your
CAESAR II installation. You enter the problem description at the Type Message Here prompt and attach any
necessary files. Intergraph CAS provides program support at no additional charge to the user. It is expected,
however, that questions focus on the current version of the program.

Formal training in CAESAR II and pipe stress analysis is also available from Intergraph CAS. Intergraph CAS
conducts regular training classes in Houston and provides in-house and open attendance courses around the
world. These courses focus on the expertise available at Intergraph CAS for modeling, analysis, and design.

Intergraph CAS Technical Support:

Phone: 281-890-4566 E-mail: [email protected]

Fax: 281-890-3301 Web: www.coade.com

 1-8 Introduction

Software Revision Procedures

Intergraph CAS software products are not static; they are changed continually to reflect engineering code
addenda, operational enhancements, user requests, operating system modifications, and corrections. New
versions are planned and targeted for a specific release date. However, there may be corrections necessary to the
“currently shipping” version, before the next version can be released. When this occurs, a correction to the
“currently shipping” version is made. This correction is referred to as a “Build.”

Changes and corrections are accumulated until an error producing incorrect results is found. When this occurs,
the build is finalized, announced, and posted to the web site. Some Intergraph CAS users have expressed concern
over tracking, archiving, and distributing the various builds generated between major releases. To alleviate this
problem for our users, all maintenance builds for new releases contain all previous builds. In other words, Build
Y contains Build X. This increases the download size and time required to obtain the build, but only one build is
required at any given time.

Identifying Builds
When posted on the Web, builds are identified with the program identifier and the date the Build was generated
for example C2YYY-YYMMDD.EXE.

Can Builds Be Applied To Any Version?

No! As new versions are released, additional input items become necessary and must be stored in the program
data files. In addition, file formats change; databases grow, and so on. A build is intended for one specific
version of the software. Using a Build on a different version (without specific advice from Intergraph CAS
personnel) is a sure way to cripple the software.

Announcing Builds
When a Build becomes available, the NEWS file maintained on the Web site is updated. All entries in this news
file are dated for ease of reference. You should check one of these news files at least once a month to ensure they
stay current with the software.

Corrections and builds are also published in the Intergraph CAS newsletter, Mechanical Engineering News.

If users register with an e-mail address, they will be notified via e-mail of all new builds.

Obtaining Builds
Builds are posted to our website at http://www.coade.com and are arranged in subdirectories by program. Each
file contained in the directory includes a description defining what it contains, its size, and the date it was
created. Decide which build file you need and download it.

What is Contained In A Specific Build?

Each patch file contains a file named BUILD.TXT. This is a plain ASCII text file that can be viewed with any
text editor or sent to the system printer. This text file contains a description of all corrections and enhancements
made, which are contained in the current patch. When necessary, additional usage instructions may be found in
this file.
 Chapter 1 Introduction 1-9

Installing Builds
Builds distributed for Windows applications use a Windows installation procedure. The executable is a self-
extracting archive, which extracts to a number of sub-directories; each containing sufficient files to fit on a CD.
The CD contains a standard SETUP.EXE program to actually install the Build. This procedure ensures that
necessary files are registered with the system and that the “Uninstall” utility can perform its task.

Detecting/Checking Builds
When a Build is ready to be released, the Main Menu module is revised to reflect the Build level. This allows
the user to see, on the Main Program menu, which Build is in use. To see which program modules have been
modified, you can run an Intergraph CAS utility program from within the program directory.

From the Diagnostics menu, select the Build Version option. This option scans each of the EXE modules in the
program directory and lists its size, memory requirements, and build level. A sample display from this utility is
shown in the table below.

By reviewing the following table, users can determine which modules have been patched and to what level.

Archiving and Reinstalling an Old, Patched Version

When a new version of the software is released, what should be done with the old, existing version? The
distribution disks sent from Intergraph CAS should obviously be saved. Additionally, any Builds obtained
should also be archived. This will allow full usage of this version at some later time, if it becomes necessary.

To reinstall an older version of the software, the distribution CDs from Intergraph CAS should be installed
first. Then, the last Build should be installed. Each Build includes the modifications made in all prior Builds.
 1-10 Introduction

Updates and License Types

Users can identify CAESAR II update sets by their version number. The current release is CAESAR II 2011.
Intergraph CAS schedules and distributes these updates approximately every nine months, depending on their
scope and necessity. The type of CAESAR II license determines whether or not a user receives these updates.
There are three types of CAESAR II Licenses.

Full Run
A full run provides unlimited access to CAESAR II and one year of updates, maintenance, and support. Updates,
maintenance, and support are available on an annual basis after the first year.

Lease
A lease provides unlimited access to CAESAR II with updates, maintenance, and support provided as long as the
lease is in effect.

Limited Run
A limited run provides 50 static or dynamic analyses of piping system models over an unlimited period of time,
but does not include program updates. The user is upgraded (if necessary) whenever a new set of 50 runs is
purchased.

Intergraph CAS only ships the current version of CAESAR II, no matter which type of license. Updates are
automatically delivered to all lease users and to full run users who purchase updates, maintenance, and support,
and all lease users.
Chapter 2 Quick Start and Basic Operation

In This Chapter
CAESAR II Quick Reference ............................................... 2-2
Basic Operation ..................................................................... 2-7
 2-2 Quick Start and Basic Operation

CAESAR II Quick Reference

This chapter explains the basics of CAESAR II operation, to enable users to quickly perform a static piping
analysis. All necessary user operations are discussed; however, details have been kept to a minimum. Each topic
includes references to other sections of the CAESAR II User Guide for additional detailed information.

The use of CAESAR II assumes that the software has been installed as per the instructions detailed in the Quick
Reference Guide.

There are several steps required to perform a static analysis, the major steps (and the chapters in which they are
described) display below. These steps are explained briefly in this chapter.
• START CAESAR II (Chapter 4)
• GENERATE INPUT (Chapter 5)
• PERFORM ERROR CHECKING (Chapter 6)
• BUILD LOAD CASES (Chapter 6)
• EXECUTE STATIC ANALYSIS (Chapter 6)
• REVIEW OUTPUT (Chapter 7)

Note: A complete tutorial is provided in the CAESAR II Applications Guide.

Starting CAESAR II

Launch CAESAR II by double-clicking the CAESAR II icon, which should point to the program C2.EXE in the
CAESAR II Installation directory. Note that launching any of the other executable programs in the
CAESAR II Installation directory can result in unpredictable behavior, at this point the Main Menu
displays. It is from the Main Menu that users select jobs, analysis types, invoke executions, and initiate output
reviews. Main Menu options are described in detail in Chapter 4 of this document—for the purposes of this
“Quick Start” chapter, only the File, Input, Analysis, and Output menus are used.

M ain M enu
 Chapter 2 Quick Start and Basic Operation 2-3

All CAESAR II analyses require a job name for identification purposes—subsequent input, analysis, or output
review references the job name specified. The job name is selected using the File menu, using one of three
methods.

New J ob Na me Dialog

Whenever users wish to begin a new job, selecting File-New (or clicking the New icon from the toolbar)
requires the user to enter a job name and data directory. For the purposes of this example, users should enter a
name, select Piping Input, and select an alternate directory for the file, if desired.

Note: Selecting FILE-OPEN (or clicking the Open icon on the toolbar) presents users with a dialog to
select an existing file. Select recently used files from the RECENT PIPING/STRUCTURAL FILE option on the
File Menu.
 2-4 Quick Start and Basic Operation

Note: Enabling Structural Input opens the Structural Steel Wizard. See Chapter 4 of the
CAESAR II Technical Reference Manual for more information.

Selecting a job name does not open the file; as noted, it indicates the job on which input modeling, analysis,
output review, or other operations will be done. Users must still select one of these operations from the menu.

Open Dialog
 File Open / Job Roll-Back:

The File Open dialog has been improved to permit the “roll-back” to earlier revisions of the (piping) input.
This procedure is illustrated in the following figures.

Open Dialog
 Chapter 2 Quick Start and Basic Operation 2-5

Click FILE/OPEN from the Main Menu, then click on the desired job. Once a job has been selected, if there are
earlier revisions available, they are listed in the lower right corner of the dialog. Only 25 revisions are saved,
with the oldest being deleted if necessary.

To revert to an earlier revision, select the desired input from the list, based on the date stamp.
 2-6 Quick Start and Basic Operation

Clicking Open displays a confirmation dialog. Clicking Yes here restores the selected revision. CAESAR II
gives users the option to archive input files. Enter a password between 6 and 24 characters in length. You are
prompted to repeat this information to eliminate the possibility of incorrectly entering the password. Archived
input files cannot be altered and/or saved without this password however; they can be opened and reviewed.

Ar chive Passwor d Dialog

 Chapter 2 Quick Start and Basic Operation 2-7

Basic Operation
Once you have started the program and opened the file, you will choose the required operation.

Piping Input Generation

After specifying the job name users can launch the interactive model builder by selecting INPUT-PIPING from the
Main Menu.

Input generation of the model consists of describing the piping elements, as well as any external influences
(boundary conditions or loads) acting on those elements. Each pipe element is identified by two node numbers,
and requires the specification of geometric, cross sectional, and material data. The preferred method of data
entry is the Piping Spreadsheet.

Piping Input Spr eadsheet

 2-8 Quick Start and Basic Operation

Each pipe element is described on its own spreadsheet. Data, which is likely to be constant, is automatically
duplicated by CAESAR II to subsequent spreadsheets. This means that for many elements, the user must only
confirm the numbers and enter the delta-dimensions. When necessary, point specific data can easily be entered
on the appropriate element’s spreadsheet.

The menus, toolbars, and accelerators offer a number of additional commands that users can invoke to enter
auxiliary processors or use special modelers or databases. The commands and general input instructions of the
piping spreadsheet are discussed in detail in Chapter 5.

 Entering the First Element (Element 10-20) of a Simple Model:

1 Enter the value 10-0 (10 ft) in the DX field.
2 Enter the value 8 (8-in. nominal) in the Diameter field. The program automatically converts this
value to the actual diameter.
3 Enter “S” (standard schedule pipe wall) in the Wt/Sch field. This is automatically converted to wall
thickness.
4 Enter 600 (degrees Fahrenheit) in the Temp 1 field.
5 Enter 150 (psig) in the Pressure 1 field.
6 Double-click the Bend check box. The Bends tab displays. This adds a long radius bend at the end
of the element, and adds intermediate nodes 18 and 19 at the near weld and mid points of the bend
respectively (node 20 physically represents the far weld point of the bend).

7 Double-click the Restraint check box. The Restraint tab displays. In the first Node field enter 10;
then select ANC from the first Type drop list.
 Chapter 2 Quick Start and Basic Operation 2-9

8 Select A106 B from the Material drop list. This selection fills in the material parameters such as
density and modulus elasticity.
9 Double-click the Allowable Stress check box and select the B31.3 code from the Code drop list.
Note: Allowable stresses for the given material, temperature, and code display automatically.
10 Enter 0.85SG (0.85 specific gravity) in the Fluid Density field. The program automatically
converts this value to density. To enter the second element of the model, press Alt-C, or click the
Skip to Next Element icon, or use the Edit-Continue button to move to the spreadsheet for a new
element, element 20-30.
Note: Node numbers are automatically generated, distributed and data is carried forward from previous
spreadsheets.
11 Enter the value 10-0 (10 feet) in the DY field.
12 Double-click the Restraint check box. In the first Node field, enter 30; then select ANC from the
first Type drop list.
The two-element model (an ell-configuration anchored at each end) is now complete.
 2-10 Quick Start and Basic Operation

The piping preprocessor also provides interactive graphics and listing functions to facilitate model editing and
verification. The CAESAR Ii Piping Preprocessor is designed to make these tasks intuitive and efficient. Model
verification can be performed using either the Graphics or List utilities, although a combination of both modes is
recommended. The Graphics and List utilities are discussed in Chapter 5 of this manual. The CAESAR II
Graphics screen, displays by default, next to the input spreadsheet. However, the spreadsheet can be collapsed
to provide maximum graphic space as shown below.

CAESAR II Input Gr a phics Scr een

Once the model is completed, it must be checked for errors before analysis is permitted. This can be done using
the File-Error Check menu option or the Error Check icon on the toolbar.
 Chapter 2 Quick Start and Basic Operation 2-11

Error Checking the Model

The two main functions of this error checker; is first to verify the user’s input data, and second to build the
execution data files utilized by the remainder of CAESAR II.

Verification of the user’s input data consists of checking each individual piping element for consistency. Errors
discovered which would prevent CAESAR II from running (such as a corrosion allowance greater than the wall
thickness) are flagged as fatal errors to the user.

Unusual items (such as a change of direction without a bend or intersection) are flagged as warnings to the user.
 Other messages, of an informational type, may show intermediate calculations or general notes.
Error messages display in red text, Notes display in blue text and Warnings display in green text.
 All messages display in the Error Window next to the model graphics.
 Clicking on an error or warning message highlights the associated element on the graphic display
and positions the spreadsheet to that element.
 Users may review all the messages generated by using the scroll bar on the right side of the toolbar
or arrow keys.
 Users can sort error messages by Message Number, Element or Node Number and Message Text,
by clicking the column titles.
 Users can print the entire error report or selected sections by clicking the Print button.
 Users can choose to display only fatal errors or all errors by clicking the arrow beside the Error
Checker icon.
If there is an error, users can return to the input module by clicking the Classic Piping Input tab.

If the error check process completes without fatal errors, a center of gravity report is presented and the analysis
data files can be generated and then the solution phase can commence.
 2-12 Quick Start and Basic Operation

Center of Gr avity Repor t

If fatal errors exist, the analysis data files are not generated and the solution phase cannot begin. Users must
make corrections and rerun the Error Checker successfully before analysis is permitted.
 Chapter 2 Quick Start and Basic Operation 2-13

Building Load Cases

A static analysis can be started from the Main Menu, or the Piping Input, once the analysis data files have been
generated by the error checker. The first stage of a static analysis is to set up the load cases. For new jobs (no
previous solution files available), the static analysis module recommends load cases to the user based on the load
types encountered in the input file. These recommended load cases are usually sufficient to satisfy the piping code
requirements for the Sustained and Expansion load cases. If the recommended load cases are not satisfactory, the
user has the option of directly modifying them.

Selecting the Analysis-Statics option from the Main Menu, or selecting the EDIT-EDIT STATIC LOAD CASES option
from the piping preprocessor, launches the Load Case Builder.

Loa d Case Builder

 2-14 Quick Start and Basic Operation

Loads can be built two ways—by 1) combining the load components defined in the input (weight, displacements,
thermal cases, etc.) into load cases (basic cases), and 2) combining pre-existing load cases into new load cases
(combination cases).

Users can build the basic cases by selecting (one or more load components), dragging, and dropping load
components from the Loads Defined in Input list (in the left hand column) to the Load Cases list on the right
or by typing on any of the individual lines. Stress Types (indicating which code equations should be used to
calculate and check the stresses) can be selected from the Stress Type list on each line.

Combination cases, if present, must always follow the basic cases. Users can build combination cases by
selecting (one or more load components), dragging, and dropping basic load cases from earlier in the load case
list to combine cases (or blank load cases) later in the Load Cases list.

Note: The number of allowed static load cases has been increased to 999.
 Chapter 2 Quick Start and Basic Operation 2-15

Executing Static Analysis

Once the load cases have been defined, the user begins the actual finite element solution through the use of the
File-Analyze command on the toolbar, or by clicking the Start Run icon on the toolbar located in the Static Load
Case Builder. The solution phase commences with the generation of the element stiffness matrices and load
vectors, and solves for displacements, forces and moments, reactions, and stresses. This solution phase also
performs the design and selection of spring hangers, and iterative stiffness matrix modifications for nonlinear
restraints. The user is kept apprised of the solution status throughout the calculation.
 2-16 Quick Start and Basic Operation

Static Output Review

A review of the static analysis results is possible immediately after a static solution or at a later time by selecting
the Output-Static option of the CAESAR II Main Menu. The static output processor presents the user with an
interactive selection menu from which load cases and report options can be selected.

Eile 1/iew Fdt'i!'S Reports Qptions elotOptions PlotVie!:\' 2_how '11/indow _lSI X

eJ g I iieIl I E lI ·W JW li Q
Load Cases Analyzed Standa1dRepo1ts Gene1alComputedResults - Output Viewe1Wiza1d
1 [OPE) W+Tl+P1 Displacements Input Echo
2[SUS)W+P1 Resllaints Miscellaneous Data r. Send to Sc1een r Send toMS W01d r Send to P1inte1
3 [EXP) L3=L112 Resllaints Extended Load Case Repo1t
Resllaint Summa1y Wamings r Send to Text [ASCII) File
Resllaint Summa1y Extended
Flanges
P Gene1ate Table olContents [TOC)
GlobalElement F01ces
GlobalElement Fo1ces Extend• Show these1epo1ts in this o1de1:
LocalElement Fo1ces
Stlesses
Stlesses Extended
··>Add
I
II <..Remove I
Stless Summa1y
Code Compliance
Code Complai nce Extended

II II Clea1AII
I
Custom Repo1ts Miscellaneous Option
P Use1lnte1action

Units: ENGLISH.FIL

I Finish
I
II Less«
I Move Up
I Move Down I

•I I
CAESAR IIOutput Processor CAP NUM SCRL A
 Chapter 2 Quick Start and Basic Operation 2-17

Results can be reviewed by selecting one or more load cases along with one or more reports (selection is done by
clicking, Ctrl-clicking, and Shift-clicking the mouse). The results can be reviewed on the terminal, printed, or sent
to a file, by using the View Reports, MS Word, File-Save/SaveAs, or File-Print menu commands and/or
toolbars.

The user can also use the View-Plot menu command or the Plot toolbar to review the analytic results in graphics
mode, which can produce displaced shapes, stress distributions, and restraint actions.

Out put Gr a phics Scr een

The actual study of the results depends on the purpose of each load case, and the reason for the analysis. Usually
the review checks that the system stresses are below their allowables, restraint loads are acceptable, and
displacements are not excessive. Additional post processing (such as equipment, nozzle, and structural steel
checks) may be required depending on the model and type of analysis.

Once the review of the output is finished, the user can return to the main CAESAR II menu by exiting the
output review module.
Chapter 3 Main Menu

In This Chapter
The CAESAR II Main Menu ................................................ 3-2
File Menu .............................................................................. 3-3
Input Menu ............................................................................ 3-6
Analysis Menu ...................................................................... 3-7
3D Graphics Highlights: Temperature and Pressure............. 3-9
Output Menu ......................................................................... 3-10
Tools Menu ........................................................................... 3-11
Diagnostics Menu ................................................................. 3-16
ESL Menu ............................................................................. 3-17
View Menu............................................................................ 3-18
Help Menu............................................................................. 3-19
 3-2 Main Menu

The CAESAR II Main Menu

CAESAR II M ain M enu

CAESAR II may be started by double-clicking the CAESAR II icon, or by running C2.EXE from the
CAESAR II Installation directory.

After starting CAESAR II, the Main Menu appears. It is recommended that this screen be kept at its minimal size
(as shown above). This allows access to the toolbar while freeing most of the screen for other applications.

The Main Menu is used to direct the actions of CAESAR II. As elsewhere in CAESAR II commands may be
accessed from menus, as well as toolbars and/or keystroke combinations. The available menu options are briefly
described here with further detail available elsewhere in this document or in the CAESAR II Technical Reference
Guide.
 Chapter 3 Main Menu 3-3

File Menu

The File menu may be used to do the following:

• Set Default Data Directory—Sets the default data (project) directory without selecting a specific job
file. Some CAESAR II options do not require that a job be selected, but must know in which directory to
work.

Note The selection of the data directory is very important since any configuration, units, or other data
files found in that directory are considered to be “local” to that job.

• New—Starts a new piping or structural job.

When New is selected, the user must designate whether this job is for a piping or structural model. The data
directory where the file is to be placed must be selected, either by entering it directly or by browsing.

Note: Selecting Structural Input launches the Structural Steel Wizard. For more
information, see Chapter 4 of the CAESAR II Technical Reference Manual for details.

File New Dialog Box

 3-4 Main Menu

• Open—Opens an existing piping or structural job.

When Open is chosen, the user is prompted to select an existing job file. Files of type “Piping,” “Pre-version
3.24 piping,” or “Structural” may be displayed for selection (see below).

 File Open / Job Roll-Back:

The File Open dialog box has been improved to permit the “roll-back” to earlier revisions of the (piping)
input. This procedure is illustrated in the following figures.

Open Dialog Box

 Chapter 3 Main Menu 3-5

Click FILE/OPEN from the Main Menu, then click on the needed job. Once a job has been selected, if there are
earlier revisions available, they are listed in the lower, right corner of the dialog. Only 25 revisions are saved,
with the oldest being deleted, if necessary.

To revert to an earlier revision, select the desired input from the list based on the date stamp.

Clicking Open displays a confirmation dialog. Clicking Yes here restores the selected revision.
• Recent Piping or Recent Structural Files —Displays the four most recently-used piping or structural files in the
File menu.
• Exit—Closes CAESAR II.
\
 3-6 Main Menu

Input Menu

Input M enu
Once a file is selected, the Input Menu indicates the available modules for the selected file type.

Option Description

Piping Inputs a CAESAR II Piping Model (see Chapter 5).

Underground Converts existing piping model to buried pipe (see Chapter 11).

Structural Steel Inputs a CAESAR II Structural Model (see Chapter 10).

 Chapter 3 Main Menu 3-7

Analysis Menu

Analysis M enu
The Analysis Menu allows the user to select from the different calculations available.

Option Description

Statics Performs Static analysis of pipe and/or structure. Available after error checking the input files
(see Chapter 6).

Dynamics Performs Dynamic analysis of pipe and/or structure. Available after error checking the input
files (see Chapter 8).

SIFs Displays scratch pads used to calculate stress intensification factors at intersections and bends.

WRC 107/297 Calculates stresses in vessels due to attached piping (see Chapter 12).

Flanges Performs flange stress and leakage calculations (see Chapter 12).

B31.G Estimates pipeline remaining life (see Chapter 12).

Expansion Joint Evaluates expansion joints using EJMA equations (see Chapter 12).
Rating

AISC Performs AISC code check on structural steel elements (see Chapter 12).

NEMA SM23 Evaluates piping loads on steam turbine nozzles (see Chapter 12).
 3-8 Main Menu

Option Description

API 610 Evaluates piping loads on centrifugal pumps (see Chapter 12).

API 617 Evaluates piping loads on compressors (see Chapter 12).

API 661 Evaluates piping loads on air-cooled heat exchangers (see Chapter 12).

HEI Standard Evaluates piping loads on feedwater heaters (see Chapter 12).

API 560 Evaluates piping loads on fired heaters (see Chapter 12).
 Chapter 3 Main Menu 3-9

3D Graphics Highlights: Temperature and Pressure

Button and Name Description

Highlight the pipe elements for a particular temperature vector in a different color. A
Temperatures color key (legend) is included on the left side of the plot in a separate window. This option
can be used to quickly see temperature variations throughout the system. This is a good
way to verify that temperature changes have been made where appropriate. When more
than one operating temperature has been specified, a drop list is presented so that the
single desired temperature vector can be used in coloring the model.

Clicking the Pressure button produces results similar to the ones described in the
Pressure Temperature section, the model is colored according to the different data defined, and the
corresponding legend appears on the left. When more than one operating pressure has
been defined, a drop list with up to 9 pressures and a hydro pressure, HYD, as defined
choices appears.

Note: Only the pressures and temperatures that were actually defined in the input will appear in the
toolbar as a choice.

Note: The legend window may be resized, docked, and/or dragged away from the view.

Note: While in the described highlighted mode, the model can still be zoomed, panned and rotated.
Any of orthographic projections and single line/volume modes can still be used without affecting the
model highlighted state.

Note: Clicking the same button twice will deactivate the coloring effect.

Note: The same functionality may be achieved from the Options Menu by selecting the
Temperatures or Pressures menu options. Alternatively, the Temperatures can be accessed by
pressing keyboard number buttons 1 through 9.

Note: When the model is being printed using FILE MENU/ PRINT while in one of the highlighted modes
described herein, the color key legend displays in the upper left corner of the page. This is always true,
even if the actual legend window has been dragged away from the view.
 3-10 Main Menu

Output Menu

Out put M enu

The user is presented with all available output of piping and/or structural calculations, which may be selected for
review.

Option Description

Statics Displays Static results (see Chapter 7).

Harmonic Displays Harmonic Loading results (see Chapter 9).

Spectrum Modal Displays Natural Frequency/Mode Shape calculations or Uniform/Force Spectrum

Loading results (see Chapter 9).

Time History Displays Time History Load Simulation results (see Chapter 9).

Animation Displays Animated Graphic simulations of any of the above results.

 Chapter 3 Main Menu 3-11

Tools Menu

Tools M enu
The Tools Menu includes various CAESAR II supporting utilities.

Option Description

Configure/Setup Customizes the behavior of CAESAR II on a directory by directory basis. Enables users
to consider items such as treatment of corrosion, pressure stiffening, and so on.
differently for each directory, due to project or client considerations.

Calculator Launches an on-screen calculator.

Make Units files Creates custom sets of units.

Material Data Base Edits or adds to the CAESAR II Material Data Base.

Accounting Activates or customizes job accounting or generates accounting reports.

Multi-Job Analysis Enables the user to run a stream of jobs without operator intervention.

External Interfaces Displays the interfaces to and from third party software (both CAD and analytical).

Isogen Isometrics Starts Isogen Isometrics.

I-Configure Starts I-Configure.

Explore System Opens the CAESAR II System Folder.

Folder
 3-12 Main Menu

C2Isogen Export
 Using the Split option within C2Isogen in CAESAR II
Enables users to generate several isometric drawings separated at predefined nodes. This procedure assumes
users have previous experience using Isogen in CAESAR II.

1. Start C2Isogen by clicking the Generate Stress Isometrics button on the CAESAR II Main
menu.

2. Click Edit Stress Annotation and the Stress Isometric Annotations screen displays to the right.
3. Click the Split tab to display a list of nodes locations that can be the location for splitting.
Chapter 3 Main Menu 3-13

4. Enable the Node 22 check box so that the entire isometric drawing will be cut at the middle of the
riser.
3-14 Main Menu

5. Click Create Isometric Drawing, then click OK to accept the default setting.

6. Two .dwg files are created. Highlight the first one and then click View to open it.
 Chapter 3 Main Menu 3-15

7. Repeat the step above to view the second drawing.

The two .dwg files are shown in DWG TrueView. The reference indicates that the two drawings are connected
at node 22.
 3-16 Main Menu

Diagnostics Menu

Diagnostics M enu
Diagnostics are provided to help trouble-shoot problem installations.

Option Description

CRC Check Verifies program files are not corrupted.

Build Version Determines the build version of CAESAR II files.

Error Review Reviews description of CAESAR II errors.

DLL Version Check Provides version information on library files used by CAESAR II.
 Chapter 3 Main Menu 3-17

ESL Menu

ESL M enu
The ESL Menu gives access to utilities, which interact with the External Software Lock.

Option Description

Show Data Displays data stored on the ESL.

Generate Access Allows runs to be added or other ESL changes, to be made either through Fax or E-mail
Codes (in conjunction with option below).

Enter re-authorization (See option above).

Codes

Check HASP Device Verifies the location and version of the ESL.
Status

Install HASP Device Installs the ESL Drivers.

Driver
 3-18 Main Menu

View Menu

View M enu
The View Menu allows users to enable the status bar and all toolbars.

Option Description

Toolbar Enable users to display and/or customize a toolbar.

Status Bar Enables users to display a status bar at the bottom of the window.
 Chapter 3 Main Menu 3-19

Help Menu

Help M enu

Option Description

On Line Displays CAESAR II documentation in HTML or PDF format.

Documentation

Desktop On-Line Launches Intergraph CAS online technical support.

Help

On-Line Registration Enables users with Internet access to register electronically with Intergraph CAS.

Information Provides information on the best ways to contact Intergraph CAS personnel for
technical support and provides Internet links for Intergraph CAS downloads and
information.

Check for Upgrades Enables users to verify the most current version of CAESAR II is installed.

About CAESAR II Displays CAESAR II version and copyright information.

Throughout CAESAR II context-sensitive, on-screen help is available by clicking ? or [F1] while the cursor is in
any input field. A help screen displays showing a discussion and the required units, if applicable.
Chapter 4 Piping Input

In This Chapter
Spreadsheet Overview........................................................... 4-2
Data Fields ............................................................................ 4-4
Auxiliary Data Area .............................................................. 4-10
Menu Commands .................................................................. 4-28
3-D Modeler .......................................................................... 4-47
 4-2 Piping Input

Spreadsheet Overview
In order to input a piping model, you must either open a new or existing piping file from the Main Menu, or then
choose INPUT-PIPING. The CAESAR II Piping Input spreadsheet then appears.

Input Spr eadsheet

This spreadsheet is used to describe the piping on an element-by-element basis. It consists of menu
commands/toolbars, which can be used to perform a number of supporting operations and data fields used to
enter information about each piping element. A graphic representation of the model automatically plots on the
right and updates as new elements are added.
 Chapter 4 Piping Input 4-3

Customize Toolbar
CAESAR II enables the user to customize the Spreadsheet and 3D Graphic toolbars. You can determine which
buttons display and their locations, by right-clicking the mouse on the toolbar, which displays the following
dialog

Cust omize T oolba r

Alternatively, users can customize the toolbar by pressing the <Shift> key, clicking a button and dragging it to
the new position. CAESAR II allows users to undo any changes by right clicking on the toolbar, which causes the
Customize Toolbar dialog to appear, and clicking the Reset button.
 4-4 Piping Input

Data Fields
Data fields are grouped logically into blocks of related data on the left side of the screen. The right side of the
screen offers an auxiliary area; with changing data-fields that support items entered through check boxes
(pressing [F12] alternatively displays the various auxiliary screens). The data fields may be torn apart by double-
clicking the [>>] button in the upper right corner of each group. They can be arranged in any order, this aids in
conserving window real estate and increasing space for graphics. The following are the data-field blocks:

Node Numbers

Each element is identified by its end “node” number. Since each input screen represents a piping element, the
element end points - the From node and To node - must be entered. These points are used as locations at which
information may be entered or extracted. The From node and To node are both required data fields.

Note: CAESAR II can generate both values if the AUTO_NODE_INCREMENT directive is set to
other than zero using the Tools-Configure/Setup option of the Main Menu.

Element Lengths

Lengths of the elements are entered as delta dimensions according to the X, Y, and Z rectangular coordinate
system established for the piping system (note that the Y-axis represents the vertical axis). The delta dimensions
DX, DY, and DZ, are the measurements along the X, Y, and Z-axes between the From node and To node. In
most cases only one of the three cells will be used as the piping usually runs along the global axes. Where the
piping element is skewed two or three entries must be made. One or more entries must be made for all elements
except “zero length” expansion joints.

Note: When using feet and inches for compound length and length units, valid entries in this (and most
other length fields) include formats such as: 3-6, 3 ft. -6 in, and 3-6-3/16.

Offsets can be used to modify the stiffness of the current element by adjusting its length and the orientation of its
neutral axis in 3-D space.
 Chapter 4 Piping Input 4-5

Element Direction Cosines

Clicking the Ellipsis (...) button to the right of the element lengths (DX, DY, and DZ) displays the Element
dialog. The Element dialog displays the total Length and Direction Cosines. Changes made to the total element
Length, or Direction Cosines may affect one or all of the element lengths (DX, DY, and DZ). Changes made to
any of the element lengths (DX, DY, and DZ) will affect both the total element Length and Direction Cosines.

Pipe Section Properties

The elements outside diameter, wall thickness, mill tolerance (plus mill tolerance is used for IGE/TD/12 piping
code only), and seam weld (IGE/TD/12 piping code only); corrosion allowance, and insulation thickness are
entered in this block. These data fields carry forward from one screen to the next during the input session and
need only be entered for those elements at which a change occurs. Nominal pipe sizes and schedules may be
specified; CAESAR II converts these values to actual outside diameter and wall thickness. Outside diameter and
wall thickness are required data inputs.

Note: Nominal diameters, thicknesses, and schedule numbers are a function of the pipe size
specification. ANSI, JIS, or DIN is set via the TOOLS-CONFIGURE/SETUP option of the Main Menu or the
Setup toolbar button.
 4-6 Piping Input

Operating Conditions: Temperatures and Pressures

Up to nine temperatures and ten pressures (one extra for the hydrostatic test pressure) can be specified for each
piping element. (The button with the ellipses dots is used to activate a window showing extended operating
conditions input). The temperatures are actual temperatures (not changes from ambient). CAESAR II uses these
temperatures to obtain the thermal strain and allowable stresses for the element from the Material Database. As
an alternative, the thermal strains may be specified directly (see the discussion of ALPHA TOLERANCE in the
Technical Reference Manual). Thermal strains have absolute values on the order of 0.002, and are unitless.
Pressures are entered as gauge values and may not be negative. Each temperature and each pressure entered
creates a loading for use when building load cases. Both thermal and pressure data carries forward from one
element to the next until changed. Entering a value in the Hydro Pressure field causes CAESAR II to build a
Hydro case in the set of recommended load cases.

Note: CAESAR II uses an ambient temperature of 70°F, unless changed using the Special Execution
Parameters Option.
 Chapter 4 Piping Input 4-7

Special Element Information

Special components such as bends, rigid elements, expansion joints and tees require additional information,
which can be defined by enabling the component and entering data in the auxiliary screen. If the element
described by the spreadsheet ends in a bend, elbow or mitered joint, the Bend check box should be set by
double-clicking. This entry opens up the auxiliary data field on the right hand side of the input screen to accept
additional data regarding the bend. CAESAR II usually assigns three nodes to a bend (giving ‘near’, ‘mid’, and
‘far’ node on the bend). Double-clicking the Rigid check box (indicating an element that is much stiffer than the
connecting pipe such as a flange or valve) opens an auxiliary data field to collect the component weight. For
rigid elements, CAESAR II follows these rules:
• When the rigid element weight is entered, i.e. not zero, CAESAR II computes any extra weight due to insulation
and contained fluid, and adds it to the user-entered weight value.
• The weight of fluid added to a non-zero weight rigid element is equal to the same weight that would be
computed for an equivalent straight pipe. The weight of insulation added is equal to the same weight that would
be computed for an equivalent straight pipe times 1.75.
• If the weight of a rigid element is zero or blank, CAESAR II assumes the element is an artificial “construction
element” rather than an actual piping element, so no insulation or fluid weight is computed for that element.
• The stiffness of the rigid element is relative to the diameter (and wall & thickness) entered. Make sure that the
diameter entered on a rigid element spreadsheet is indicative of the rigid stiffness that should be generated.
If an element is an expansion joint, double-clicking that check box brings up an auxiliary screen, which prompts
for stiffness parameters and effective diameter. Expansion joints may be modeled as zero-length (with all
stiffnesses acting at a single point) or as finite-length (with the stiffnesses acting over a continuous element). In
the former case, all stiffness must be entered, in the latter; either the lateral or angular stiffness must be omitted.

Checking the SIF & Tees check box allows the user to specify any component having special stress
intensification factors (SIF). CAESAR II automatically calculates these factors for each component.

Note: Bends, rigids, and expansion joints are mutually exclusive. Refer to the Valve/Flange and
Expansion Joint database discussions later in this chapter for quick entry of rigid element and
expansion joint data.
 4-8 Piping Input

Boundary Conditions

The checkboxes in this block open the auxiliary data field to allow the input of items, which restrain (or impose
movement on) the pipe— restraints, hangers, flexible nozzles or displacements. Though not required, it is
recommended that such information be supplied on the input screen which has that point as the From node or To
node. (This will be of benefit if the data must be located for modification). The auxiliary data fields allow
specification of up to 4 restraints (devices which in some way modify the free motion of the system), one hanger,
one nozzle, or two sets of nodal displacements per element. If needed, additional items for any node can be input
on other element screens.

Loading Conditions

The check boxes in this block allow you to define loadings acting on the pipe. These loads may be individual
forces or moments acting at discrete points, distributed uniform loads (which can be specified on force per unit
length, or gravitational body forces), or wind loadings (wind loadings are entered by specifying a wind shape
factor—the loads themselves are specified when building the load cases. The uniform load and the wind shape
factor check boxes will be unchecked on subsequent input screens. This does not mean that the loads were
removed from these elements; instead, this implies that the loads do not change on subsequent screens.

Note: You can specify uniform loads in g-values by setting a parameter in the Special Execution
Options.

Piping Material

CAESAR II requires the specification of the pipe material’s elastic modulus, Poisson’s ratio, density, and (in most
cases) expansion coefficient. The program provides a database containing the parameters for many common
piping materials. This information is retrieved by picking a material from the drop list, by entering the material
number, or by typing the entire material name and then picking it from the match list. (The coefficient of
expansion does not appear on the input screen, but it can be reviewed during error checking.) Note that materials
18 and 19 represent cold spring properties, cut short and cut long respectively; material 20 activates CAESAR II’s
orthotropic model for use with materials such as fiberglass reinforced plastic pipe. Material 21 permits a totally
user defined material. Using a material with a number greater than 100 permits the use of allowable stresses
from the database.
 Chapter 4 Piping Input 4-9

Material Elastic Properties

This block is used to enter or override the elastic modulus and Poisson’s ratio of the material, if the value in the
database is not correct. These values must be entered for Material type 21 (user specified).

Note: Material properties in the database may be changed permanently using the CAESAR II
Material Database editor.

Densities

The densities of the piping material, insulation, and fluid contents are specified in this block. The piping material
density is a required entry and is usually extracted from the Material Database. You can also enter Fluid
density in terms of specific gravity, if convenient, by following the input immediately with the letters: SG, e.g.
0.85SG (there can be no spaces between the number and the SG).

Note: If an insulation thickness is specified (in the pipe section properties block) but no insulation
density is entered, CAESAR II defaults to the density of calcium silicate.
 4-10 Piping Input

Auxiliary Data Area

The Auxiliary data area is used to display or enter extended data associated with the check box fields.

The data in this area can be displayed by single clicking the appropriate box, or by toggling through the screens
with the use of the [F12] key or by clicking the appropriate tabs.

Note: When there is no auxiliary data, the model status screen appears.

Flange Checks - Equipment Screening

This auxiliary screen is used to enter flange information for In-Line Flange evaluation. The dialog changes to
accommodate input for the two different methods of flange analysis available in CAESAR II. Values for both the
Flange Class/Grade and Gasket Diameter, G can be Read from File… if a user selects ASME – 2003 from
the Flange Pressure Ratings dialog box . The G values are in the text file ASME-2003.G located in system folder
of user’s application data directory.
 Chapter 4 Piping Input 4-11

Bend Data

This auxiliary screen is used to enter information regarding bend radius, miter cuts, fitting wall thickness,
stiffness factor (K-Factor), or attached flanges.

Intermediate node points may be placed at specified angles along the bend, or at the bend mid-point (“M”).
 4-12 Piping Input

Rigid Weight

This auxiliary screen is used to enter the weight of a rigid element. If no weight is entered CAESAR II models the
element as a weightless construction element.

Note: Rigid weights are entered automatically if the Valve and Flange database is used.
 Chapter 4 Piping Input 4-13

Restraints

This auxiliary screen is used to enter data for up to four restraints per spreadsheet. Node number and restraint
Type are required; all other information is optional (omitting the stiffness entry defaults to “rigid”). Restraint
types may be selected from the drop list or typed in.

Note: Skewed restraints may be entered by entering direction cosines with the type, such as X (1,0,1)
for a restraint running at 45º in the X-Z plane.
 4-14 Piping Input

Expansion Joint

This auxiliary screen is used to enter the expansion joint stiffness parameters and effective diameter. For a non-
zero length expansion joint, either the transverse or bending stiffness must be omitted.

Note: Setting the effective diameter to zero de-activates the pressure thrust load. This method may be
used (in conjunction with setting a large axial stiffness) to simulate the effect of axial tie-rods.
 Chapter 4 Piping Input 4-15

Displacements

This auxiliary screen is used to enter imposed displacements for up to two nodes per spreadsheet. Up to nine
displacement vectors may be entered (load components D1 through D9). If a displacement value is entered for
any vector, this direction is considered to be fixed for any other non-specified vectors.

Note: Leaving a direction blank for all nine vectors models the system as being free to move in that
direction. Specifying “0.0” implies that the system is fully restrained in that direction.
 4-16 Piping Input

Equipment Checks/Screening
Equipment nozzle evaluation is one of the most important tasks in analyzing a piping system. The various
nozzle loads, when subjected to the operating criteria of the piping system, must be less than their associated
allowable loads. Verification of the nozzle loads is a time consuming task, which can’t be performed until the
“pipe stress” requirements are met.

CAESAR II enables users to define overall nozzle limits in the input, which then permits a “first pass screening” to
be performed. Actual detailed nozzle evaluation can then be focused on those nozzles that fail this initial
screening.

To illustrate this procedure, consider the limits defined for a nozzle displayed below

The data above specifies the nozzle limits and how the resulting loads (from the analysis) will be compared to
the limits. Once the analysis has been performed and the results are available, users can select the specific load
case the nozzle must be evaluated against as well as the Nozzle Check report. For more information on the
Nozzle Check report see the Equipment Report.
 Chapter 4 Piping Input 4-17

Forces

This auxiliary screen is used to enter imposed forces and/or moments for up to two nodes per spreadsheet. Up to
nine force vectors may be entered (load components F1 through F9).
 4-18 Piping Input

Entering Line Numbers

You can enter line numbers on an element spreadsheet or at the Line Number Auxillary box under the auxiliary
data area.

Line numbers carry forward to successive elements so it’s only necessary to enter data on the first element of a
new line.

To assign a line number name from the Line Number Auxillary you can perform one of the following steps:
 Move the cursor to the line number box or use the Quick Jump shortcut<F9> and type. If you’d
like CAESAR II to automatically assign a name, click the down arrow and select <New..> . The line
number is named “Line Number X”, where “X” is a sequential number.
 Use the auto-complete feature that populates with the nearest match as you type. For example, if
you have a line named “8”-300-123” and you want to assign 8”-150-124, Type ‘8’ and the box
automatically fills with the first line number that matches what you have typed. Press the <End>
key to change the last character.
 Chapter 4 Piping Input 4-19

Uniform Loads

This auxiliary screen is used to enter up to three uniform load vectors (load components U1, U2 and U3). These
uniform loads are applied to the entire current element, as well as all subsequent elements in the model, until
explicitly changed or zeroed out with a later entry.
 4-20 Piping Input

Wind/Wave

This auxiliary screen is used to specify whether this portion of the pipe is exposed to wind or wave loading.
(Note that the pipe may not be exposed to both.) Selecting Wind exposes the pipe to wind loading; selecting
Wave exposes the pipe to wave, current, and buoyancy loadings; selecting Off turns off both types of loading.

This screen is also used to enter the Wind Shape Factor (when Wind is specified) and various wave coefficients
(if left blank they will be program-computed) when Wave Loading is specified.

Entries on this auxiliary screen apply to all subsequent piping, until changed on a later spreadsheet.

Note: Specific wind and wave load cases are built using the Static Load Case Editor.
 Chapter 4 Piping Input 4-21

Allowable Stresses
 4-22 Piping Input

This auxiliary screen is used to select the piping code (from a drop list) and to enter any data required for the
code check. Allowable stresses are automatically updated for material, temperature and code if available in the
Material Database.

Enter Material Fatigue Curve data by clicking the Fatigue Curve button. A dialog displays where users may
enter stress vs. cycle data with up to 8 points per curve.

Note: IGE/TD/12 requires the entry of five fatigue curves representing fatigue classes D, E, F, G, and
W.

The Fatigue Curve data may also be read in from a Intergraph CAS-supplied or user-created file. Users can
access these file by clicking the Read from Files button on the Fatigue Curve dialog.
 Chapter 4 Piping Input 4-23

Stress Intensification Factors/Tees

This auxiliary screen is used to enter stress intensification factors, or fitting types for up to two nodes per
spreadsheet. If components are selected from the drop list, CAESAR II automatically calculates the SIF values as
per the applicable code (unless overridden by the user). Certain fittings and certain codes require additional data
as shown. Fields are enabled as appropriate for the selected fitting.
 4-24 Piping Input

Flexible Nozzles

This auxiliary screen is used to describe flexible nozzle connections. When entered using this dialog, CAESAR II
automatically calculates the flexibilities and inserts them at this location. CAESAR II calculates nozzle loads
according to WRC 297, API 650 or BS 5500 criteria.
 Chapter 4 Piping Input 4-25

Hangers

This auxiliary screen is used to describe hanger installations. Hanger data may be fully completed by the user, or
the hanger may be designed by CAESAR II. In this case, two special load cases are run, the results of which are
used as design parameters which are used to select the springs from the user specified catalog.

Note: CAESAR II provides catalogs for over 25 different spring hanger vendors.
 4-26 Piping Input

Node Names

Activating this check box allows the user to enter text names for the From and/or To nodes (up to ten
characters). These names display instead of the node numbers on the graphic plots and in the reports (note some
of the names may be truncated when space is not available).
 Chapter 4 Piping Input 4-27

Offsets

This auxiliary screen is used to specify offsets to correct modeled element length and orientation to actual length
and orientation. Offsets may be specified at From and/or To nodes.
 4-28 Piping Input

Menu Commands
The CAESAR II Piping Input processor provides many commands, which can be run from the menu, toolbars
or accelerator keys. The menu options are:

File Menu
The File menu is used to perform actions associated with opening, closing and running the job file.

File M enu for the Piping Input Scr een

Button and Name Description

Creates a new CAESAR II job. CAESAR II prompts for the name of the new model.
New

Opens an existing CAESAR II job. CAESAR II prompts for the name

Open

Saves the current CAESAR II job under its current name.

Save

Save As Saves the current CAESAR II job under a new name.

Save As Graphic Image Saves the current CAESAR II job as an HTML page, .TIFF, .BMP, or .JPG file.

Allows the user to assign a password to prevent inadvertent alteration of the model or
Archive to enter the password to unlock the file.

Sends the model through interactive error checking. This is the first step of analysis,
Error Check followed by the building of the static or dynamic load cases (see Chapter 6).
 Chapter 4 Piping Input 4-29

Button and Name Description

Error checks the model in a non-interactive way and halts only for fatal errors; uses the
Batch Run existing or default static load cases, and performs the static analysis). The next step is
the output processor.

Allows the user to print out an input listing. CAESAR II prompts the user for the data
Print items to include.

Provides print preview of input listing.

Print Preview

Print Setup Sets up the printer for the input listing.

Recent Piping Files Open a file from the list of most recently used jobs.
 4-30 Piping Input

Edit Menu
The Edit menu provides commands for cutting and pasting, navigating through the spreadsheets, and
performing a few small utilities.

Button and Name Descri

Moves the spreadsheet to the next element in the model, adding a new element if
Continue
there is no next element.

Duplicates elements in a block. Displays the Block Duplicate dialog box. You can
Duplicate
make identical copies of the block. You can also make a mirror image by flipping
the chosen elements in one of the orthogonal planes. Mirror imaging is done on the
piping delta dimensions only. That is, restraints are copied but not mirror imaged. A
+Y restraint does not become a -Y restraint when mirrored in the XZ plane.
 Chapter 4 Piping Input 4-31

Button and Name Descr

Change Sequence Changes or rearranges the sequence (order) of elements while preserving the
geometry.

Typically, the Elements dialog box displays by the order of elements entered during
the input process. The order in the list is important because when you specify some
particular input values for an element in the list, that value propagates to all the
elements in the list following it UNTIL that value is explicitly changed.

When you import piping model data (in the form of PCFs) from other piping input
design software such as Intergraph Smart3D, CAESAR II imports the elements in one
sequence. However, that sequence may not be what you want. For example, you may
want all the high pressure elements to be listed together. This reduces the number of
unique input fields to verify and can help you to logically organize the model. You
can re-organize elements in a way so that those with similar carry-forward properties
are placed consecutively.
Invert Assigns new From Node and To Node values to the selected block of elements. The
Invert
command reverses the order of the elements in the selected group as well as the node
numbering while preserving the geometry of the input model.

Note: Contiguous segments (sets of elements) may be selected in either the Elements
dialog box, the 3D Graphics pane, or the Line Numbers dialog box.

The Invert command can be very helpful when you have imported a new piping input
model from an external source, such as a Piping Component File (PCF), and you want
to re-assign node numbers. For example, for an imported run from a termination to a
tee, invert it to run from the tee to the termination.

Renumber Rearrange the node numbers in the block. You can use this feature to clean up part or
all of the piping system. It is not unusual to put the entire model in one block and do a
full renumber of all the nodes.

Caution: Make copies of any large jobs before renumbering them. Be particularly
careful when renumbering systems containing large numbers of interconnected
restraints with CNodes. It is common for CAESAR II not to renumber a CNode in a
block. This is because the CNode is connected to a node outside the block. The
CNodes are not renumbered if they do not connect to a node in the block and on the
piping system.

Tip: Any possible confusion can be avoided in these instances by starting the
renumbering at a node greater than the largest node in the model. If all of the nodes are
renumbered successfully (that is, there are not any dangling CNodes), then the node
Increment command can be issued with a negative increment to shift the newly
renumbered nodes back into the original range.

Typically, you may graphically select multiple blocks to renumber. However

CAESAR II can only perform the renumber operation for the first block. In this case,
CAESAR II displays a message box with information about which block will be
renumbered. You can then continue to renumber the second block and so on until all
blocks are renumbered.

Insert Inserts an element either before or after the current element.

 4-32 Piping Input

Button and Name Description

Deletes the selected block of elements. A confirmation message displays before the delete
Delete action is taken.

Button and Name Description

Allows the user to find an element containing one or more named nodes (if two nodes are
Find entered, the element must contain both nodes). Enabling the Zoom To check box will
display the element if found.

Button and Name Description

Global Prompts the user to enter global (absolute) coordinates for the first node of any
disconnected segments.

Closes a loop by filling in the delta coordinates between two nodes on the spreadsheet.
Close Loop

Increment Gives the user the opportunity to change the automatic node increment.

Distance Calculates the distance between the origin and a node, or between two nodes.

Presents the input data in an alternative, list format that displays a drop down menu where
List users can select any list. This provides the benefit of showing all of the element data in a
context setting. The list format also permits block operations such as Duplicate, Delete,
Copy, Renumber on the element data. For more information on the list input format, see
the Technical Reference Manual.
 Chapter 4 Piping Input 4-33

List Input For mat

Button and Name Description

Skips to the Next Element.

Next Element

Goes to the Previous Element.

Previous Element

Goes to the First Element.

First Element
Goes to the Last Element.
Last Element
 4-34 Piping Input

Button and Name Description

Reverses/Cancels any modeling steps done in the CAESAR II Input module one at a
Undo time. This can also be accomplished by using the he Ctrl-Z hot key or selecting
Edit/Undo from the Main Menu. An unlimited number of steps (limited only by
amount of available memory) may be undone.
Note that making any input change while in the middle of the "undo stack" of course
resets the "redo" stack.

Repeats the last step. An unlimited number of steps (limited only by amount of
Redo available memory) may be undone. Note that making any input change while in the
middle of the "undo stack" of course resets the "redo" stack.
Note that making any input change while in the middle of the "undo stack" of course
resets the "redo" stack.

Opens the Static Load Case Editor window. This button is enabled when the job is
error checked.
Edit Static Load Case

Opens the Dynamic Load Case Editor window. This button is enabled when the job
is error checked.
Edit Dynamic Load
Case
Review Current Units Located on the Edit Menu it allows users to review units used to create the report file.
Changing units in the configuration file will not affect the input. To change Input
units from the Main Menu use Tools-Convert Input to New Units.
 Chapter 4 Piping Input 4-35

Model Menu
The Model menu contains modeling aids, as well as means for entering associated, system-wide information.

M odel M enu

Button and Name Description

Allows you to break the element into two unequal length elements or into many equal
Break length elements. A single node may be placed as a break point anywhere along the
element, or multiple nodes may be placed at equal intervals the node step interval
between the FROM and TO nodes determines the number of nodes placed.

Break

Br ea k Element

Note: Restraint configurations may be automatically copied from any other node in the system to the
new nodes.
 4-36 Piping Input

Button and Name Description

Allows you to model a valve or flange from one of the CAESAR II databases. Choosing a
Valve combination of Rigid Type, End Type, Class and insertion point constructs a rigid element
with the length and weight extracted from the database.

Valve and Fla nge Data base

Note: Selecting FLG in the CADWORX database adds the length and weight of two flanges (and two
gaskets) into the selected valve.

Button and Name Description

Activates the Expansion Joint Modeler which automatically builds a complete assembly of
Expansion Joints the selected expansion joint style, using the bellows stiffnesses and rigid element weights
extracted from the vendors’ expansion joint catalogs.

Expansion J oints
 Chapter 4 Piping Input 4-37

Button and Name Description

Allows the user to enter a job title up to sixty lines long.

Title

Title

Button and Name Description

Prompts the user for system - wide hanger design criteria.

Hanger Design Control Data

Ha nger Design C ont rol Dat a

Note: System-wide hanger design criteria are used for all hanger designs unless overruled at specific
hanger locations.
 4-38 Piping Input

Environment Menu
The Environment menu provides some miscellaneous items.

Button and Name Description

Allows the user to run “what if” tests on the Stress Intensification Factors of
intersections.
Review SIFs at Intersection Nodes
Allows the user to run “what if” tests on the Stress Intensification Factors of
selected bends.
Review SIFs at Bend Nodes

Allows the user to set options affecting the analysis of the current job. Items
covered include ambient temperature, pressure stiffening, displacements due to
Special Execution Parameters pressure (Bourdon effect), Z-axis orientation, etc.
 Chapter 4 Piping Input 4-39

Special Execution Par a met er s

• Include Piping Input Files—Allows the user to include other piping models in the current model.

Include Piping Files

 4-40 Piping Input

The same file may be included more than once by highlighting it in the list, then changing the rotation angle
(ROTY) or nodal increment (Inc) before clicking Add.
• Include Structural Input Files—Allows the incorporation of structural models into the piping model.

Include Struct ural Files

Button and Name Description

Show Informational Allows the user to specify whether or not you receive information messages when
Messages CAESAR II converts nominal diameter and thicknesses to actual diameter and
thicknesses.

Reset View or Allows users to control the way graphics behave when adding new or modifying
Refresh existing elements.

Opens the configuration file for review and editing.

CAESAR II
Configuration

Option and View menu choices list graphic controls and manipulation commands.

Advanced PCF Import (APCF)

The Advanced PCF Import (APCF) option provides an interactive, customizable way of importing Piping
Component Files (PCFs) to the CAESAR II piping environment.
• Provides more control and flexibility over element sequencing and node numbering
• Provides the capability to build and verify the model in an incremental way
• Provides the capability to selectively update the CAESAR II model
An interactive interface is built directly into the CAESAR II input environment that:
• Does everything that the PCF batch process does (See PCF/Intergraph Smart 3D PCF doc in External
Interfaces section)
• Builds the piping input model on a line-by-line basis if needed
• Provides the ability to define and control node numbering
• Uses the Block Operations modeling tools to ease modeling changes.
You can perform the APCF function to create a new model or add to any existing job model. The CAESAR II input
model constructed from the PCFs assumes the Units System of the current job, plus automatically attach/intersect the
piping generated from the PCF to the existing piping, if appropriate.
 Chapter 4 Piping Input 4-41

The PCF file format is a standard drawing exchange format developed by Alias Ltd. A PCF is a flat text file
containing detailed information about the piping system components. The information is extracted from a CAD
system. Details on the format of the PCF and its capabilities can be obtained from Alias.

Converting the PCF

1. Before you begin the conversion, determine:
• Which files will be converted
• How they should be combined
• How they should be numbered on the first conversion process.
2. Click Environment > Advanced PCF Import (APCF) to begin the conversion of a PCF(s) to a CAESAR II Piping Input
file.
The Advanced PCF Import (APCF) dialog box displays.

3. Click Choose Files.

4. Select the PCF(s) to convert.
A PCF has a file extension of .pcf.
 4-42 Piping Input

PCFs may be selected all at once or each one may be added to the conversion list just prior to being converted.
Only those files with the check box selected are processed.

Files can be arranged in the order you want to process them by dragging-and-dropping the file names to the
desired position in the conversion list.
In the example, the elements of the header, which includes files TPA-551-0012, 551-00513, 521-90100_BL, 521-
90100, and 521-90102, are processed first.
Vents off of that header are processed next (in the example, 521-12101, 521-12113, 521-12112, 521-12111, 521-
12138, 521-12137, 521-10103, 521-10104, 521-90461).
Finally, the separate detached section files (551-0012, 551-0041) are processed last.
5. Set the conversion options listed in the lower left-hand pane.
 Condense Options
 Miscellaneous Options
 CAESAR II Element Properties
The options can be set identically for all conversion passes, or they can be changed for each pass. The example
uses Piping Materials based on Pipe Spec and also set a Diameter Limit (exclude pipes below 3" nominal) as well
as condense rigids, tees, and bends.

In this example, clear the check boxes for all files except those comprising the header. This converts the header
files. To process them together, define a Start Node of 0 for files 2 through 5 ("0" signifies "carry on numbering
with the next available number"). Start numbering the system with node 1000 and continue with an increment of
10.
This means that all of the elements from all of the files are combined, sorted, ordered, numbered, and so forth. For
example, a header from the first five files is processed before adding branches from the first file as though they
came from a single large PCF. This is assured by processing a group of files together during the same process,
and defining the Start Node for files after the first in the group as "0". Processing files individually or entering a

Start Node (or changing the Node Increment) for specific files in the group being processed causes those files to
be processed individually.
 Chapter 4 Piping Input 4-43
6. Begin the conversion by clicking the Begin Processing button.
This creates the first portion of the CAESAR II piping input model.
At this point, all CAESAR II functions (3D graphics pane, Classic Input Piping dialog box, Elements dialog box) are
available for examining the resultant piping input model.
Remember that you can use the Undo button.

7. In the example, you can select the vent lines to be processed separately, each with their own numbering system.
8. In the example, check each of the next 9 file names, plus define the Start Node for each.
4-44 Piping Input

This causes each individual vent line to be fully processed before proceeding to the next. Alternatively these files could be
processed individually simply by running them one at a time.

The vents are processed as requested.

Undo is available.
 Chapter 4 Piping Input 4-45
9. Process the second detached section, with both files processed together, and the Start Node set at node at 10000.

After the conversion processing completes, the CAESAR II piping input model looks like this in the example.
4-46 Piping Input

At this point, the entries for Delta Coordinates, Temperatures, Pressures, and so forth may contain values
calculated to several decimal places due to repetitive unit conversions and other calculations during the
conversion process. For example, see the DX = -5390.7523 mm and the Temp 1 = 250.0214C.
These entries can be automatically rounded to the nearest integer by closing the APCF Import dialog box using
the "X" in the right top corner.

We recommend that this round-off process not be done until all PCFs have been imported. This is because
connectivity is determined based upon sharing global coordinates. If element delta coordinates get rounded off, then nodal
global coordinates may get changed enough that they fall outside of the connection tolerances.
 Chapter 4 Piping Input 4-47
Warnings in Log.RTF file
During the conversion process, Status Messages display in the Message Area in the lower right of the dialog box.
These messages are also written to a LOG file with the name XXXX.LOG.RTF, where XXXX represents the name (less the
extension) of the Combined CAESAR II file (in the case where many PCFs are being combined into a single CAESAR II
model) or the first CAESAR II file in the list (where one or more PCFs are being combined into individual CAESAR II
models).
1. Click Save Warnings to save the warnings to a different file.

PCF Interface Custom Attributes

PCFs contain custom attributes in the form of component-attribute<n>. Intergraph Smart3D can generate PCFs with
ISO_STRESS PCF configuration. This configuration assures that a number of various data fields are passed in specific PCF
data fields.
 COMPONENT-ATTRIBUTE1 = Design pressure
 COMPONENT-ATTRIBUTE2 = Maximum temperature
 COMPONENT-ATTRIBUTE3 = Material name
 COMPONENT-ATTRIBUTE4 = Wall thickness (reducing thickness in the case of reducing components)
 COMPONENT-ATTRIBUTE5 = Insulation thickness
 COMPONENT-ATTRIBUTE6 = Insulation density
 COMPONENT-ATTRIBUTE7 = Corrosion allowance
 COMPONENT-ATTRIBUTE8 = Component weight
 COMPONENT-ATTRIBUTE9 = Fluid density
 COMPONENT-ATTRIBUTE10 = Hydro test pressure
The units associated with the values of these attributes are defined by including a descriptive unit label after the value. For
example: the pressure attribute, COMPONENT-ATTRIBUTE1, can be specified as "COMPONENT-ATTRIBUTE1 15.3
barg". If the unit label chosen ("barg") is not one of the labels recognized by CAESAR II as defined through the Tools > Make
Units File on the CAESAR II Main menu, then you must include that label in the PCF_UNITS_MAP.TXT file in the
CAESAR II System folder.

 The only PCF SUPPORT attribute that is not ignored is the SUPPORT-DIRECTION attribute. It must have a value of UP,
DOWN, EAST, WEST, NORTH, or SOUTH.
 One note on the Material Number setting is that the selected material is applied to a piping element as the default only if
the PCF COMPONENT-ATTRIBUTE3 for that element is not specified or recognized.
You can achieve the best results by preparing customized mapping files before beginning the conversion process.
You may use default mapping files if the values fit our model. There are a number of mapping files that define various values.
Locate these files in the CAESAR II system folder.

PCF Unit Mapping

The PCF_UNITS_MAP.TXT file maps the PCF Units name to the conversion factor used to convert it to the CAESAR II
internal units (English).
This file defines three columns:
CAESAR II Unit Displays the internal unit used by the software
PCF Unit Displays the user-supplied unit label
Conversion from CAESAR II -> Displays the conversion factor used to convert the user-supplied unit to a
PCF CAESAR II internal unit
Comments can be added at the end of each line separated from the last column value by spaces and preceded by the "*"
character.
 4-48 Piping Input

All PCF component attributes can be specified inside the PCF with their associated units. Any unit specified by the PCF
component attributes which is not a standard internal CAESAR II unit as defined by the Tools > Make Units File dialog on the
CAESAR II Main menu needs to be mapped inside the PCF_UNITS_MAP.TXT file.
CAESAR II divides the user-supplied value by this constant to calculate the value for the attribute that is displayed by
the software according to the units specified in the configuration options (except that temperature from C° to F° will also add
the 32 °).
To Modify the PCF_UNITS_MAP.TXT File
Locate this file in the CAESAR II system folder.
This is an optional task. You can review the default file and determine if you need to make changes to fit your model.
1. Open the PCF_UNITS_MAP.TXT file in any text viewer, such as Notepad.
The CAESAR II default file looks like this.

2. Modify any of the units definitions or add another unit definition as needed.
3. Save and close the file.

PCF Material Mapping

The PCF_MAT_MAP.TXT file maps PCF Material names to a corresponding CAESAR II material number. Note that the first
line is currently reserved to the CAESAR II version number. The match in this file must be an exact match. If no match is
found, then the software searches the CAESAR II material database to find the "best match" (where the "best match" tries to do
an intelligent match, adjusting for dashes, spaces, "GR", "SA" versus "A", and so forth) for the material name.
PCF COMPONENT-ATTRIBUTE3 is used by the software to set the material attribute for each component. If the
COMPONENT-ATTRIBUTE3 value is not defined or recognized, the software applies the default material as specified by the
Material Number value in the dialog box.
Any material specified by the PCF COMPONENT-ATTRIBUTE3 which is not a standard CAESAR II material as defined in
the Tools > Material Data Base dialog under the Material > Edit… menu must be mapped inside the PCF_MAT_MAP.TXT
file.
To Modify the PCF_MAT_MAP.TXT File
This file is located in the CAESAR II system folder.
This is an optional task. You can review the default file and determine if you need to make changes to fit your model.
1. Open the PCF_MAT_MAP.TXT file in any text viewer, such as Notepad.
 Chapter 4 Piping Input 4-49

The CAESAR II default file looks like this.

2. Modify any of the materials definitions.

3. Save and close the file.
PCF Restraint Mapping
The PCF_RES_MAP.TXT file defines the CAESAR II restraint types corresponding to PCF support/restraint names.
The PCF SUPPORT attribute is used by CAESAR II to apply supports at the specified coordinates. Only the SUPPORT-
DIRECTION identifier is interpreted by the software if no match is found for a particular support NAME in the
PCF_RES_MAP.TXT file. The SUPPORT-DIRECTION identifier must have a value of UP, DOWN, EAST, WEST, NORTH,
or SOUTH.
In order to fine-tune the support configuration placed on the imported model by CAESAR II for a given PCF SUPPORT
component, the PCF support NAME identifier value needs to be mapped in the PCF_RES_MAP.TXT file.
This file includes instructions on the required mapping format for each PCF support. The following figure illustrates a typical
PCF SUPPORT component, highlighting the support NAME value which should be used to define CAESAR II support
mapping.
 4-50 Piping Input
To Modify the PCF_RES_MAP.TXT File
Locate the file in the CAESAR II system folder.
This is an optional task. You can review the default file and determine if you need to make changes to fit your model.
This file defines the CAESAR II function corresponding to PCF support/restraint names.
1. Open the PCF_RES_MAP.TXT file in any text viewer, such as Notepad.

In the example, the Support type VG100 corresponds functionally to two CAESAR II supports:
 +Vertical support (weight support)
 Guide, each with friction coefficients equal to 0.3
This file supports a wide range of support functions, plus the key words MU= (for friction) and GAP= (to define gaps in
the restraint).

Syntax for each support type is:

<Support Name> <N->
<Restraint Function> <MU=> <GAP=>
<Support Name> - CAESAR II considers a matching as any PCF support/restraint name that contains this <Support Name>
(not an exact match). Best results are achieved if the <Support Names> are listed in order of longest names to shortest names.
Otherwise VG1" might register as a match before VG100 is processed.
<N>- - Followed by N lines of: This means how many CAESAR II restraints need to get placed on the corresponding
Restraint auxiliary screen. N should be limited to 4 or less.
<Restraint Function> - This is defined in terms of CAESAR II function (GUI, LIM, VHGR, etc.), Global Axes (VERT, NS,
EW, and so forth), or Local Axes (A, B, C, and so forth):
 ANC, GUI, LIM, VHGR, CHGR – These create a CAESAR II Anchor, Guide, Axial Restraint, Hanger, or Hanger
respectively. The last two create to-be-designed hangers, which may end up as either variable or constant hangers.
 Chapter 4 Piping Input 4-51
 VERT, EW, NS – These create translational restraints corresponding to the compass points of the global axes (Y, X,
Z respectively for the Y-up setting, and Z, X, Y respectively for the Z-up setting). See the figure below. One-way
restraints may be created by prefixing with "+" or "-".

 A, B, C – These create translational restraints corresponding to the local axes of the support/pipe installation. The "A"
corresponds to the centerline of the pipe, "B" corresponds to the "direction" attributed to the support, and "C"
corresponds to the cross-product of the A and B axes. As with the global restraints, one-way restraints may be created
by prefixing with "+" or "-". See the figure below.

As with global restraints, one-way restraints may be created by prefixing with "+" or "-".
<MU=> Optional keyword followed by a value for adding a friction coefficient to the restraint (not valid with ANC, VHGR,
CHGR).
<GAP=> Optional keyword followed by a value and set of units for adding a gap to the restraint (not valid with ANC, VHGR,
CHGR).
The software also processes equipment nozzles designated by the END-CONNECTION-EQUIPMENT keyword as
imposed thermal displacements in all degrees of freedom, all with values of 0.0. This creates an initial behavior of an anchor,
but allows you to easily impose actual thermal displacements when known.
Examples: The following examples illustrate typical restraint configurations, along with suggested mapping entries.
 4-52 Piping Input

Variable Spring Hanger

These represent variable spring hangers, and are mapped onto a single CAESAR II support (= VHGR). This is interpreted as a
program-designed spring hanger in CAESAR II.

Constant Effort Spring Hanger

This represents a constant effort spring hanger, and thus is mapped onto a single CAESAR II support (= CHGR). This is treated
as a program-designed spring hanger in CAESAR II.
Note that it is identical to the VHGR shown in the figure above.
 Chapter 4 Piping Input 4-53

These hanger rod assemblies only resist downward (weight) loads, and allow upward movement. In CAESAR II, they are
typically modeled as +Y (or +Z, depending on how the vertical axis is set).

These sliding supports only resist downward (weight) loads, and allow upward movement. They are represented as a single
+VERT support. However, since they slide against a base, most stress analysts prefer to add a friction coefficient (MU=x.xx).

YRIGID 1
VERT MU=0.3
or
YRIGID 1
B MU=0.3
These restraints resist load/movement in both directions (so the "+" of the previous two supports is eliminated). If the restraint
is always installed vertically, then use the first definition (VERT). If the restraint is installed in any direction (for example,
vertically or horizontally), use the second definition B, indicating that it acts along the installed support direction. This assumes
that the installed direction of the restraint is always defined as the direction from the main steel towards the pipe. Since sliding
is involved, a friction coefficient is included as well.
 4-54 Piping Input

UGUIDE 1
GUI MU=0.3
or
UGUIDE 1
C MU=0.3
If this restraint is always installed vertically on horizontal lines (as shown in the figure above), then the support function can
always be modeled as a Guide (with sliding friction). If the restraint may be installed in any direction at all (with restraint
direction corresponding to the direction of the attachment point toward the pipe), then use the second defintion ("C") as it
represents the direction lateral to the pipe and the restraint.

TEESUPPORT 2
+VERT MU=0.3
GUI MU=0.3
This restraint maps to two functions:
 +VERTical
 GUIde
Since sliding is involved in both functions, friction coefficients are provided for both.

VERTLATERAL 2
VERT MU=0.3
GUI MU=0.3
or
VERTLATERAL 2
B MU=0.3
C MU=0.3
 Chapter 4 Piping Input 4-55

This restraint maps to two functions:

 up/down restraint
 side-to-side restraint
If it is always installed vertically, then it is defined as a VERTical and a GUIde. If it is possible that the restraint may be
rotated about the pipe to be installed in any direction, then use the second defintion, which represents restraint along the
direction of the support as well as lateral to the support and pipe.

VERTAXIAL 2
+VERT MU=0.3
LIM MU=0.3
or
VERTAXIAL 2
+VERT MU=0.3
A MU=0.3
This restraint maps to two functions:
 +VERT support
 An axial restraint. The axial restraint can be defined equally as "LIM" or "A" (as "A" corresponds to restraint along the
direction of the pipe centerline).

SWAYSTRUT 1
B
 4-56 Piping Input

These represent sway struts, which may be installed in any direction, and provide restraint along the line of action of the sway
strut. Assuming that the restraint direction corresponds to the direction of the sway strut, then the best way to define these
restraints is "B" (restraint along the support direction).

ANCHOR 1
ANC

These restraints all restrict movement of the pipe in all six degrees-of-freedom, so they can be defined as Anchors ("ANC").

PENETRATION 4
+C GAP=aMM
-C GAP=bMM
-VERT GAP=cMM
+VERT GAP=dMM

Some of these can get quite complex, especially if restraints have different gaps in different directions. It may require trial and
error to determine exactly how the +/- restraint directions correspond to the support direction passed in the PCF. In some cases,
you may want to model the restraint behavior in CAESAR II rather than in the mapping file.
1. Modify any of the restraints definitions.
2. Save and close the file.
 Chapter 4 Piping Input 4-57
PCF Stress Intensification Factor Mapping
The PCF_SIF_MAP.TXT file defines the CAESAR II SIF data to be applied at the intersection of tees and Olets. The file also
provides support for some SIF keywords.
Stress Intensification Factors (SIF) are not assigned a separate PCF COMPONENT-ATTRIBUTE or defined in any other way
inside PCFs. In order to tune Stress Intensification Factor settings of imported PCF components, CAESAR II provides the
PCF_SIF_MAP.TXT mapping file.
The file defines five columns:
SKEYS PCF components use SKEYS to indicate how their subtype is used within
the general component group.
CAESAR II SIF TYPE Should be set to the SIF type number used by CAESAR II as shown in
the CAESAR II SIF TYPE figure below.
PAD=X.X UNITS (optional) Should be set to the SIF pad thickness including the applicable
unit (for example, PAD=10 MM)
Ii=X.XX (optional) Should be set to the inside SIF of the component, this is a
multiplier and therefore unit-less (for example, Ii=1.23)
Ii=X.XX (optional) Should be set to the outside SIF of the component, this is a
multiplier and therefore unit-less (for example, Io=2.34)

Applying the above example values to set the TERF SKEY to the associated reinforced type requires the following mapping
entry to be specified inside the PCF_RES_MAP.TXT file:
TERF 1 PAD=10 MM Ii=1.23 I0=2.34
Each PCF component defines an SKEY. For an example, see the second SUPPORT component identifier listed in Image 03 in
the figure above (SKEY 01HG). In this case, these are typically four-character words indicating tee type (CROSS, OLET) and
end type. The PCF menu command matches the SKEYS to the entries in this mapping file. If an SKEY is not found in this file,
you should add it.
 4-58 Piping Input
To Modify the PCF_SIF_MAP.TXT File
Locate this file in the CAESAR II system folder.
This step is strongly recommended in order to take advantage of the capabilities of the PCF menu command.

1. Open the PCF_SIF_MAP.TXT file in any text viewer, such as Notepad.

2. Modify any of the SIF definitions.

3. Save and close the file.
 Chapter 4 Piping Input 4-59

How to Use the Advanced PCF Import (APCF)

1. Click Environment > Advanced PCF Import (APCF) from the Piping Input menu.
The Advanced PCF Import (APCF) dialog box displays.

2. Click the Choose Files button.

 A PCF must have a file extension of .pcf.

 You can add one or multiple files to be converted.
 Remove PCF(s) from the File Name list by pressing Delete on the keyboard.
The selected file(s) displays in the File Name portion of the dialog box.
3. Enter the Start Node and Increment value for each of the file names.
4. Change any of the Conversion Options in the lower left-hand pane as needed.
5. Click the Begin Processing button to initiate the conversion process.
During the Conversion Process, Status Messages display in the Message Area in the lower right of the PCF Interface
dialog box.
These messages are also written to a LOG file with the name XXXX.LOG.RTF, where XXXX represents the name (less
the extension) of the Combined CAESAR II file. The log file is placed in the selected CAESAR II output file folder.
6. View your new CAESAR II input model.
 4-60 Piping Input
For example, this CAESAR II model was created from the sample file 1001-P.PCF:

 Elements are ordered and nodes are numbered in a logical manner.

 The following attributes transfer correctly from the PCF_UNITS_ MAP_TXT file.
 Materials
 Diameter and Wall Thickness
 Corrosion Allowance and Fluid Density
 Operating Conditions (Temperature and Pressures) also are translated.
 The following attributes transfer correctly from the PCF_RES_MAP.TXT file.
 Restraints
 The following attributes transfer correctly from the PCF_SIF_MAP.TXT file.
 Tees convert with the correct SIFs – in this case a Welding Tee and a Weldolet.
 Besides supports/restraints, boundary conditions such as equipment connections transfer (in this example, at all three
nozzle connections are set). The user can easily change the thermal displacements.
 Weights of in-line components, insulation thickness and density, all material properties, and Allowable Stress information
transfer correctly.
 Line numbers are assigned according to the name of the PCF file.
In this example, the output displays the applicable CAESAR II warnings, which are informational only.
 Phantom components (PCF items marked as "CONTINUATION" or "STATUS DOTTED" or "MATERIAL LIST
EXCLUDE") are ignored during the conversion process.
 Tee components are modeled using the thickness of the matching pipe.
 Node Numbering preferences (start node and increment) are based on the Node Numbering Increment set in the active
CAESAR II Configuration file.

Start Node
Indicates the starting node number in the resulting CAESAR II model. By default, the entire model is renumbered using this
value as the starting point. To disable renumbering, you must set this option and Increment (on page 61) to zero.
 Chapter 4 Piping Input 4-61
Increment
Defines the value used as a node number increment. This value is used during the renumbering of the model. To disable
renumbering, you must set this option and Start Node (on page 60) to zero.

Condense Rigids
Instructs the software to combine rigids that connect to each other into a single element.
This indicates whether these items should be condensed/merged into adjacent elements. For example, a valve with adjacent
gaskets and flanges would be combined into a single rigid element.
If activated, then elements are condensed/merged unless there is a valid reason not to (change of cross section, change of
operating conditions, restraint at the location, and so forth).
The default value is TRUE.

Condense Elbows
When set to TRUE, this directive instructs the software NOT to treat elbows as two designated elements. Rather, it is
condensed into its adjacent elements for each direction in which the elbow travels.
The default value is TRUE.
 4-62 Piping Input
Use Pipe Materials Only
Instructs the software to apply pipe materials only as defined by the PCF COMPONENT-ATTRIBUTE3 identifiers. Values can
be either TRUE or FALSE.
Activating this option replaces the material of various components (elbows, valves, flanges, reducers, tees, and so forth) with
the appropriate piping material, where possible, leading to a much more homogenous CAESAR II model. Matching
components to their corresponding piping material is done by assembling a matrix of Pipe Spec/diameter combinations, based
the available data transmitted in the PCF. Where an exact match is available, the material substitution is made. Where piping
materials are available for the Pipe Spec but not the diameter, a match is made to the closest diameter. Where no piping
material is available for the Pipe Spec, the component material is retained. For example, A106 Grade B would be applied but
A234 Grade WPB would be ignored.
If you choose to condense Rigids, Tees, or Elbows, the Use Pipe Material should be set to the default of TRUE.

Combine PCF Files

Convert and combine PCFs in the dialog box into a single CAESAR II model. You are prompted for the name of the combined
CAESAR II file.
You can merge multiple PCFs into a single CAESAR II model using Combine PCF Files and have the originating PCF
name become the line number.

Model Rotation
The rotation of the +X axis of the CAESAR II model should be rotated about the vertical axis away from the PCF's East
compass point. The default setting is zero, which imposes no rotation. Select +90 to rotate the model a positive 90-degrees.
Select -90 to rotate the model a negative 90-degrees.
Z can also be veritical based on special execution setting.
An alternative way of rotating the model is to use the Rotate command from the Block Operations tool bar.
Diameter Limit
Use this to exclude the processing of small pipes, such as vents and drains, by specifying the size (nominal diameter) below
which pipes will be ignored.

Material Number
Select the CAESAR II material to be assigned to components which do not have the material attribute explicitly set otherwise.
The default is low carbon steel (material number 1).
Pipe Schedule/Wall Thickness
Select the default schedule of the pipe to be used in case the wall thickness of the pipe cannot be determined from the PCF.
 Chapter 4 Piping Input 4-63

Tools Menu
The Tools menu enables users to reset the toolbar, display a list of mini windows, and import and/or export
displacements.

Tools M enu for the Piping Input Screen

Button and Name Description

Reset Toolbar Layout Sets Toolbars to the default layout.

Provides a list of mini-windows for data
Mini-windows input.

Import/Export Displacements Import/Export nodal displacements from/to

from File a text or an Excel file.

Clicking the Import/Export Displacements from File menu option displays the Import/Export Displacements
dialog.
 4-64 Piping Input

Exporting Displacements To A File

To export nodal displacements to a file:

1 Type the path and name of a displacement file in the text box or select the path and name of a
displacement file by clicking the Browse button.
2 Click Export to send the nodal displacements to the selected file.
3 Click Done to exit the Import/Export Displacements dialog.

Note: If there are no displacements in a CAESAR II job an export operation creates a displacement
template file in which all nodes are listed according to the element list.

Importing Displacements From A File

 Chapter 4 Piping Input 4-65

To import nodal displacements from a file:

4 Type the path and name of the displacement file, or select a displacement file by clicking the
Browse button. The Open dialog displays.

Two file formats can be used to create a displacement file:

Fixed format with a .disp file extension.
Commas Separated Value format with a .csv file extension.
By default, displacement files display in comma separated values format(.csv).
Users can also choose displacement files with the fixed format (.disp) by clicking Displacement Import File
(*.dsp) from the Files of type box, as displayed below:
 4-66 Piping Input

5 Browse the folders to search and then select the appropriate displacement file.
6 Open the selected file by either double-clicking the file name or clicking Open.
7 Click Import. During the import process, if an erroneous condition is detected for a displacement
node a warning messages will display. Finally, a summary report is generated after all displacement
data is processed. The Import/Export Displacements dialog may resemble the dialog below after
importing a displacement file to a CAESAR II model.

For more details about warning messages and the summary report, refer to the Importing an Exporting
Displacements of Auxiliary Fields Imposed Loads section, in the Piping Screen Reference chapter. After
reviewing warning messages and a summary report, users can exit the Import/Export Displacements dialog by
clicking Done. The first two screen captures show what displacement files look like in Notepad for both disp
and csv formats. The third and fourth screen captures show what displacement files in Microsoft Excel. For a
detailed description of both file formats, refer to the Importing and Exporting Displacements of Auxiliary Fields
Imposed Loads section.

Notepa d Exa mple (*.disp) forma t

 Chapter 4 Piping Input 4-67

Notepa d Exa mple (*.csv) for ma t

Excel Example (*.csv) for mat

 4-68 Piping Input

If a CAESAR II job has no displacements the displacement export operation creates a displacement template
file as shown below.

Excel Example (*.csv) for mat Displacement File Templat e

 Chapter 4 Piping Input 4-69

3-D Modeler

Start CAESAR II and launch the Piping Input Processor. Once in the input, the graphic automatically plots and
displays to the right of the Classic Piping Input window. To increase the window space available for graphics
the Classic Piping Input window may be hidden from view on the side panel by clicking the thumbtack. The
initial view for a job never plotted before is displayed according to the configuration defaults that include:
• A rendered view- restraints shown
• XYZ compass - isometric view
• Tees and nozzles highlighted- orthographic projection
The plotting begins by displaying the model in centerline/single line mode to speed up the process. Then all the
elements get changed to their intended state (they are rendered one by one). Later, the restraints and other
relevant items are added.

Note: The model is fully operational while actually being drawn. You can apply any available option
to the model at any time. The status bar at the bottom displays the drawing progress in the form of
Drawing element X of Y. When the plot operation is complete the status message changes to Ready.
 4-70 Piping Input

When the mouse cursor hovers over the buttons the button's name displays, and a short description of the
button’s functionality displays in the status bar at the bottom of the view window.

There are several methods of accomplishing nearly every command in the Input Plot Utility. Commands may be
accessed by clicking buttons, selecting drop-down menu items, or through the use of hot keys.

Button and Name Description

Users may wish to verify model data in single line mode; this often makes the view
Center Line clearer, click this button. Note that in this mode, restraints and other element
View information items still display. A Volume or double line plot can be obtained by
clicking the corresponding button. Also, pressing the V key on the keyboard will switch
the views in the following order: Shaded View (rendered mode) / Two Line Mode /
Center Line View.

Users may wish to verify model data in single line mode; this often makes the view
Shaded View clearer, click the Center Line View button. Note that in this mode, restraints and other
element information items still display. A Volume or double line plot can be obtained
by clicking the corresponding button. Also, pressing the V key on the keyboard will
switch the views in the following order: Shaded View (rendered mode) / Two Line
Mode / Center Line View.

Users may wish to verify model data in single line mode; this often makes the view
Silhouette clearer, click the Center Line View button. Note that in this mode, restraints and other
element information items still display. A Volume or double line plot can be obtained
by clicking the corresponding button. Also, pressing the V key on the keyboard will
switch the views in the following order: Shaded View (rendered mode) / Two Line
Mode / Center Line View.

Users may wish to verify model data in single line mode; this often makes the view
clearer, click the Center Line View button. Note that in this mode, restraints and other
Hidden Line Wire element information items still display. A Volume or double line plot can be obtained
Frame by clicking the corresponding button. Also, pressing the V key on the keyboard will
switch the views in the following order: Shaded View (rendered mode) / Two Line
Mode / Center Line View.

Users may wish to verify model data in single line mode; this often makes the view
Wire Frame clearer, click the Center Line View button. Note that in this mode, restraints and other
element information items still display. A Volume or double line plot can be obtained
by clicking the corresponding button. Also, pressing the V key on the keyboard will
switch the views in the following order: Shaded View (rendered mode) / Two Line
Mode / Center Line View.

Users may wish to verify model data in single line mode; this often makes the view
Translucent clearer, click the Center Line View button. Note that in this mode, restraints and other
element information items still display. A Volume or double line plot can be obtained
by clicking the corresponding button. Also, pressing the V key on the keyboard will
switch the views in the following order: Shaded View (rendered mode) / Two Line
Mode / Center Line View.
Chapter 4 Piping Input 4-71

Button and Name Description

Various orthogonal views can be obtained by clicking the appropriate button,

Front Front/Back/Top Bottom/ Left/Right. Alternatively, using the X, Y, or Z keys on the
keyboard will set the model in right, top, or front views respectively. Additionally,
holding down the SHIFT key while pressing X, Y, or Z keys will show left, bottom, or
back views respectively. This option is useful to see the model just like it would be seen
on a CAD drawing.

Various orthogonal views can be obtained by clicking the appropriate button,

Back Front/Back/Top/ Bottom/ Left/Right. Alternatively, using the X, Y, or Z keys on the
keyboard will set the model in right, top, or front views respectively. Additionally,
holding down the SHIFT key while pressing X, Y, or Z keys will show left, bottom, or
back views respectively. This option is useful to see the model just like it would be seen
on a CAD drawing.

Various orthogonal views can be obtained by clicking the appropriate button,

Top Front/Back/Top/Bottom Left/Right. Alternatively, using the X, Y, or Z keys on the
keyboard will set the model in right, top, or front views respectively. Additionally,
holding down the SHIFT key while pressing X, Y, or Z keys will show left, bottom, or
back views respectively. This option is useful to see the model just like it would be seen
on a CAD drawing.

Various orthogonal views can be obtained by clicking the appropriate button,

Bottom Front/Back/Top/Bottom/Left/ Right. Alternatively, using the X, Y, or Z keys on the
keyboard will set the model in right, top, or front views respectively. Additionally,
holding down the SHIFT key while pressing X, Y, or Z keys will show left, bottom, or
back views respectively. This option is useful to see the model just like it would be seen
on a CAD drawing.

Various orthogonal views can be obtained by clicking the appropriate button,

Left Front/Back/Top/Bottom/Left/ Right. Alternatively, using the X, Y, or Z keys on the
keyboard will set the model in right, top, or front views respectively. Additionally,
holding down the SHIFT key while pressing X, Y, or Z keys will show left, bottom, or
back views respectively. This option is useful to see the model just like it would be seen
on a CAD drawing.

Various orthogonal views can be obtained by clicking the appropriate button,

Right Front/Back/Top/Bottom/Left/ Right. Alternatively, using the X, Y, or Z keys on the
keyboard will set the model in right, top, or front views respectively. Additionally,
holding down the SHIFT key while pressing X, Y, or Z keys will show left, bottom, or
back views respectively. This option is useful to see the model just like it would be seen
on a CAD drawing.

Displays an isometric view this option may be activated by pressing the F10 key on the
ISO View keyboard.
Displays Node numbers by clicking the Node Numbers button, by pressing the N key
Node Numbers on or by clicking OPTIONS/NODE NUMBERS from then menu. Users can also opt to display
node numbers for a specific element i.e., only restraints or only anchors.
 4-72 Piping Input

Button and Name Description

Displays element lengths by clicking the Show Lengths button or by pressing the L key
Show Length on the keyboard. Alternatively, the same functionality can be achieved from the menu
by clicking OPTIONS/LENGTHS. This will display the elements lengths to verify the input.

Select Element Select Element and using the mouse to hover over the model produces a bubble
displaying relevant information for the desired element. For more information refer to
the 3D Graphics Highlights: Displacements, Forces, Uniform Loads, Wind/Wave Loads
section later in this chapter.

Select Group and using the mouse to hover over the model produces a bubble
Select Group displaying relevant information for the desired group of elements. For more information
refer to the 3D Graphics Highlights: Displacements, Forces, Uniform Loads,
Wind/Wave Loads section later in this chapter.

The transition from one orthogonal view to another is a smooth transition. It is possible
Perspective to make a sudden change/jump by pressing a combination of the CTRL + ALT + F5
keys before changing the view with one of the described options. The sudden jump
option is useful for relatively large models as it speeds up the viewing process.

The transition from one orthogonal view to another is a smooth transition. It is possible
Orthographic to make a sudden change/jump by pressing a combination of the CTRL + ALT + F5
keys before changing the view with one of the described options. The sudden jump
option is useful for relatively large models as it speeds up the viewing process.

Note: For a clearer view, nodes, restraints, hangers, and anchors can be turned off. The boundary
condition symbols (like restraints, anchors, and hangers} size is relative to the pipe size OD. In addition
the symbol (i.e., restraints and/or hangers) size may be changed manually by clicking the black arrow
to the right of the relevant button and selecting the Size option from the drop down menu.

Users can adjust the color of the node numbers, lengths, elements, boundary conditions, etc. by clicking the
Change Display Options button, for more information refer to the 3D Graphics Configuration section later in
this chapter.

The model can be panned using the mouse, by activating the Pan button. After clicking the button, the cursor
changes to a hand; and the view may be panned by moving the mouse while holding down the left mouse button.
The view may also be panned from under any other command by holding down the middle mouse button/mouse
wheel while moving the mouse (when applicable).

Button and Name Description

All the highlighting and zoom/rotate effects on the model as well as other effects may
Reset Plot be reset at once by clicking this button. The model returns to its default state as defined
by the configuration; any elements hidden by the Range command are restored, for
more information refer to the Range section for details.
 Chapter 4 Piping Input 4-73

Button and Name Description

The model can be zoomed by clicking the Zoom button, and moving the mouse up or
Zoom down while depressing the left mouse button. Releasing the mouse button halts the
zoom. Note that while in the zoom mode, the keyboard + and - keys may be used to
zoom the model in and out. Alternatively, the model may also be zoomed from under
any other command or mode by rotating the mouse wheel when applicable. The best
way to zoom to a particular area of the model is to use the mouse to draw a rubber band
box around the desired area.

Zoom to Window Simply click the Zoom to Window button, then left-click one corner of the desired
area, and stretch a box diagonally to the opposite corner of the area while still holding
the left mouse button down. When the left button is released, the model zooms to the
selected area.
Note that while in the zoom mode, the keyboard + and - keys may be used to zoom the
model in and out. Alternatively, the model may also be zoomed from under any other
command or mode by rotating the mouse wheel when applicable. The best way to zoom
to a particular area of the model is to use the mouse to draw a rubber band box around
the desired area.

To see a specific element on the model on the screen click this button.
Zoom to
Selection

To see the entire model on the screen, click the Zoom to Extents button. Note that
Zoom to Extents while in the zoom mode, the keyboard + and - keys may be used to zoom the model in
and out. Alternatively, the model may also be zoomed from under any other command
or mode by rotating the mouse wheel when applicable. The best way to zoom to a
particular area of the model is to use the mouse to draw a rubber band box around the
desired area.

Interactive rotation of the model can be accomplished by clicking the Orbit button.
Orbit Once this mode is activated, rotate the model by using the mouse or the arrow keys on
the keyboard. To use a mouse for rotating the model, click the left mouse button on the
model (the bounding box will be drawn to outline the model boundaries; while holding
down the left mouse button, move the mouse around to the desired position. When the
mouse button is released, the view is updated and the bounding box disappears. If the
bounding box is not visible, check the corresponding box on the User Options tab of
the Plot Configuration dialog for more information refer to the 3D Graphics
Configuration section for details. Note, during rotation operation (only for speedup
purposes) the model may be changed to the centerline/ single line mode view or some of
the geometry details may disappear or become distorted. The actual conversion will
depend on the size and complexity of the model. Once the rotation is complete, the
model returns to its original state.
Another method of orbiting the model is the Gyro-operator. Activate this feature by
pressing the G key. After pressing the G key, the model performs a full 360-degree
rotation in the plane of view.

Holding the mouse wheel down and moving the mouse up, down, left, or right, provides
Pan
the panning effects of riding the elevator up/down or stepping to the side, similar to
using the keyboard keys Q, Z, A, or D. The mouse cursor will change to a hand icon.
 4-74 Piping Input

Button and Name Description

Enables users to explore the scene of the model with a setup similar to a virtual reality
Walk Through application. It produces the effect of walking towards the model

Displays the model in CADWorx.

Load
CADWorx Model

3D Graphics Configuration
The CAESAR II 3D Graphics engine remembers the state of the model between sessions. Exiting the input
completely and then returning to the input graphics results in the model being displayed in the same state in
which it was last viewed.

To obtain a more uniform look of graphics users may change the color and font options under
TOOLS/CONFIGURE/SETUP/3D VIEWER SETTINGS. Check the Always Use System Fonts and Always Use System
Colors boxes located under the Default Visual Settings section. These settings will then be stored in the
computer's registry and CAESAR II will always display the graphics according to these settings.
 Chapter 4 Piping Input 4-75

If the check boxes described above are unchecked then the state of each model is maintained individually (job
related), as an XML data file (job- name.XML) in the current data directory. After launching another input
session, CAESAR II reads this XML file and restores the 3D graphics to its previous state. This includes the
rotation and zoom level of the model; color settings, data display, and the current graphics operator.

Most of the display options can be adjusted by clicking the Change button. The tabs of the Plot Configuration
dialog control include: basic graphics colors, font selection and size for textural data, user startup settings, and
visibility (the degree of transparency.

Option Description

Colors Selecting any item in the list, then clicking Change, displays a Windows color selection
tool. Selecting the desired color and clicking OK changes the color of the selected item
to the new color. The rotating spring hanger is used to actively view the color selection
combinations before altering the entire plot window. Use this tool to prevent selecting
unsatisfactory color combinations. Colors may be reset to CAESAR II defaults, as defined
in configuration, by clicking Reset All.

Fonts Selecting any item in the list, then clicking Change, displays the standard Windows™
font selection tool. Making the desired changes and clicking OK updates the selected
item. Similar to the Colors tab, the relative size, color, as well as the font face of the
selected text item can be previewed in the Font Sample window of the Fonts tab before
changing the entire model.
4-76 Piping Input
 Chapter 4 Piping Input 4-77

User Options
Specifies the initial display configuration when plotting a model in an input session. The 3D Graphics can be
configured (on an individual job basis) to restart in a specific manner. The graphics can start with a preset
operator active (such as zoom with mouse), or start with the last operator used still active. Likewise, the graphics
can start in a preset view (such as isometric), or in the last rotated zoomed position.

Option Description

Bounding Box Determines if rotations, via the mouse, includes an outline box surrounding the model.

Hide Overlapped Prevents text from appearing on top of other text items thereby producing a distortion.
Text

Restore Last Operator Determines whether the graphics engine remembers your last action (operator) between
sessions or always defaults to a specified action (operator) on startup. Disabling the
check box activates the Operator Selection radio buttons.

Restore Previous Determines whether the graphics engine remembers the last displayed view of the
View model, or defaults to a specified view. Disabling the check box activates the Initial
View radio buttons.

Default Projection Determines the initial projection style of the model. CAESAR II Graphics automatically
default to orthographic projection.

Visibility Alters the degree of transparency, when translucent pipe is activated. When the
Translucent Objects button is enabled, it allows viewing through the pipe. This is
especially useful for viewing jacketed piping or piping inside of vessels. Moving the
slider to the right increases the degree of visibility, making it easier to see through the
pipe elements.
 4-78 Piping Input

Note: The Visibility option is only effective when viewing the model in rendered mode, and can be
activated by clicking the Translucent Objects button.

Option Description

Markers Displays a symbol denoting the element’s end points.

Note: Clicking OK on the Plot Configuration dialog saves all changes made to any tab and modifies
the model’s view. Clicking Cancel will disregard all changes made.
 Chapter 4 Piping Input 4-79

HOOPS Toolbar Manipulations

HOOPS Graphics also provides the ability to adjust the graphics toolbar for the purpose of rearranging or
removing buttons. There are two methods to make these adjustments, the first method is to right click on the
toolbar and click Customize. The second method involves removing or repositioning the button using the drag
and drop method.

To remove buttons from the toolbar click the down arrow located at the end of each toolbar and then click
Remove. To add button removed from the toolbar by clicking the down arrow and clicking Add. To rearrange
buttons select them, one at a time, while pressing the ALT key and then drag it to the desired location. To restore
the CAESAR II default toolbar configuration, click the Reset button.

In addition to the use of the Customize button, individual buttons can be removed or repositioned by pressing
the ALT key, and dragging the desired button. To remove a button, drag it off the graphics window, using the
left mouse button. To reposition a button, drag it to the desired location, using the left mouse button. When the
mouse button is released, the button will be placed on the toolbar at the selected location.
Multiple View Ports
The 3D/HOOPS Graphics module provides up to 4 views, which can be sized, rotated, and annotated
individually by the user.

Enables manipulation of model by users provides up to 4 views, which can

Four Views be sized, rotated, and annotated individually by the user.

To control the splitter handle, click the Four Views button. It automatically places the horizontal and vertical
dividers (splitter bars on the screen, and changes the mouse cursor to a four-way arrow icon. You can change the
position of the splitter bars (and correspondingly the relative size of the views by moving the mouse around.
After finding the desired location, click the left mouse button once to fix the position.

The vertical and horizontal splitter bars can also be dragged or resized individually: after hovering the mouse
over a splitter bar, the mouse cursor will change to vertical or horizontal resize correspondingly. For example, to
change the position of the vertical split bar, using the left mouse button, grab the splitter bar and drag it to the
right. When the mouse button is released, all the panes are updated. If the splitter bar is dragged to the view
frame border, it disappears, and the number of views is decreased in half. This is true for both the horizontal and
vertical splitter bars. When the last splitter bar is dragged away to the view frame border, the single view is left.
It is also possible to drag from the intersection of the horizontal and vertical dividers to any corner of the view to
eliminate 3 views at once.

Another way to divide the view into two or four independent views is to drag the splitter located at the top or left
scroll bars with the mouse. Notice the two splitter bars at the graphics processor window, one is at the far left of
the horizontal scroll bar, and the other is at the very top of the vertical scroll bar. Using the left mouse button,
grab the lower left splitter bar and drag it to the right. The graphics window splits into two panes, left and right.
When the mouse button is released, both panes are updated. Again using the left mouse button, grab the upper
right splitter bar and drag it down. The two existing panes split into two additional panes, upper and lower.
When the mouse button is released, all four panes are updated, with the X axis view in the upper left pane, the Y
axis view in the upper right pane, the Z axis view in the lower left pane, and a isometric (or original) view in the
lower right pane.

Note: The image in any of these panes can be manipulated individually. Each pane can be rotated,
panned, or zoomed independently of the other panes.
 4-80 Piping Input

3D Graphic Highlights: Diameters, Wall, Insulation, Cladding & Refractory Thickness, Materials, Piping Codes
Often it is necessary to review the piping model in the context of certain data, for example, by diameter, wall
thickness, temperature, or pressure. These operations are illustrated below.

Button and Name Description

When Diameters is clicked, the display updates to show each diameter in a different
Diameters color. A color key (legend) is included at the bottom of the plot in its own pane. This
option can be used to quickly see the diameter variations throughout the system. This
option is a good way to verify that diameter changes have been made where appropriate.
The same functionality may be achieved from the Options menu by selecting the
Diameters menu options. Alternatively, users may press the D- key to view different
diameters.

Produces results similar to the ones described in the Diameters section, the model is
Wall colored according to the different data defined, and the corresponding legend appears on
Thickness the left. The same functionality may be achieved from the Options menu by selecting the
Wall Thickness menu option. Alternatively, the user may use the corresponding user
may press the W- key to view the different wall thicknesses throughout the model.

Insulation Produces results similar to the ones described in the Diameters section, the model is
colored according to the different data defined, and the corresponding legend appears on
Thickness
the left. The same functionality may be achieved from the Options menu by selecting the
Insulation menu options. Alternatively, users may use the corresponding user may press
the I- key to view the insulation. Clicking the black arrow to the right of the Insulation
Thickness button displays the additional “thickness” choices available: Cladding and
Refractory.

Cladding Thickness Clicking the black arrow to the right of the Insulation Thickness button displays the
additional “thickness” choices available: Cladding and Refractory. Produces results
similar to the ones described in the Diameters section, the model is colored according to
the different data defined, and the corresponding legend appears on the left. The same
functionality may be achieved from the Options menu by selecting the Cladding
Thickness option.

Refractory Clicking the black arrow to the right of the Insulation Thickness button displays the
Thickness additional “thickness” choices available: Cladding and Refractory. Produces results
similar to the ones described in the Diameters section, the model is colored according to
the different data defined, and the corresponding legend appears on the left. The same
functionality may be achieved from the Options menu by selecting the Refractory
Thickness option

Produces results similar to the ones described in the Diameters section, the model is
Materials colored according to the different data defined, and the corresponding legend appears on
the left. The same functionality may be achieved from the Options menu by selecting the
Materials menu option. Alternatively, users may press the M - key to view different
materials.

Piping Codes Produces results similar to the ones described in the Diameters section, the model is
colored according to the different data defined, and the corresponding legend appears on
the left. The same functionality may be achieved from the Options menu by selecting the
Piping Codes menu options
 Chapter 4 Piping Input 4-81

Note: The legend window may be resized, docked, and/or removed from view.

Note: While in the described highlighted mode, the model can still be zoomed, panned and rotated.
Any of orthographic projections and single line/volume modes can be used without affecting the model
highlighted state.

Note: Clicking the same button twice will deactivate the coloring effect.

Note: The same functionality may be achieved from the Options menu by selecting Materials, Piping Codes,
Diameters, Wall Thickness, or Insulation Thickness menu options. Alternatively, the user may use the
corresponding keyboard keys: M - to view different materials, D - to view different diameters, W - to view
different wall thicknesses throughout the model, and I - to view the insulation.

Note: When the model is being printed using FILE MENU/ PRINT while in one of the highlighted modes
described herein, the color key legend will appear in the upper left corner of the page. This is always
true, even if the actual legend window has been dragged away from the view.

3D Graphics Highlights: Corrosion and Densities

Often it is necessary to review the piping model in the context of certain data, for example, by corrosion
allowance, pipe, fluid, insulation, cladding or refractory density, or Insulation Cladding/Unit Weight. These
operations are explained below.

Button Description

Enables you to see the Corrosion Allowance. The model is colored according to the
Corrosion different data defined, and the corresponding legend appears on the left. The same
Allowance functionality may be achieved from the Options menu by selecting the Corrosion
Allowance option

Enables you to see the Pipe Density. The model is colored according to the different data
Pipe Density defined, and the corresponding legend appears on the left. The same functionality may be
achieved from the Options menu by selecting the Pipe Density option

Enables you to see the Fluid Density. Produces results similar to the ones described in the
Fluid Density Diameters section, the model is colored according to the different data defined, and the
corresponding legend appears on the left. The same functionality may be achieved from
the Options menu by selecting the Fluid Density option.

Insulation Enables you to see the Insulation Density. Clicking the black arrow to the right of the
Insulation Density button displays the additional “density” choices available: Cladding,
Density
Refractory and Insulation Cladding/Unit Weight. Produces results similar to the ones
described in the Diameters section, the model is colored according to the different data
defined, and the corresponding legend appears on the left. The same functionality may be
achieved from the Options menu by selecting the Insulation Density option
 4-82 Piping Input

Button Description

Cladding Density Enables you to see the Cladding Density. Clicking the black arrow to the right of the
Insulation Density button displays the additional “density” choices available: Cladding
and Refractory. Produces results similar to the ones described in the Diameters section,
the model is colored according to the different data defined, and the corresponding legend
appears on the left. The same functionality may be achieved from the Options menu by
selecting the Cladding Density option.

Refractory Density Enables you to see the Refractory Density. Clicking the black arrow to the right of the
Insulation Density button displays the additional “density” choices available: Cladding
and Refractory. Produces results similar to the ones described in the Diameters section,
the model is colored according to the different data defined, and the corresponding legend
appears on the left. The same functionality may be achieved from the Options menu by
selecting the Refractory Density option

Insulation/Cladding Enables you to see the Insulation/Cladding Unit Weight. Clicking the black arrow to the
Unit Weight right of the Insulation Density button displays the additional “density” choices available:
Cladding, Refractory and Insulation/Cladding Unit Weight. Produces results similar to the
ones described in the Diameters section, the model is colored according to the different
data defined, and the corresponding legend appears on the left. The same functionality
may be achieved from the Options menu by selecting the Insulation/Cladding Unit
Weight option

Note: The legend window may be resized, docked, and/or removed from view.

Note: While in the described highlighted mode, the model can still be zoomed, panned and rotated.
Any of orthographic projections and single line/volume modes can be used without affecting the model
highlighted state.

Note: Clicking the same button twice deactivates the coloring effect.

Note: You can achieve the same functionality from the Options menu by selecting the Corrosion
Allowance, Piping Density, Fluid Density, Insulation Density, Cladding Density Refractory
Density or Insulation/Cladding Unit Weight menu options.

Alternatively, you may use the corresponding keyboard keys: M - to view different materials, D - to view
different diameters, W - to view different wall thicknesses throughout the model, and I - to view the insulation.

Note: When the model is being printed using FILE MENU/ PRINT while in one of the highlighted modes
described herein, the color key legend will appear in the upper left corner of the page. This is always
true, even if the actual legend window has been dragged away from the view.
 Chapter 4 Piping Input 4-83

3D Graphics Highlights: Displacements, Forces, Uniform Loads, Wind/Wave Loads

The 3D/HOOPS Graphics engine can display applied/predefined displacements, forces, uniform loads, or
wind/wave loads in tabular format. You can scroll the display windows vertically and or horizontally to view all
node points where data has been defined. To flip through the defined displacement or force vectors 1 through 9,
use the Next and Previous buttons at the bottom of the tabular legend window. The color key at the far left of
the window assists in locating the node points on the model (when the model geometry is complex).

The displacements window shows the user-specified values as well as free or fixed Degrees of Freedom (DOF).
In this case, a DOF is free if a displacement value is not specified in any of the displacement load vectors. Note
also that if a certain DOF has a specified displacement in at least one of the load vectors, then it is fixed in all
other load vectors.

Button and Name Description

The 3D/HOOPS Graphics can display applied/predefined displacements and /or forces
Forces in a tabular format.
The display windows can be scrolled vertically and or horizontally to view all node
points where data has been defined. To flip through the defined displacement or force
vectors 1 through 9, use the Next and Previous buttons at the bottom of the tabular
legend window. The color key at the far left of the window assists in locating the node
points on the model (when the model geometry is complex).
Forces behave similar to the Displacements option, the model elements are highlighted
for a particular force vector, and the color key legend grid window displays on the left.
The node number in combination with a color key specifies the location where the force
and moment values are defined.

The 3D/HOOPS Graphics can display uniform loads in a tabular format.

Uniform Loads
Uniform Loads has three vectors defined. The Node column represents the start node
number where the uniform loads vector was first defined. Since the data propagates
throughout the model until changed or disabled, the model is colored accordingly.

The 3D/HOOPS Graphics can display wind/wave loads in a tabular format.

Wind/Wave Wind/Wave also displays the loading coefficients.
The color key is defined as follows: all the elements with wind defined are colored in
red color; all the elements with wave data defined are colored in green color. The legend
grid shows the relevant data items defined by the user.
 4-84 Piping Input

Note: The legend window may be resized, docked and/or removed from the view.

Note: While in the described highlighted mode, the model can still be zoomed, panned and rotated.
Any of orthographic projections and single line/volume modes can still be used without affecting the
model highlighted state.

Note: Clicking the same button twice deactivates the coloring effect.

Note: You can achieve the same functionality from the Options Menu by selecting the relevant
options. Alternatively, you can access Predefined Displacements by pressing F3 on the keyboard.
Forces/moment vectors can be accessed by pressing F5 on the keyboard.

Note: When the model is being printed using FILE MENU/PRINT while in one of the highlighted modes
described herein, the color key legend appears on the second page following the model bitmap image.
The printed legend is presented in the tabular form similar to the legend window.

Select Element allows you to obtain element data. When enabled, hovering over a pipe element with the
mouse shows a bubble with the element's nodes, delta dimensions, and pipe size data. Clicking on an element
highlights the element and updates the information on the spreadsheet. Clicking a different element highlights
the relevant element and changes the data in the spreadsheet accordingly.

Note: Clicking the empty space of the graphics view de-highlights the element. The spreadsheet will
still contain the information from the last element selected.
 Chapter 4 Piping Input 4-85

Limiting the Amount of Displayed Info; Find Node, Range & Cutting Plane
Sometimes it is necessary to limit the amount of displayed information on the screen. This may be useful when
the model is large, or if it has many similar looking branches. There are several ways to achieve this result by
clicking the Find Node, Range, or Cutting Plane button. The description of these operations, their advantages
and disadvantages are illustrated below.

Button and Name Description

Allows redlining based on the user moving the mouse. Find Node is useful when
Find Node a specific node or an element needs to be located. Clicking Find Node displays a
dialog prompting for the FROM and TO nodes to search for. The node numbers
can be entered in either of the two fields, or in both. Entering only the FROM
node number causes the feature to search for the first available element that starts
with the specified node number. Entering only the TO node number causes the
feature to search for an element ending with the specified node number. When the
element is located, it is highlighted, and the view zooms to
the element. You can zoom out to better identify the location of the highlighted
element within the model.

Allows redlining using a rectangular shape. This option is also useful when
Create Cutting Plane trying to emphasize a specific element. In many cases, the elements/node
numbers are not defined consecutively. Thus, it may be easier to cut a portion of
the model at a certain location to see more details.
For this operation, use the Create Cutting Plane button. When the cutting plane
appears, use the handles to move and or rotate the plane as desired. If cutting the
plane's handles are not visible, or the display goes blank, the view may be
focused too close for the plane to operate correctly. Use the Zoom button to
zoom out; then click the Cutting Plane button again for the handles to appear.
To disable the cutting plane and return to view click on the display with the right
mouse button.
Note the Create Cutting Plane option can be used along any of the three axes.

Allows redlining using a circular shape. This option is useful when trying to
Create Cutting Plane emphasize a specific element. To disable the cutting plane and return to view
Horizontally click on the display with the right mouse button.
Note the Create Cutting Plane option can be used along any of the three axes.

Allows the user to enter text and place it anywhere in the plot area. To disable
Create Cutting Plane the cutting plane and return to view click on the display with the right mouse
Vertically button.
Note the Create Cutting Plane options can be used along any of the three axes.
 4-86 Piping Input

Range plots only those elements that contain nodes within the range specified by the user. This is particularly
helpful when attempting to locate specific nodes or a group of related elements in a rather large, often
symmetrical model. Click the Range button or press the U key to display the Range dialog.

A sorted list of all defined node numbers with corresponding check marks appears. Clicking a check box next to
a particular node number will enable or disable it.

Note: Only elements with check marks on will display when OK is clicked. If the Range option was
previously used, consecutive clicks will display the dialog with the current state of the shown/hidden
elements and the corresponding check marks.

Range enables the selection and dragging of consecutive node numbers (click the left mouse button on the first
node of the desired selection, then move the mouse while holding the mouse button down, and release the button
at the last node of the desired selection). Alternatively, users may click the first node, press the SHIFT key and
click the last node of the selection using the mouse button. Clicking the check mark with the rectangle once
toggles the status that is applied to the entire highlighted selection.

Use the FROM and TO fields together with the Add button to specify and/or add to the range of elements that
are already selected. If only the FROM node is specified and Add is clicked, all elements (from this node and up
will be selected). Clicking the Reverse Selection button toggles the check marks for the elements to show: it
displays the previously hidden elements, and hides the previously displayed elements. When Clear All is
enabled, none of the elements are selected (and the graphics view appears blank). Use this button to clear the
selection.

Note, if none of the elements are selected, and OK is clicked, the view becomes blank. To show the entire
model, click the Select All button.

Note: Using the Range option affects the display and operation of other 3D Graphics Highlighting
options. For example, if part of the model is not visible because of the use of the Range option, then
clicking the Show Diameters option will only highlight the elements that are actually visible. Also if
using the Range option hides any nodes containing the predefined displacements, the Displacements
legend grid still appears, but the model may not be properly highlighted.
 Chapter 4 Piping Input 4-87

Note: Find Node may not work properly for the part of the model that is hidden by the Range. The
corresponding message will also appear in the status bar.

Save an Image for Later Presentation: TIF, HTML, BMP, JPEG and PDF
Occasionally, it is necessary to add a graphical representation of a model to the CAESAR II Stress reports. The
3D/HOOPS Graphics view can be saved as a bitmap by clicking FILE/ SAVE AS GRAPHICS IMAGE. The model
geometry, colors, highlighting, as well as restraints and most of the other options will be transferred to the
bitmap. After clicking Save As Graphics Image the Save Image dialog appears asking the user to specify the
desired file name and a directory for the file to be saved. The default bitmap file name is the job name with an
extension .TIF. (This is a standard, Windows supported image file extension that can be opened for viewing.)
The image resolution can also be changed in the Save Image dialog.

Note: This is a static bitmap file.

Due to certain limitations of the 3D/HOOPS modeler, the legend window and text cannot be saved to the
bitmap. However, all coloring, as well as the annotations and markups are successfully saved.

You now have the option to save the graphics as .HTML file. After saving as .HTML CAESAR II creates two
files in the current data directory using the current job name: *.HTML and *.HSF. Opening the .HTML file
should display the corresponding .HSF file.

Note this is an interactive file.

The first time a CAESAR II created .HTML file is opened with an Internet browser, the user receives a message
asking to download a control from Tech Soft 3D. Answer Yes to allow the download, and the image will be
displayed. Once the model appears, selecting and right-clicking the model shows the available viewing options,
such as orbit, pan, zoom, different render modes, etc. The image can be printed or copied to the clipboard as
necessary.

Note: Internet Explorer (IE) version 5.0 and earlier may not display the image properly, Intergraph
CAS recommends IE6 or later.

Button and Name Description

Used to highlight a problem area, or write a brief description of the model. The
Annotations
annotation may be especially useful in the output processor for more information
refer to the discussion at the end of this section.

The CAESAR II 3D/HOOPS Graphics processor provides several types of annotation as discussed below.

When the Annotate Model button is clicked, the annotation text box with a leader line to an element is added to
the graphics view. To add the annotation, click with the left mouse button on a particular element to start the
leader line, while holding the mouse button down drag the leader line to the annotation point, then type in the
annotation text, and then press the Enter key.

Note: The annotation text box is only a single line.

 4-88 Piping Input

Note: Annotation with leader stays with the model on zoom, pan, rotate, and use of any highlight
options. Annotation also gets printed to the printer and saved to the bitmap. Annotations are not saved
to the HTML file.
Note: The color and font face/size of the annotation text can be changed by clicking Change Display
Options, for more information refer to the 3D Graphics Configuration section in this chapter.

Other annotation options are listed below:

Button and Name Description

Freehand Markup Allows redlining based on the user moving the mouse.
Operator

Rectangle Markup Allows redlining using a rectangular shape. This option is useful when trying to
emphasize a specific element

Circle Markup Allows redlining using a circular shape. This option is useful when trying to
emphasize a specific element

Allows the user to enter text and place it anywhere in the plot area.
Annotate Operator
It may be used to add a short description of the model to the graphics image for printing or saving as a bitmap.

Note: This markup annotation text box is only a single line. The color and the font face/size cannot be
changed the default color is red.

Note: Markup annotations are saved to the .TIF file and spooled to the printer.

Note: The geometry and the text of the markup annotations are temporary; they are not saved with the
model, and disappear from view with any change like zoom, rotate, pan or reset all.
 Chapter 4 Piping Input 4-89

3D Graphics Interactive Feature: Walk Through

CAESAR II enables users to explore the scene of the model with a feature similar in operation to a virtual reality
game. It produces the effect of walking towards the model; and once close to or inside the model users can look
left, right, up, and down, step to a side, or ride an elevator up and down. Walk is useful in providing a real-time
interactive view of the model. Click Walk Through , to enables this feature. After clicking Walk Through
the mouse’s cursor displays as a pair of feet.

Walking Around
Users can begin walking by clicking and holding the left mouse button. Move forward by moving the mouse
toward the top of the window, back by doing the opposite.

Walk Through also provides an additional control that aids in navigation. Clicking the various hot
spots on the control duplicates mouse movements with the added benefit of providing the ability to move in a
perfectly straight line.

In addition Walk Through also provides users with the added functionality of determining the walking speed. In
general, walking speed is determined by the distance between where you first click and how far you move the
mouse. The keys below which, if held down while walking, effect walk through's operation:

<Shift> - Changes the walk mode to run mode, effectively doubling the walk speed.

<Ctrl> - Changes the walk mode to slow mode, effectively halving the walk speed.

<Alt> - Enables users to look left or right without changing the walk path. Releasing the key, automatically
returns your viewpoint to looking forward.

To exit from this option, click any other operator.

Resizing Models

The Resize Geometry button enables you to change the geometry of the model.

 Resizing a Model
1. Click this button and the marker control point appears at all nodes and every tangent
point (on bends, it displays on the far weld-line).
2. Left-click and rubber band the nodes you want to move.
3. Release the button, then place the cursor (the arrow) on any one of the selected nodes.
4. Click the left node button down and up to place the mouse is in move mode.
5. The mouse movement will be clamped to either the x, y, or z axis. To change the axis use
the [TAB] key or click 1 of the Axis buttons on this same toolbar. Another left-click
sets the new location and the model geometry is updated. Alternatively, you can enter
the magnitude of the desired movement. If a single number is entered, the movement
will be applied to the currently selected axis. You can move in multiple directions at
once by typing <x-value>, <y-value>, <z-value>.
Chapter 5 Error Checking and Static Load Cases

In This Chapter
Error Checking ...................................................................... 5-2
Static Load Case Editor......................................................... 5-6
Building Static Load Cases ................................................... 5-8
Providing Wind Data ............................................................ 5-17
Specifying Hydrodynamic Parameters.................................. 5-19
Execution of Static Analysis ................................................. 5-20
Notes on CAESAR II Load Cases ........................................ 5-23
 5-2 Error Checking and Static Load Cases

Error Checking
Static analysis cannot be performed until the error checking portion of the piping preprocessor has been
successfully completed. Only after error checking is completed are the required analysis data files created.
Similarly, any subsequent changes made to the model input are not reflected in the analysis unless error checking
is rerun after those changes have been made. CAESAR II does not allow an analysis to take place if the input has
been changed and not successfully error checked.

Button Description

Error Checking can only be done from the input spreadsheet, and is initiated by executing
Error Check the Error Check or Batch Run commands from the toolbar or menu. Error Check saves the
input and starts the error checking procedure.

Batch Run causes the program to check the input data, analyze the system, and present the
Batch Run results without any user interaction. The assumptions are that the loading cases to be
analyzed do not need to change and that the default account number (if accounting active) is
correct. These criteria are usually met after the first pass through the analysis. Batch
processing focuses the user’s attention on the creation of input and the review of output by
expediting the steps in between.

Once launched, the Error Checker reviews the CAESAR II model and alerts users to any possible errors,
inconsistencies, or noteworthy items. These items display to users as Errors, Warnings, or Notes in a grid. The
total number of errors, warnings, or notes displays in corresponding text fields above the Message Grid. Users
may sort messages in the Message Grid by type, message number, or element/node number by double-clicking
the corresponding column header. Users can also print messages displayed in the Message Grid by clicking
FILE/PRINT.
 Chapter 5 Error Checking and Static Load Cases 5-3

Fatal Error Message

Errors are flagged when there is a problem with the model due to analysis that cannot continue. An example of
this would be if no length were defined for a piping element. These errors are also called fatal errors, since they
are fatal to the analysis, and must be corrected before continuing.

Clicking on the error message will move the spreadsheet display to the offending element. Users can change the
view between the spreadsheet and error warning views using the tabs located at the bottom of the window.

.
 5-4 Error Checking and Static Load Cases

Warring Message
Warnings are flagged whenever there is a problem with a model, which can be overcome using some
assumptions. An example of this would be if the wall thickness of an element were insufficient to meet the
minimum wall thickness for the given pressure (hoop stress). Warnings need not be conected to get a successful
analysis, but users should review all warnings carefully as they are displayed.

: Eile dit odel En:=!_ironment Q ptions :iiew ools t1elp

EE 8 - I&J-[jl]- [j!]a<.:a S3 QQ;D @£]1 -.o - 1 ®0 IU irf=- 1 i - e - I A i t!iol &- -

D 13 ldI1:D CB I ..§ I§ I CO - .«I I Jr:J I <".> + +I tt I (ru 101 li!il
§t Errors and Warnings II X
:Errors: 0 Warnings: 1 Notes: 1

1 10-20

X
f

[ Classic Piping Input 1Errors and Warnings

 5 load Cases 5-5

Note Message
The third categol)' of alert is the informational note. These messages inform the user of some noteworthy fact
related to the model. An example of a note may be a message informing the user of the number of hangers to be
designed by CAESAR II. For notes, there is nothing for the user to correct

Eile dit Model Enyironment Qptions iew Iools t:felp

lHl l le!l!E] [j]·[@JA' .:0.E)IQI @BI -;r · I ®0 !01!5=- I i· 1 0 · I ""I e. :!:II do oQ l

lD 10 1;;t I W [Q Iii I HEl l lA • M I <\ g I g -lI <'.> + -+ I tt I: 1\1 I(ru IEil @l
ii) Errors and Warnings q. x
:Errors: 0 I Warnings: 0 I Notes: 1

Message Element/
Message Type Message Text
Number Node Number
1 NOTE I

CENTER OF GRAVITY REPORT

Total IJght X cg y (

...
lb. ft. £1
Pipe 249.4 7 .5 2
Insulation 0 .0 0 .0 0
Refractory 0 .0 0 .0 0
Fluid 83.6 7 .5 2
Pipe+Ins+Rfrty 249 .4 7 .5 2
Pipe+Fluid 333.0 7 .5 2
Pipe+Ins+Rfrty+Fld: 333.0 7 .5 2
11

l•l l ITD
I Classic Piping Input I Errors and Warnings
 5-6 Error Checking and Static Load Cases

Static Load Case Editor

The first step in the analysis of an error-checked piping model is the specification of the static load cases.

Button Description

Selection of the Analysis-Static option from the CAESAR II Main Menu or from within
Analysis the piping input invokes the Load Case Editor.
Statics
Note: The piping input file must have successfully gone through error checking before this
option can be chosen.

A discussion of CAESAR II Load Cases is included at the end of this chapter. Please refer to that section for
more information.

After entering the Static Load Case Editor, a screen appears which lists all of the available loads that are
defined in the input, the available stress types, and the current load cases offered for analysis. If the job is
entering static analysis for the first time, CAESAR II presents a list of recommended load cases. If the job has
been run previously, the loads shown are those saved during the last session. A typical Load Case Editor screen
displays below:

Loa d Case Editor

 Chapter 5 Error Checking and Static Load Cases 5-7

You can define up to 999 load cases. Load cases may be edited by clicking on a line in the Load List area.

Only the load components listed in the upper left-hand portion of the screen may be specified in the load cases.
The entries must be identical to what is shown on the screen. Available stress types can be selected from the
Stress Type menu. Stress type determines the stress calculation method and the allowable stress to use (if any).

Load Cases may be built through drag and drop actions. Dragging a load component from the Loads Defined in
Input list to a line on the load list automatically adds the load component to the load case, if it is not already
included. Highlighted basic load cases may be dragged down to be added to algebraic combination cases
(CAESAR II may prompt for combination type). Use the Load Case Options tab to select combination methods
and other specifics pertaining to the load cases.

Note: Defining a fatigue (FAT) stress type for a load case automatically displays a field in which the
number of anticipated load cycles for that load case can be entered.

All basic (non-combination) load sets must all be specified before any algebraic combinations may be declared.
This rule holds true for user defined and edited load cases.

The following commands are available on this screen:

Button Description

Inserts a blank load case following the currently selected line in the load list. If no line is
Edit-Insert selected, the load case is added at the end of the list. Load cases are selected by clicking on
the number to the left of the load case.

Deletes the currently selected load case.

Edit-Delete

Accepts the load cases and runs the job.

File Analysis

Recommend Allows the user to replace the current load cases with the CAESAR II recommended load
cases.

Load Cycles Hides or displays the Load Cycles field in the Load Case list. Entries in these fields are
only valid for load cases defined with the fatigue stress type.

Import Load Cases Copies the load cases from another file. The units and load types of the copied file must
match those of the current file.

Note: To add a new load case to the beginning of currently defined load cases, click on the blank line
in the load list just above L1. Then click the Edit-Insert button.
 5-8 Error Checking and Static Load Cases

Building Static Load Cases

Load Case Definition in CAESAR II
The CAESAR II Load Case Editor is a versatile instrument for combining native and combination loads in nearly
any manner required by the various piping codes supported by CAESAR II. To enter the Static Load Case
Editor from the CAESAR II Main Menu select ANALYSIS->STATICS.

The Technical Reference Manual describes the method for adding or deleting load cases. Here we will
concentrate on which load cases to use to describe a variety of situations. For assistance in load case definition
for an application not covered here, or for clarification of the load cases described below, please contact ICAS
Technical Support by e-mail at [email protected].

Standard Load Cases for B31.1, B31.3, ASME SECT III Class 2 & 3, NAVY 505, B31.4, B31.5, B31.8, B31.9,
B31.11, Canadian Z662, RCC-M C & D, Stoomwezen, CODETI, Norwegian, FDBR, BS 806 piping codes
display below:

Use these load cases (as recommended by CAESAR II) for cases where you have weight, temperature, and
pressure.
L1 W+T1+P1 (OPE)
L2 W+P1 (SUS)
L3 L1-L2 (EXP) *
* For the expansion case use the algebraic combination method under the Load Case Options tab.

Note: Some of the above piping codes perform a code stress check on the operating case and some do
not. For more information, refer to the CAESAR II Quick Reference Guide for the equations used for
obtaining code stress and allowable stress for the various piping codes.

The expansion case is a combination case that results from subtracting the sustained case from the operating
case. As such the expansion case represents the change in the piping system due to the effect of temperature, but
in the presence of other loads. This is important because the restraint status of the operating and sustained cases
can be different if there are nonlinear restraints (such as +Y, -Z, any restraint with a gap, etc.) or boundary
conditions (friction).

The Standard Load Cases for B31.4 Ch IX, B31.8 Ch VIII, and DNV codes display below:
L1 W+T1+P1 (OPE)
L2 W+P1 (SUS)
No expansion stress is calculated for these piping codes.

The Standard Load Cases for BS7159 and UKOOA piping codes display below:
L1 W+T1+P1 (OPE)
No expansion or sustained stress is calculated for these piping codes.
 Chapter 5 Error Checking and Static Load Cases 5-9

Load Cases with Hanger Design

When CAESAR II designs spring hangers, two additional load cases are required as recommended by
CAESAR II. The letter H is used to designate the hanger installation load (pre-load) that is always present in a
spring hanger.
L1 W (HGR) *HS = Rigid
L2 W+T1+P1 (HGR) *HS = Ignore
L3 W+T1+P1+H (OPE) *HS = As Designed
L4 W+P1+H (SUS) *HS = As Designed
L5 L3-L4 (EXP) **
*HS is the Hanger Stiffness defined under the Load Case Options tab.
** Use the algebraic combination method under the Load Case Options tab.

When using only pre-defined spring hangers, there is no need for the first two load cases above, however, the
letter H is still required in the operating and sustained load cases. When using multiple load case design other
hanger load cases are required. In such instances it is suggested that the user first allow CAESAR II to
recommend the load cases, then add/edit the non-hanger design load cases as appropriate.

Load Cases with Thermal Displacements

Generally, thermal displacements are associated with specific operating conditions (D1 is applied with T1, D2
with T2 and son on. When one temperature is below ambient, and one is above ambient we will want to
determine the full expansion stress range as described below:
L1 W+T1+D1+P1 (OPE)
L2 W+T2+D2+P1 (OPE)
L3 W+P1 (SUS)
L4 L1-L3 (EXP) * effects of D1 and T1
L5 L2-L3 (EXP) * effects of D2 and T2
L6 L1-L2 (EXP) * full expansion stress range
* Use the algebraic combination method under the Load Case Options tab.

Note: For piping codes with no expansion stress computation, simply include the thermal
displacements in the operating cases as shown above.
 5-10 Error Checking and Static Load Cases

Load Cases with Thermal Displacements and Settlement

For settlement, use a CNode on any affected restraints. This CNode must be a node number not used elsewhere
in the model. Then place the settlement on the CNode using a displacement vector not already used for thermal
displacements. We used D3 to describe restraint settlement in this example.
L1 W+T1+D1+D3+P1 (OPE)
L2 W+T2+D2+D3+P1 (OPE)
L3 W+P1 (SUS)
L4 L1-L3 (EXP) * effects of T1, D1, and settlement
L5 L2-L3 (EXP) * effects of T2, D2, and settlement
L6 L1-L2 (EXP) * full expansion stress range with settlement
Settlement is evaluated as an expansion load because it is strain-related with a half-cycle.

Note: For piping codes with no expansion stress computation add the thermal and settlement
displacements to the operating cases as shown above.

Load Cases with Pitch and Roll

In offshore piping evaluation there is often platform movement or relative movement between two platforms
with inter-connected piping. This also applies to FSPO and other ship-board piping systems. For these
applications the pitch and roll displacements are applied to CNodes on each affected restraint similar to
settlement. Use displacement vectors not in use to describe thermal displacement boundary conditions. Usually
there is a positive displacement and a negative displacement to describe the peak pitch and roll conditions.
Consider the state of the platform at its peaks to determine the worst two conditions for relative displacement
between piping separated by the largest distance along the line of wave travel. D3 and D4 are used in this
example to describe two peak pitch conditions. D1 is thermal displacement.
L1 W+T1+D1+D3+P1 (OPE)
L2 W+T1+D1+D4+P1 (OPE)
L3 W+P1 (SUS)
L4 L1-L3 (EXP) *
L5 L2-L3 (EXP) *
*Use the algebraic combination method under the Load Case Options tab.
 Chapter 5 Error Checking and Static Load Cases 5-11

It is likely that because of the large number of displacement cycles common in pitch and roll situations, the user
will want to perform a fatigue analysis. Select the appropriate fatigue curve on the first piping input spreadsheet
under the Allowable Stress auxiliary data area. Then in the Load Case Editor add the following two cases for
the example above and add the number of cycles for each pitch condition.
L6 L1-L3 (FAT) 21000000
L7 L2-L3 (FAT) 21000000
The 21000000 above represents 21 million load cycles during the life of this piping system.

For large displacements such as those that occur during a one-year, 30-year, or 100-year event, simply use a low
number of cycles as would occur during the life of such a storm multiplied by the number of such storms likely
to be seen during the lifetime of the piping system. These displacements ARE NOT considered as occasional
loads because occasional loads only involve primary loads and are not strain-related.

Load Cases for Other Types of Occasional Loads

Wind and Wave
The methodology is the same for all occasional loads regardless of the source. So for a Wind analysis simply
replace the U1 and U3 above with Win1 and Win2 (there is not likely to be a vertical component of wind
considered) in the load cases. For Wave loading, replace U1 and U3 above with Wav1 and Wav2 (there is not
likely to be a vertical component of wave considered) in the load cases.

Relief Valve
For relief valve firing, calculate the thrust force of the relief valve and place a concentrated load equal to the
thrust force at the appropriate place downstream such as at the first bend node or intersection node of a tee. Also
place an equal force, but in the opposite direction on the back of the relief valve. Then replace U1 above with F1
in the load cases. The example below has two relief valves that fire independently. They may fire individually
or together.
L1 W+T1+P1 (OPE)
L2 W+T1+P1+F1 (OPE)
L3 W+T1+P1+F2 (OPE)
L4 W+T1+P1+F1+F2 (OPE)
L5 W+P1 (SUS)
L6 L1-L5 (EXP) *
L7 L2-L1 (OCC) *
L8 L3-L1 (OCC) *
L9 L4-L1 (OCC) *
L10 L5+L7 (OCC) **
L11 L5+L8 (OCC) **
L12 L5+L9 (OCC) **
* Use the Algebraic combination method under the Load Case Options tab.
** Use the ABS or Scalar combination method under the Load Case Options tab.
 5-12 Error Checking and Static Load Cases

Snow and Ice Load

Snow load is a uniform load in units of weight per length (lb/ft, N/m, etc.). Multiply the depth/thickness of
snow/ice on the piping by the density of snow/ice and the pipe outside diameter to calculate the uniform load. If
the piping enters a building or will otherwise have no snow/ice load, re-activate the uniform load at that node
and enter all zeroes. For snow/ice loads, the uniform load will always be negative in the vertical direction. The
load cases are the same as described earlier for seismic, wind, and wave, but with only one uniform load vector
they are somewhat simplified.

Waterhammer Loads, Seismic Loads With Anchor Movements

It is not recommended to attempt to simulate waterhammer loads statically. See the example in the Technical
Reference Manual for dynamic analysis of a system undergoing waterhammer.

It is not recommended to attempt a static seismic analysis when anchor movements are present. Rather a
dynamic analysis should be done using the Spectrum analysis method. See the example in the Technical
Reference Manual for Earthquake Spectrum analysis of a system undergoing anchor movements.
 Chapter 5 Error Checking and Static Load Cases 5-13

Static Seismic Load Cases

While in piping input, click KAUX->SPECIAL EXECUTION PARAMETERS and enable the Uniform Load in Gs box. On
the first input spreadsheet, activate the Uniform Loads field and enter the Seismic Load In Gs. You should
input the X-direction acceleration in vector 1, Y-direction acceleration in vector 2, and Z-direction acceleration
in vector 3. This makes load case generation easier.

Since any seismic event is likely to occur while the piping system is in operation, this is the load case that we
want to consider. The operating case should have all operating loads plus the seismic load. This load case is
then used in conjunction with the standard operating case to segregate the effect of the seismic load, which then
is combined with the static sustained load case for code compliance considerations.
L1 W+T1+P1 (OPE)
L2 W+T1+P1+U1 (OPE)
L3 W+T1+P1-U1 (OPE)
L4 W+T1+P1+U2 (OPE)
L5 W+T1+P1-U2 (OPE)
L6 W+T1+P1+U3 (OPE)
L7 W+T1+P1-U3 (OPE)
L8 W+P1 (SUS)
L9 L1-L8 (EXP)
L10 L2-L1 (OCC)
L11 L3-L1 (OCC)
L12 L4-L1 (OCC)
L13 L5-L1 (OCC)
L14 L6-L1 (OCC)
L15 L7-L1 (OCC)
L16 L8+L10 (OCC)
L17 L8+L11 (OCC)
L18 L8+L12 (OCC)
L19 L8+L13 (OCC)
L20 L8+L14 (OCC)
L21 L8+L15 (OCC)
 5-14 Error Checking and Static Load Cases

In load cases 2 through 7 above, we include all the loads and call these operating cases. The subtracted uniform
load vectors reverse the direction of the uniform load applied. Use these load case results for occasional restraint
loads and occasional displacements. Load Cases 10 through 15 represent the segregated occasional loads.
Although we designate these as occasional load cases, we don’t need a code stress check here as these are only
part of the final solution for code compliance. Therefore, under the Load Case Options tab, we can select
Suppress for the Output Status. Also these combination load cases all use the Algebraic Combination Method
on the Load Case Options tab. Load cases 16 through 21 are all used for code compliance. We add the
segregated occasional results to the sustained case results and use either the Scalar or ABS Absolute Value
Combination Method on the Load Case Options tab. Both scalar and absolute will give us the same code stress
results although the displacements, forces, and moments could be different. Since we don’t really use any results
except the stresses for combination cases, it really does not matter which combination method you use.

Sometimes we want to combine the results of vertical g-loads with horizontal g-loads. Often a factor is applied
to the vertical g-load component of the combined load. This can be accomplished initially when entering in the
Uniform Load on the input spreadsheet for the vertical component or you can do this directly in the load case
editor as shown below. Using the example above we will combine .67 vertical g-load with each horizontal
component.
L1 W+T1+P1 (OPE)
L2 W+T1+P1+U1+0.67U2 (OPE)
L3 W+T1+P1-U1+0.67U2 (OPE)
L4 W+T1+P1+U1-0.67U2 (OPE)
L5 W+T1+P1-U1-0.67U2 (OPE)
L6 W+T1+P1+U3+0.67U2 (OPE)
L7 W+T1+P1-U3+0.67U2 (OPE)
L8 W+T1+P1+U3-0.67U2 (OPE)
L9 W+T1+P1-U3-0.67U2 (OPE)
L10 W+P1 (SUS)
L11 L1-L10 (EXP)
L12 L2-L1 (OCC)
L13 L3-L1 (OCC)
L14 L4-L1 (OCC)
L15 L5-L1 (OCC)
L16 L6-L1 (OCC)
L17 L7-L1 (OCC)
L18 L8-L1 (OCC)
L19 L9-L1 (OCC)
L20 L10+L12 (OCC)
L21 L10+L13 (OCC)
L22 L10+L14 (OCC)
L23 L10+L15 (OCC)
 Chapter 5 Error Checking and Static Load Cases 5-15

L24 L10+L16 (OCC)

L25 L10+L17 (OCC)
L26 L10+L18 (OCC)
L27 L10+L19 (OCC)
At times it is required to combine the horizontal and vertical components of seismic loading together. You can
accomplish this in the Load Case Editor. Set up the static seismic load cases as shown in the first example
above, then combine the segregated horizontal and vertical load cases together using the SRSS Combination
Method on the Load Case Options tab. Add these last results to the sustained case as shown below:
L1 W+T1+P1 (OPE)
L2 W+T1+P1+U1 (OPE)
L3 W+T1+P1-U1 (OPE)
L4 W+T1+P1+U2 (OPE)
L5 W+T1+P1-U2 (OPE)
L6 W+T1+P1+U3 (OPE)
L7 W+T1+P1-U3 (OPE)
L8 W+P1 (SUS)
L9 L1-L8 (EXP)
L10 L2-L1 (OCC) *
L11 L3-L1 (OCC) *
L12 L4-L1 (OCC) *
L13 L5-L1 (OCC) *
L14 L6-L1 (OCC) *
L15 L7-L1 (OCC) *
L16 L10+L12 (OCC) **
L17 L10+L13 (OCC) **
L18 L11+L12 (OCC) **
L19 L11+L13 (OCC) **
L20 L14+L12 (OCC) **
L21 L14+L13 (OCC) **
L22 L15+L12 (OCC) **
L23 L15+L13 (OCC) **
L24 L8+L16 (OCC) ***
L25 L8+L17 (OCC) ***
L26 L8+L18 (OCC) ***
L27 L8+L19 (OCC) ***
L28 L8+L20 (OCC) ***
 5-16 Error Checking and Static Load Cases

L29 L8+L21 (OCC) ***

L30 L8+L22 (OCC) ***
L31 L8+L23 (OCC) ***
* Use the algebraic combination method under the Load Case Options tab.
** Use the SRSS combination method under the Load Case Options tab.
*** Use the ABS or Scalar combination method under the Load Case Options tab.

Note: For piping codes not performing a sustained code stress check change the operating load cases
that include seismic loads to OCC and use these for code compliance. In such cases the combination
cases described above are not needed.
 Chapter 5 Error Checking and Static Load Cases 5-17

Providing Wind Data

Currently CAESAR II enables users to access wind load data from 13 different wind codes.
 AS/NZ 1170:2002  IBC 2006
 Brazil NBR 6123  IS 875
 BS6399-97  Mexico 1993
 China GB 50009  NBC 2005
 EN 1991-1-4:2005  UBC
 ASCE # 7 Standard Edition 2005  User -Defined Pressure vs. Elevation Table
 User-Defined Velocity vs. Elevation Table

Up to 4 different wind load cases may be specified for any 1 job.

The only wind load information that is specified in the Piping Input is the shape factor. It is this shape factor
input that causes load cases WIN1, WIN2, WIN3, and WIN4 to be listed as an available load to be analyzed.
More wind data is required before an analysis can be made. When wind loads are used in the model, CAESAR II
makes available the screen to define the extra wind load data. Once defined, this input is stored and may be
changed on subsequent entries into the static analysis processor.

Users can specify the wind data needed for an analysis by clicking the Wind Loads tab for the appropriate wind
load case. The Wind Load tab appears:

Wind L oa d Specifications
 5-18 Error Checking and Static Load Cases

There are thirteen different methods that can be used to generate wind loads on piping systems:
 AS/NZ 1170:2002  IBC 2006
 Brazil NBR 6123  IS 875
 BS6399-97  Mexico 1993
 China GB 50009  NBC 2005
 EN 1991-1-4:2005  UBC
 ASCE # 7 Standard Edition 2005  User -Defined Pressure vs. Elevation Table
 User -Defined Velocity vs. Elevation
Table

You can select the appropriate method by placing a value of 1.0 in one of the Wind Direction Specification
fields. When using a pressure or velocity vs. elevation table, users need only specify the method and the wind
direction on the preceding screen. After clicking the User Wind Profile button, the dialog box prompts for the
corresponding pressure or velocity table. If a uniform pressure or velocity is to act over the entire piping system,
then only a single entry needs to be made in the table, otherwise users should enter the pressure or velocity pro-
file for the applicable wind loading.

Note: To use the ASCE #7 wind loads, all of the fields should be filled in.

For example, as per ASCE #7, the following are typical basic wind-speed values:
 California and West Coast Areas-124.6 ft./sec. ( 85 m.p.h.)
 Rocky Mountains- 132.0 ft./sec ( 90 m.p.h.)
 Great Plains- 132.0 ft./sec ( 90 m.p.h.)
 Non-Coastal Eastern United States-132.0 ft./sec ( 90 m.p.h.)
 Gulf Coast- 190.6 ft./sec (130 m.p.h.)
 Florida-Carolinas- 190.6 ft./sec (130 m.p.h.)
 Miami- 212.6 ft./sec (145 m.p.h.)
 New England Coastal Areas- 176.0 ft./sec (120 m.p.h.)

Copy Wind Vector - You can copy the Wind data from any defined Wind Case to any remaining Wind Cases
by clicking the Copy Wind Vector button. This is especially useful for large Wind Pressure or Velocity vs.
Elevation tables.
 Chapter 5 Error Checking and Static Load Cases 5-19

Specifying Hydrodynamic Parameters

Up to 4different hydrodynamic load cases may be specified for any 1 job.

Several hydrodynamic coefficients are defined on the element spreadsheet. The inclusion of hydrodynamic
coefficients causes the loads WAV1, WAV2, WAV3, and WAV4 to be available in the Load Case Editor.

A CAESAR II Hydrodynamic Loading dialog box is shown in the following figure.

In the Load Case Editor, four different wave load profiles can be specified. Current data and wave data may be
specified and included together or either of them may be omitted so as to exclude the data from the analysis.
CAESAR II supports three current models and six wave models. See the CAESAR II Technical Reference Manual for
a detailed discussion of hydrodynamic analysis.

Note: Wave data may be copied between any of the four defined vectors to any of the unused vectors
by clicking the Copy Wave Vector button.
 5-20 Error Checking and Static Load Cases

Execution of Static Analysis

The static analysis performed by CAESAR II follows the regular finite element solution routine. Element
stiffnesses are combined to form a global system stiffness matrix. Each basic load case defines a set of loads for
the ends of all the elements. These elemental load sets are combined into system load vectors. Using the
relationship of force equals stiffness times displacement (F=KX), the unknown system deflections and rotations
can be calculated. The known deflections however, may change during the analysis as hanger sizing, nonlinear
supports, and friction all affect both the stiffness matrix and load vectors. The root solution from this equation, the
system-wide deflections and rotations, is used with the element stiffnesses to determine the global (X,Y,Z) forces
and moments at the end of each element. These forces and moments are translated into a local coordinate system
for the element from which the code-defined stresses are calculated. Forces and moments on anchors, restraints,
and fixed displacement points are summed to balance all global forces and moments entering the node. Algebraic
combinations of the basic load cases pick up this process where appropriate - at the displacement,
force & moment, or stress level.

Once the setup for the solution is complete, the calculation of the displacements and rotations is repeated for
each of the basic load cases. During this step, the Incore Solution status dialog box appears.

Incor e Solution M odule

 Chapter 5 Error Checking and Static Load Cases 5-21

This dialog box serves as a monitor of the static analysis. It is divided into several areas. The upper side left
reflects the job size by listing the number of equations to be solved and the bandwidth of the matrix, which
holds these equations. Multiplying the number of equations by the bandwidth gives a relative indication of the
job size. This area also lists the current load case being analyzed and the total number of basic load cases to be
solved. The iteration count, as well as the current case number, shows how much “work” has been completed.
Load cases with nonlinear restraints may require several solutions (iterations) before the changing assumptions
about the restraint configuration for example resting or lifting off, active or inactive are confirmed.

In the lower left corner of the Incore Solver dialog box are two bar graphs, which indicate where the program is
in an individual solution. These bar graphs illustrate the speed of the solution. By checking the data in this first
box, users will have an idea of how much longer to wait for the results.

The right side of the solution screen also provides information to users regarding the status of nonlinear
restraints and hangers in the job. For example, messages noting the number of restraints that have yet to
converge or any hangers that appear to be taking no load, are displayed here. Nonlinear restraint status may be
stepped through on an individual basis by using the [F2]/[F4] function keys.

Following the analysis of the system deflections and rotations, these results are post-processed in order to
calculate the local forces, moments, and stresses for the basic load cases and all results for the algebraic
combinations (e.g. L1-L2). These total system results are stored in a file with the suffix “_P” for example,.
TUTOR._P.

Note: The “_A” or input file, the “_P” or output file, and the "OTL" (Output Time Link File) are all
that is required to archive the static analysis. The remaining scratch files may be eliminated from the
system without any impact on the work completed.
 5-22 Error Checking and Static Load Cases

During this post processing, the Status frame lists the current element for which the forces and stresses are being
calculated. Once the last stresses of an element are computed, the output processor screen is presented. Use this
menu to interactively review the graphic and tabular results of the analysis. Interactive processing of output
results is discussed in Chapter 7 of this document.

Static Out put Scr een

 Chapter 5 Error Checking and Static Load Cases 5-23

Notes on CAESAR II Load Cases

Definition of a Load Case
In CAESAR II, a load case is a group of piping system loads that are analyzed together, that are assumed to be
occurring at the same time. An example of a load case is an operating analysis composed of the thermal,
deadweight, and pressure loads together. Another is an as-installed analysis of deadweight loads alone. A load
case may also be composed of the combinations of the results of other load cases; for example, the difference in
displacements between the operating and installed cases. No matter what the contents of the load case, it always
produces a set of reports in the output, which list restraint loads, displacements and rotations, internal forces,
moments, and stresses. Because of piping code definitions of calculation methods and/or allowable stresses, the
load cases are also tagged with a stress category. For example, the combination mentioned above might be
tagged as an EXPansion stress case.

Piping System Loads

The piping system loads which compose the basic non-combination load sets relate to various input items found
on the Piping Input screen. The table below lists the individual load set designations, their names and the input
items, which make them available for analysis.

Designation Name Input items which activate this load case

W Deadweight Pipe Weight, Insulation Weight, Refractory

Weight, Cladding Weight, Fluid Weight, Rigid
Weight

WNC Weight No fluid Contents Pipe Weight, Insulation Weight, Refractory

Weight, Cladding Weight, Rigid Weight

WW Water Weight Pipe Weight, Insulation Weight, Refractory

Weight, Cladding Weight, Water-filled Weight,
Rigid Weight (usually used for Hydro Test)

T1 Thermal Set 1 Temperature #1

T2 Thermal Set 2 Temperature #2

T3 Thermal Set 3 Temperature #3

.
.

Designation Name Input items which activate this load case

T9 Thermal Set 9 Temperature #9

P1 Pressure Set 1 Pressure #1

P2 Pressure Set 2 Pressure #2

P3 Pressure Set 3 Pressure #3

 5-24 Error Checking and Static Load Cases

.
.

Designation Name Input items which activate this load case

P9 Pressure Set 9 Pressure #9

HP Hydrostatic Test Pressure Hydro Pressure

D1 Displacements Set 1 Displacements (1st Vector)

D2 Displacements Set 2 Displacements (2nd Vector)

D3 Displacements Set 3 Displacements (3rd Vector)

Designation Name Input items which activate this load case

D9 Displacement Set 9 Displacements (9th Vector)

F1 Force Set 1 Forces/Moments (1st Vector)

F2 Force Set 2 Forces/Moments (2nd Vector)

F3 Force Set 3 Forces/Moments (3rd Vector)

.
.
.

Designation Name Input items which activate this load case

F9 Force Set 9 Forces/Moments (9th Vector)

WIN1 Wind Load 1 Wind Shape Factor

WIN2 Wind Load 2 Wind Shape Factor

WIN3 Wind Load 3 Wind Shape Factor

WIN4 Wind Load 4 Wind Shape Factor

WAV1 Wave Load 1 Wave Load On

WAV2 Wave Load 2 Wave Load On

WAV3 Wave Load 3 Wave Load On

WAV4 Wave Load 4 Wave Load On

U1 Uniform Loads Uniform Loads (1st Vector)
 Chapter 5 Error Checking and Static Load Cases 5-25

Designation Name Input items which activate this load case

U2 Uniform Loads Uniform Loads (2nd Vector)

U3 Uniform Loads Uniform Loads (3rd Vector)

CS Cold Spring Material # 18 or 19

H Hanger Initial Loads Hanger Design or Pre-specified Hangers

.
.
.

Note: Available piping system loads display on the left side of the Static Load Case screen.

Basic Load Cases

Basic load cases may consist of a single load such as WNC for an as-installed weight analysis, or they may
include several loads added together such as W+T1+P1+D1+F1 for an operating analysis. The stress categories:
SUStained, expansion, occasional, operating, and FATigue are specified at the end of the load case definition.
The complete definition of the two examples are: WNC (SUS) and W+T1+P1+D1+H (OPE). Each basic load
case is entered in this manner in a list for analysis.

When building basic load cases, load components (such as W, T1, D1, WIND1, etc.) may be preceded by scale
factors such as 2.0, -0.5, etc. Likewise, when building combination cases, references to previous load cases may
also be preceded by scale factors as well. This provides you with several benefits:
 In the event that 1 loading is a multiple of the other i.e., Safe Shutdown Earthquake, being 2 times Operating
Basis Earthquake, only 1 loading need be entered in the piping input module; it may be used in a scaled or
unscaled form in the Load Case Editor.
 In the event that a loading may be directionally reversible (i.e., wind or earthquake) only one loading need
be entered in the piping input module; it may be used preceded by a + or a - to switch direction.
 Load Rating Design Factor (LRDF) methods may be implemented by scaling individual load components by
their risk-dependent factors, for example:
1.05W + 1.1T1+1.1D1+1.25 WIND1

Note: You may select the available stress types from the pull-down list on each line.

You may combine results of the basic load cases using algebraic combination cases. Always enter these
algebraic combinations after the last of the basic load cases. Designate Combinations of basic load cases by
using the prefix L1, L2, etc.

Note: All load cases with stress type FATigue must have their expected number of Load Cycles
specified.
 5-26 Error Checking and Static Load Cases

An example set of loads displays below.

The following family of load cases provides a valid example of algebraic combinations.

Load Case Designation Comments

1 W+T1+P1+H+0.67CS (OPE) Hot operating; note the scale factor

which takes credit only for of the
cold spring
2 W1+P1+H+0.67CS(OPE) Cold operating: with cold spring included

3 W1+P1+H(SUS) Traditional sustained case

4 WIN1(OCC) Wind case; note this will be manipulated

later to represent average wind 1X,
maximum wind 2X, also positive and
negative directions.

5 L1-L2(EXP) Traditional expansion case, cold to hot

(note reference to "L" for "Load", rather
than "DS".
6 L1-L2(FAT) Same case but now evaluated for fatigue
at 10,000 cycles.
 Chapter 5 Error Checking and Static Load Cases 5-27

Load Case Designation Comments

7 L1+L4(OPE) Hot operating with average wind (in

positive direction).
8 L1-L4(OPE) Hot operating with average wind (in
negative direction).

9 L1+2L4(OPE) Hot operating with maximum wind (in

positive direction).

10 L1-2L4(OPE) Hot operating with maximum wind (in

negative direction).

11 L2+L4(OPE) Cold operating with average wind (in

positive direction).

12 L2-L4(OPE) Cold operating with average wind (in

negative direction).

13 L2+2L4(OPE) Cold operating with maximum wind (in

positive direction).

14 L2-2L4(OPE) Cold operating with maximum wind (in

negative direction).

15 L3+L4(OCC) Occasional stress case, sustained plus

average wind.

16 L3+2L4(OCC) Occasional stress case, sustained plus

maximum wind.
17 L9+L10+L11+L12(OPE) Maximum restraint load case (the
combination option should be MAX).

Note: CAESAR II permits the specification of up to nine hundred ninety-nine load cases for analysis. In
the rare situation where more cases are required, the model should be copied to a new file in order to
specify the additional load cases.
 5-28 Error Checking and Static Load Cases

Load Case Options Tab

CAESAR II offers a second tab on the Static Load Case screen - Load Case Options. Among other features, this
screen allows the user to define alternative and more meaningful Load Case names, as shown in the figure
below.

User Defined Na mes

The user-defined names appear in the Static Output Processor in the Load Case report (for more information,
see below), and may also be used in place of the built load case names anywhere in the Static Output
Processor, by activating the appropriate option.

Note: Load case names cannot exceed 132 characters in length.

 Chapter 5 Error Checking and Static Load Cases 5-29

User Control of Produced Results Data

CAESAR II allows you to specify whether any or all of the load case results are retained for review in the Static
Output Processor. You can use the 2 controls found on the Load Case Options tab. These are:

Output Status
This item controls the disposition of the entire results of the load case -- the available options are Keep or
Discard. The former would be used when the load case is producing results that the user may wish to review; the
latter option would be used for artificial cases such as the preliminary hanger cases, or intermediate construction
cases. For example, in the load list shown in the figure, the Wind only load case could have been optionally
designated as Discard, since it was built only to be used in subsequent combinations, and has no great value as a
standalone load case. Note that load cases used for hanger design (i.e., the weight load case and hanger travel
cases designated with the stress type HGR) must be designated as Discard. Note that for all load cases created
under previous versions of CAESAR II, all load cases except the HGR cases are converted as Keep; likewise the
default for all new cases (except for HGR load cases) is also Keep.

Output Type
This item designates the type of results that are available for the load cases, which have received a Keep status.
This could be used to help minimize clutter on the output end, and ensure that only meaningful results are
retained. The available options are:
Disp/Force/Stress - Provides displacements, restraint loads, global and local forces, and stresses. This would be a
good choice for Operating cases, when designing to those codes which do a code check on operating stresses,
because the load case would be of interest for interference checking (displacements) and restraint loads at one
operating extreme (forces).
Disp/Force - Provides displacements restraint loads, global and local forces. This would be a good choice for
OPE cases when designing for those codes which do not do a code check on OPE stresses.
Disp/Stress - Provides displacements and stresses only.
Force/Stress - Provides restraint loads, global and local forces, and stresses. This might be a good choice for the
Sustained (cold) case, because the load case would be of interest for restraint loads at one operating extreme
(forces), and code compliance (stresses). Note that FR combination loads cases developed under previous
versions of CAESAR II are converted with this Force/Stress type.
Disp - Provides displacements only.
Force - Provides restraint loads, global and local forces only.
Stress - Provides stresses only. This would be a good choice for a sustained plus Occasional load case (with Abs
combination method), since this is basically an artificial construct used for code stress checking purposes only.
Note that ST combination load cases developed under previous versions of CAESAR II are converted with this
Stress type.

Snubbers Active?
Activating this option causes the snubbers to be considered to be rigid restraints for this particular load case. By
default, OCC load cases activate this option, while other types of load cases default to an inactive state.

Hanger Stiffness
 5-30 Error Checking and Static Load Cases

The three options available here are As Designed, Rigid, and Ignore, and cause CAESAR II to (1) consider the
actual spring hanger stiffnesses, (2) model the spring hangers as rigid restraints, or (3) remove the spring hanger
stiffnesses from the model, respectively. As Designed should be used for most "real" (non-hanger design) load
cases. Rigid should be used for the Restrained Weight Case and any Hydrotest Case (if the spring hangers are
pinned during it). (Note that during the Restrained Weight Case user-defined hangers will not be made rigid.)
Ignore is normally used for the Operating for Hanger Travel Cases -- except in those cases where the user wishes
to include the stiffness of the selected spring in the Operating for Hanger Travel Case (and iterate to a solution).
In that case, the user should select As Designed for those cases as well. In that case, it is very important that the
hanger load in the Cold Case (in the physical system) be adjusted to match the reported hanger Cold Load.

Friction Multiplier
This multiplier may be used to alter (or deactivate) the friction factors used in this particular load case. The
friction factor (Mu) used at each restraint will be this multiplier times the Mu factor at each restraint. Setting this
value to zero deactivates friction for this load case.

Elastic Modulus
Designates use of Cold (EC) or any of the nine (EH1-EH9) hot elastic moduli in determining results on a load
case per condition basis.
 Chapter 5 Error Checking and Static Load Cases 5-31

User-Controlled Combination Methods

For combination cases, CAESAR II enables you to designate the combination method to be used. Load cases to be
combined are designated as L1, L2, etc., for Load Case 1, Load Case 2, etc., with the combination method
selected from a drop list on the Load Case Options tab. The available methods are:

Algebraic
Combines the displacements, forces, moments, restraint loads, and pressures of the designated load cases in an
algebraic (vectorial) manner. The resultant forces, moments, and pressures are then used (along with the SIFs
and element cross-sectional parameters) to calculate the piping stresses. Load case results are multiplied by any
scale factors (1.8, -, etc.) prior to doing the combination.

The obsolete CAESAR II combination methods DS and FR used an Algebraic combination method. Therefore,
load cases built in previous versions of CAESAR II using the DS and FR methods are converted to the Algebraic
method. Also, new combination cases automatically default to this method, unless designated by the user). In the
load case list shown in the figure, most of the combination cases are typically built with the Algebraic method.

Note that in the load case list shown in the figure, most of the combination cases typically are built with the
Algebraic method. Note that Algebraic combinations may be built only from basic (i.e., non-combination) load
cases or other load cases built using the Algebraic combination method.

Scalar
Combines the displacements, forces, moments, restraint loads, and stresses of the designated load cases in a
Scalar manner (i.e., not as vectors, but retaining consideration of sign). Load case results are multiplied by any
scale factors prior to doing the combination (for example, for a negative multiplier, stresses would be
subtractive). This method might typically be used when adding plus or minus seismic loads to an operating case,
or when doing an Occasional Stress Code check (i.e. scalar addition of the Sustained and Occasional stresses).

The obsolete CAESAR II combination methods ST used a Scalar combination method. Therefore, load cases built
in previous versions of CAESAR II using the ST method are converted to the Scalar method.

SRSS
Combines the displacements, forces, moments, restraint loads, and stresses of the designated load cases in a
Square Root of the Sum of the Squares (SRSS) manner. Load case results are multiplied by any scale factors
prior to doing the combination however, due to the squaring used by the combination method, negative values
vs. positive values will yield no difference in the result. This method is typically used when combining seismic
loads acting in orthogonal directions.

ABS
Combines the displacements, forces, moments, restraint loads, and stresses of the designated load cases in an
Absolute Value manner. Load case results are multiplied by any scale factors prior to doing the combination
however, due to the absolute values used by the combination method, negative values vs. positive values will
yield no difference in the result. This method may be used when doing an Occasional Stress code check (i.e.,
absolute summation of the Sustained and Occasional stresses).

Note: The Occasional Stress cases in the figure are built using this method.
 5-32 Error Checking and Static Load Cases

Max
For each result value, this method selects the displacement, force, moment, restraint load, and stress having the
largest absolute value from the designated load cases; so no actual combination per se, takes place. Load case
results are multiplied by any scale factors prior to doing the selection of the maxima. This method is typically
used when determining the design case worst loads, stress, etc. from a number of loads.

Note: The maximum Restraint Load case shown in the figure uses a Max combination method.

Min
For each result value, this method selects the displacement, force, moment, restraint load, and stress having the
smallest absolute value from the designated load cases; so no actual combination takes place. Multiply load case
results by any scale factors prior to the selection of the minima.

SignMax
For each result value, this method selects the displacements, force, moments, restraint load, and stress having the
largest actual value, considering the sign, from the designated load cases; so no actual combination takes place.
Load case results are multiplied by any scale factors prior to doing the selection of the maxima. Use this method
along with the SignMin method to find the design range for each value i.e., the maximum positive and
maximum negative restraint loads.

SignMin
For each result value, this method selects the displacements, force, moments, restraint load, and stress having the
smallest actual value, considering the sign, from the designated load cases; so no actual combination takes place.
Load case results are multiplied by any scale factors prior to doing the selection of the minima. Use this method
along with the SignMax method to find the design range for each value i.e., the maximum positive and maximum
negative restraint loads.
 Chapter 5 Error Checking and Static Load Cases 5-33

Recommended Load Cases

When you first enter the Static Load Case Editor CAESAR II recommends, based on the loads defined in the
model, 3 types of load cases: Operating, Sustained, and Expansion (but not occasional).

Operating load cases represent the loads acting on the pipe during hot operation, including both primary weight
pressure, and force loadings and secondary displacement and thermal loadings. Operating cases are used to find
hot displacements for interference checking, and hot restraint and equipment loads. Generally when
recommending operating load cases, CAESAR II combines weight, pressure case #1, and hanger loads with each
of the thermal load cases (displacement set #1 with thermal set #1, displacement set #2 with thermal set #2,
etc...), and then with any cold spring loads.

Sustained load cases represent the primary force-driven loadings acting on the pipe, i.e., weight and pressure
alone. This usually coincides with the cold as-installed load case. Sustained load cases are used to satisfy the
code sustained stress requirements, as well as to calculate as-installed restraint and equipment loads. Sustained
load cases are generally built by combining weight with each of the pressure and force sets, and then with any
hanger loads.

Expansion load cases represent the range between the displacement extremes usually between the operating and
sustained cases. Expansion load cases are used to meet expansion stress requirements. Most users will specify
only 1 temperature and 1 pressure. This input simplifies the recommended cases to something like:

Case # 1 W+D1+T1+P1+H (OPE) ....OPERATING

Case # 2 W+P1+H (SUS)....SUSTAINED LOAD CASE
Case # 3 L1-L2 (EXP)....EXPANSION LOAD CASE
You should review any load recommendations made by CAESAR II.

Note: CAESAR II does not recommend any occasional load cases. Definition of these is the
responsibility of the user.

If the recommended load cases do not satisfy the analysis requirements, you can delete or modify them.
Conversely, you can reset the load cases to the program recommended set at any time. If you have an operating
temperature below ambient in addition to one above ambient you should add another expansion load case as
follows:

Case # 1 W+D1+T1+P1+H (OPE) ....

Case # 2 W+D2+T2 +P1+H (OPE) ....
Case # 3 W+P1+H (SUS)....SUSTAINED LOAD CASE
Case # 4L1-L3 (EXP)....EXPANSION LOAD CASE
Case # 5L2-L3 (EXP)....EXPANSION LOAD CASE
Case # 6L2-L1 (EXP)....you should add this since it is not recommended by CAESAR II.
 5-34 Error Checking and Static Load Cases

Recommended Load Cases for Hanger Selection

If you want to let the program design spring hangers, 2 additional load cases must be analyzed to get the data
required to select a variable support. The 2 basic requirements for sizing hangers are the deadweight carried by
the hanger hot load and the range of vertical travel to be accommodated. The first load case traditionally called
“Restrained Weight” consists of only deadweight (W). For this analysis, CAESAR II includes a rigid restraint in
the vertical direction at every location where a hanger is to be sized. The load on the restraint from this analysis
is the deadweight that must be carried by the support in the hot condition. For the second load case, the hanger is
replaced with an upward force equal to the calculated hot load, and an operating load case is run. This load case
traditionally called “Free Thermal” includes the deadweight and thermal effects, the first pressure set if defined,
and any displacements, W+D1+T1+P1. The vertical displacements of the hanger locations, along with the
previously calculated deadweights, are then passed on to the hanger selection routine. Once the hangers are
sized, the added forces are removed and replaced with the selected supports along with their pre-loads cold
loads, designated by load component H. Load component H may appear in the load cases for hanger design if you
have predefined any springs. In this case, it would represent the pre-defined operating loads. CAESAR II then
continues with the load case recommendations as defined above. A typical set of recommended load cases for a
single operating load case spring hanger design appears as follows:

Case # 1W ....WEIGHT FOR HANGER LOADS

Case # 2W+D1+T1+P1 ....OPERATING FOR HANGER TRAVEL
Case # 3W+D1+T1+P1+H (OPE) ...OPERATING (HGRS. INCLUDED
Case # 4W+P1+H (SUS) ....SUSTAINED LOAD CASE
Case # 5L3-L4 (EXP) ....EXPANSION LOAD CASE
These hanger sizing load cases #1 & #2 generally supply no information to the output reports other than the data
found in the hanger tables. Cases 3, 4, & 5 match the recommended load cases for a standard analysis with 1
thermal and 1 pressure defined. Also notice how the displacement combination numbers in case 5 have changed
to reflect the new order. If multiple temperatures and pressures existed in the input, they too would appear in this
set after the second spring hanger design load case. Two other hanger design criteria also affect the
recommended load cases. If the actual cold loads for selected springs are to be calculated, 1 additional load case
WNC+H would appear before case #3 above. If the hanger design criteria piping system is set so that the
proposed springs must accommodate more than 1 operating condition, other load cases must additionally appear
before the case #3 above. You must perform an extra hanger design operating load case for each additional
operating load case used to design springs. Refer to the discussion of the hanger design algorithm for more
information on these options.
Chapter 6 Static Output Processor

In This Chapter
Entering the Static Output Processor .................................... 6-2
Standard Toolbar ................................................................... 6-4
Reports Navigation Toolbar .................................................. 6-6
Custom Reports Toolbar ....................................................... 6-8
Report Template Editor......................................................... 6-9
Filtering Reports ................................................................... 6-12
Report Options ...................................................................... 6-14
General Computed Results.................................................... 6-27
Output Viewer Wizard .......................................................... 6-31
Printing or Saving Reports to File Notes .............................. 6-32
3D/HOOPS Graphics in the Static Output Processor ........... 6-33
Animation of Static Results Notes ........................................ 6-38
 6-2 Static Output Processor

Entering the Static Output Processor

With the completion of a static analysis the CAESAR II Output screen automatically appears, allowing
interactive review of the analytical results. Users may also be access the static results anytime after the analysis
has been completed through the CAESAR II Main Menu option - Output-Static.

Static Out put

Once the output processor is launched, by either of the mentioned paths, the output screen appears. The left-hand
column shows the load cases that were analyzed. The center column shows the available reports associated with
those load cases. The right-hand column shows reports, such as input listings or hanger selection reports that are
not associated with load cases.

Note: The proper job must be made current through the File-Open option before selecting the Static-
Output processor through the Main Menu.
 Chapter 6 Static Output

Static Out put Pr ocessor

The Processor screen enables users to manipulate all output review activity. The CAESAR II Output
Processor was designed so that piping results could be quickly reviewed in tabular form, graphically, or using
any combination of the two forms. Users may
• Interactively review reports for any selected combination of load cases and/or report types.
• Print or save to file copies for any combination of load cases and/or report types.
• Add Title lines to output reports.

Note CAESAR II enables users to select either extended and/or summarized versions of most standard
reports. Also users may use the Filters menu options.
 6-4 Static Output Processor

Standard Toolbar
A number of commands are available:

Button and Name Description

Opens a different job for output review. The user is prompted for the file to be
File-Open opened.

Saves the selected reports to a disk file. The user is initially prompted for the file
File-Save name. After closing, or exit, a Table of Contents is added to the file.

Allows users to select either the CAESAR II Default Load Case names or the
Select Case Names user-defined load case names for output reports. Also available on the Options
menu as Load Case Name. The user-defined load case names are entered in the
load case editor under the Load Options tab.

Allows users to select formatting of node numbers and names to output to reports.
Select Node Name Also available on the Options menu

Returns to the piping input processor.

Input

Allows users to view graphic animation of the displacement solution.

Animation

Enables the user to superimpose analytical results onto a plot of the system model.
Plot This is described in more detail later in the chapter.

Prints the selected reports. After closing, or exiting, a Table of Contents is printed.
File-Print This is described later in the chapter.

For those users with access to Microsoft Word, CAESAR II provides the ability to
Microsoft ∨ Word send output reports directly to Word. This feature permits the use of all of Word’s
formatting features (font selection, margin control, etc.) and printer support from
CAESAR II. This feature is activated through use of the Microsoft Word button when
producing a report. Word is available as an output device to the Static and
Dynamic Output Processors. Users can append multiple reports to form a final
report, by selecting the desired reports, clicking the Microsoft Word button, closing
Word, selecting the next report to be added, clicking the button again, etc. A table
of contents, reflecting the cumulatively produced reports, always appears on the
first page of the Word document.
 Chapter 6 Static Output

Button and Name Description

For those users with access to Microsoft Excel, CAESAR II provides the ability to
send output reports directly to Excel. This feature permits the use of all of Excel’s
Microsoft ∨ Excel features and printer support from CAESAR II. This feature is activated through use of
the Microsoft Excel button when producing a report. Excel is available as an output
device to the Static and Dynamic Output Processors. Users can append multiple
reports to form a final report, by selecting the desired reports, clicking the
Microsoft Excel button, closing Excel, selecting the next report to be added,
clicking the button again, etc. Each report displays in a separate spreadsheet with
the corresponding report name.
There is no table of contents generated.

Displays the selected reports on the terminal. This permits the analysis data to be
View-Reports reviewed interactively in text format. After selecting the desired combination of one
or more active load cases with any combination of report options and executing the
View-Reports button, each report is presented one at a time for inspection. Users
may scroll through the reports vertically and horizontally where necessary.

Allows the user to enter report titles for this group of reports. CAESAR II enables
Enter Titles users to customize the report with a two line title or description. The title may be
assigned once for all load case reports sent to the printer or a disk drive; or the title
may be changed for each individual report before it is moved to the output device.
When CAESAR II receives this command a dialog prompts for the titles.

Repor t Titles

Note: 28 characters of each entered title line are displayed for 80 column output reports and 50
characters of each entered title line are displayed for 132 column output reports.

Button and Name Description

Opens the Output Viewer Wizard to the right of the Static Output Processor. It
More/Less aids the user in selecting specific reports and reviewing their order before sending
the output to the selected device. To close the Output Viewer Wizard click Less.
 6-6 Static Output Processor

Reports Navigation Toolbar

Activate this toolbar by selecting at least 1 report for on screen viewing. When more than one report is selected
for viewing, the reports display in the tabbed view. You can click individual tabs at the bottom of the screen to
navigate 1 report to the other. You can also use the View Previous Report and View Next Report buttons to
navigate. Also, right-mouse clicking on the report opens the context menu with the Go To navigation choice.

Cont ext M enu

Individual reports can be “torn apart” from the tabbed view and positioned around the screen real estate or
“docked” attached next to other opened reports for “comparison view”. To “tear” the reports from the tabbed
view, click with left mouse button on the corresponding tab at the bottom, then move the mouse while still
holding the left button down. The outline shadow will show new location of the report; release the mouse button.

You can print or save individual reports to a text file or to MS Word/MS Excel by using the right-mouse context
menu with options Send Report To or Send All To.

While the report is active on the screen, it is possible to adjust the Display Properties available from the View
menu and change the background color or enable the horizontal and vertical grid lines. This feature may help
with better printing results.

While the report is active on the screen, it is possible to adjust the Page Configuration available from the View
menu -> Change Page Break. You can also scale the report to fit on 1 page or adjusted to a specified number of
pages, by using the Allow Adjustment of Page Breaks and Show Page Break Lines options.

Page Configur ation Dialog

 Chapter 6 Static Output

Button and Name Description

Enables users to navigate through the reports. When all reports have
been viewed, the Reports Viewer dialog closes and returns control to
View Previous Report the Static Output Processor.

Enables users to navigate through the reports. When all reports have
been viewed, the Reports Viewer dialog closes and returns control to
View Next Report the Static Output Processor.

GoTo Displays the list of currently opened reports in alphabetical order; allows
the users quickly and conveniently display the desired report.

Enables the report searching for specific node number, max values of
Find in Report any of the fields that exist in the current report, of for any random text or
number.
Enables zooming the report text in or out without affecting the actual
Zoom In/Zoom Out
report font or formatting. The zoom level can also be controlled from the
right-mouse-click context menu. The zoom level is applied to the
currently active report and is temporal until the report is closed.

Enables saving the changes to the custom report when the Report
Save Current Custom Report Template Editor is launched.
Template

Save Current Custom Report Enables keeping the original report and saving the changes to another
Template with a New Name report when the Report Template Editor is launched.
 6-8 Static Output Processor

Custom Reports Toolbar

The Custom Reports toolbar enables you to access several functions which can be used to manipulate the
generated reports.

Button and Name Description

Enables you to create new custom reports. At least 1 load case must be
selected from the Load Cases Analyzed list box to enable preview.

Add New Custom Report Template Clicking this button displays the Report Template Editor dialog.

Enables you to modify and save existing custom reports, 1 at a time. At least
1 load case must be selected from the Load Cases Analyzed list box in
addition to the custom report name to preview the report. Clicking this button
Edit Existing Custom Report displays the Report Template Editor dialog.
Template
Enables you to permanently remove a custom report templates. This action
cannot be undone.

Delete One or More Custom Report

Templates
Enables you to replace the current custom report templates whether CAESAR II
or user -defined with the CAESAR II Default Custom Report
templates. After clicking the button, all the user-defined or modified custom
Reset Default Custom Report report templates are replaced by the CAESAR II default templates.
Templates
Note: This action affects ALL jobs system-wide and cannot be undone.

Enables you to view existing custom reports on screen. Any number of load
cases analyzed and any number of custom reports can be selected to view.
Custom Reports are presented 1at a time for inspection. You can scroll
View Custom Report On Screen through the reports vertically and horizontally where appropriate. Double
clicking the column headers allows sorting of the results.

Enables you to bring in a custom report template created by a different user or

Import Custom Report on a different machine. The report template file extension is *.C2RPT and can
be read from any accessible location and does not require residing in any
particular directory. Once the report template file is read, it becomes a part of
the current CAESAR II configuration. The new report is appended to the
Custom Reports area of the Static Output processor. The default
name of the template file corresponds to the custom report name. You can
access this feature is also available by clicking OPTIONS/CUSTOM REPORTS.

Enables you to save any custom generated report to a text file and share it
Export Custom Report with other users. The report template file extension is *.C2RPT. This file can
be saved to any accessible location. The default name of the template file
corresponds to the custom report name. You can access this feature by
clicking OPTIONS/CUSTOM REPORTS.
 Chapter 6 Static Output

Report Template Editor

After selecting the appropriate load case and custom report name and clicking Edit Existing or Add New
Custom Report Template the Report Template Editor dialog appears.

Repor t Template Edit or Dialog

 6-10 Static Output Processor

The Report Template Editor dialog consists of two sections: the template editor to the left and the preview grid
to the right.

The template editor has a tree-like structure and resembles Window Explorer’s folder view. There are 11 major
categories available: Template Name and Template Settings for general report editing, and several output fields;
Displacements, Restraints, Local Restraints, Equipment Nozzle Checks, Global and Local Forces, Flange
Evaluation, Stresses, and Hanger Table Data.

The Template Name category allows users to specify the report name, enter a brief description of the report, and
select the report type. The report name followed by the template description display on the preview grid if the
Include Report Name option is checked under the Template Settings category.

There are 3 report types available:

• Individual - generates output reports, one per selected load case, in the format similar to the standard
Displacements or Restraints reports.
• Summary - generates a single output report for all the specified load cases as a summary, in the format similar
to the standard Restraint Summary report.
• Code Compliance - generates an output stress check report for multiple load cases as a single report, similar to
the standard Code Compliance report.

Note Actual columns and their order on the reports are controlled solely by the user. Data from
various categories can be customized on a single report to suit user's needs.

The Template Settings category provides options for the report header and the report body text, formatting and
alignment. The font face, size, and color for the header and the report body may be set here. Users may wish to
include or remove specific header text (such as Report Name, Job Title or Filters Description) by toggling the
check box next to the corresponding item. Report Line Spacing enables user to change the spacing between
lines of text. The Summary Line check box (used with Summary-type reports) toggles the appearance of the
summary line with MAX values for each field/column per node. The Node Number/Name check box (used
with Summary-type reports), if enabled, repeats the Node information on each Loadcase line; if disabled, then
the Node will appear on the separate line above the data for Loadcases. These two options may help with later
data manipulations when sending the reports to MS Excel spreadsheet

Note Any changes in the editor are immediately reflected in the preview window to the right.

Each of the following categories consists of related output data. For example, Displacements category contains
three translational (DX, DY, and DZ) and three rotational (RX, RY, and RZ) fields; Stresses contains Axial,
Bending, and Code stresses among other stress related fields. A number next to the field name indicates the
Column Number this field will be placed in. When nothing or zero value is specified, this column will not be
included in the current report.

Each field contains following information that can be easily controlled by the user:

Field Name Description

Column Number Indicates the order of the fields in the output report.

Precision Indicates the number of decimal places to be displayed.

 Chapter 6 Static Output

Field Name Description

Sort Order Specifies whether the data in the column is in ascending, descending, or in no order. This
gives the user flexibility of reviewing reports for maximum (or minimum) values without
extra effort.

Font Allows the user to specify text font face, size and color for this field whenever special
formatting is required. Note: The generic font settings for the entire report should be set at
the Template Settings -> Body category.

Align Values Allows the user to control left, right, or center alignment of the values in the column.

Field Caption Allows the user to customize the name of the field as it appears on the report by typing the
new caption. This may be useful to customize the display of the output Displacements in the
report to reflect the Plant North/South/East/West directions or Vertical/Horizontal notations
instead of generic X/Y/Z.

Column Width Allows the user to control the size of the column in terms of the number of displayed
characters or digits. In addition, resizing the columns in the Preview Grid will adjust the
Column Width Value. Entering a "0" will close the column and remove it from the report.
Entering a "-1" will instruct the template to size the column to the predefined default size.

Units Based Precision Has two choices: Yes and No. When set to Yes, it enables the automatic control of the
displayed number of decimal places to be calculated based on the selected display units.
This value is used together with the Units Conversion Label value. The Precision value is
ignored in this case. When set to No, the Precision value takes place.

Note When a category or any particular field is highlighted in the editor, the help text for this field is
displayed in the Help box at the bottom of the editor section.

The Preview Grid on the right of the Custom Report Template Editor dialog is interactive. Users may drag
the columns by their heading to arrange the order of the fields in the reports. Double clicking the column header
will sort that column’s values in ascending or descending order. The dragged column number or sorted order
value will automatically be saved in the Column Number or Sort Order entry of that field in the editor tree.
Clicking the column header once will highlight that field in the editor tree, extend its contents and scroll it to
view.

Note The Preview Grid is limited to the first 50 lines for performance speedup. The entire report will
be available after selecting the appropriate load case(s) and the custom report name on the Static
Output Processor screen and clicking View Report.

Any current changes to the custom report template can be saved by clicking Save. The custom report template
can also be saved under a different name by clicking Save As... The Save As... dialog appears prompting the
user to enter the new template name a brief description, and the report type. Clicking Preview Report enables
users to remove the grid lines from the Preview Grid. Clicking the same button again will add the grid lines for
editing.
 6-12 Static Output Processor

Filtering Reports
CAESAR II enables you to display a displacement, restraint, force, or stress within specified range. The filtering
can also be performed on specific Line Numbers. You can access this feature by clicking Filters from the menu
and the Filters dialog will display.

Filter s Dialog
Filters are useful in processing reports containing fields from more than one class, for example the Restraint
Summary Extended report where fields from 2 classes restraints and displacements are present. For example, if
the Restraints Class is failing but the Displacements Class is passing, then the default OR combination would
print the entire dataset. To exclude this dataset from the report, the Class combination should be switched to
AND. All Filter choices are saved with the current job.

If you do not define a filter for any of the fields in the report, these fields are assumed to pass the filter condition
and are printed. From and To nodes apply to all class tabs.

Note: By default both Fields and Classes are combined using the OR method: if any of the filtering
fields passes the filter condition, the entire dataset is printed. You may choose to switch to the AND
method in which only if all the filtering conditions are met will the entire dataset be printed. First, the
fields in each class are checked for the filter compliance. This initial field check determines whether
the entire class will pass or fail. Secondly, all classes are checked for the filter compliance. The data is
filtered by Line Numbers first, then by Nodes, then by Classes and Fields as specified in the Filter
Options.
Chapter 6 Static Output

Using the Filters Menu Option

1. Enter data in the From Nodes and/or To Nodes field.
2. Select the appropriate Filter Option. In most cases the defaults are sufficient. Filtering by
Absolute or Signed Value: The default is to filter by the magnitude, regardless of the
sign/direction. You may filter by a specific direction of load or displacement; this feature is
particularly useful when looking for lifting off the supports in directional restraints (like +Y).
3. Select the appropriate Combination For field. Fields refer to the particular data items (columns)
in each class; for example, DX and RZ are in the Displacements class, or FX and MZ are in
the Restraints class, or Code Stress and Bending Stress are in the Stresses class. For further
information see the note below.
4. Select the appropriate Combination For Class and click Ok to accept the changes. Classes refers
to the major types of output, for example Displacements, Restraints, Forces, or Stresses.
5. Click the appropriate Class tab you want to apply the filter to.

6. Enter the information on the Class tab selected. Each tab contains related fields with a drop
box and edit box. Each corresponding edit box displays the value to compare to. Each of the
drop boxes has a list of comparison operators:
Operator Description

> Greater than

>= Greater or Equal

< Less than

<= Less or Equal

== Equal

\= Not Equal
7. Click OK to accept the changes.
8. From the Options menu click View Reports.
 6-14 Static Output Processor

Report Options
For most load cases, except hanger design and fatigue, there are a variety of different report options that can be
selected for review.

Note: Most Standard Reports have short and long versions, designated by the word Extended. The
extended reports usually have more data items available and may require a Landscape option when
printed.

Displacements
Translations and rotations for each degree of freedom are reported at each node in the model.

Note: Users may now use the Filters feature to sort reports containing fields from more than one class.
For more information see Filtering Report.
 Chapter 6 Static Output

Restraints
Forces and moments on each restraint in the model are reported. There is a separate report generated for each
load case selected.

Note: Users may now use the Filters feature to sort reports containing fields from more than one class.
For more information see Filtering Report.
 6-16 Static Output Processor

Restraint Report - In Local Element Coordinates

It is possible to generate a restraint report where the loads and moments are aligned with the local element
coordinate system. This is particularly useful when addressing skewed nozzles, where the axial, longitudinal and
circumferential results are needed. As an example, consider the small system shown below:

This system consists of two small horizontal lines, anchored at both ends. The last element of each line is
skewed 45 degrees in the X-Z plane. At the end of this skewed line is an axial restraint, as illustrated in the
following figure:
 Chapter 6 Static Output

The typical Global Restraint report for this system displays in the following table. Note that at node 140 this
report shows two equal loads in the (global) X and Z directions. These values (24,463) are the global component
loads acting on the skewed restraint. The actual magnitude of the restraint load, acting in-line with the pipe can
be found by performing the SRSS of these component loads, which yields 34595. This value is the load on the
restraint acting axially with the pipe.

Operating Case Restraint Loads – Global Coordinate System

NODE FX lb. FY lb. FZ lb. MX ft.lb. MY ft.lb. MZ ft.lb.

100 -24463 -514 66 1340.5 -273.3 -6418.6 Rigid ANC

119 0 0 -24528 0.0 0.0 0.0 Rigid Z

140 24463 0 24463 0.0 0.0 0.0 Flex X

200 -24463 -514 66 1340.5 -273.3 -6418.6 Rigid ANC

219 0 0 -24528 0.0 0.0 0.0 Rigid Z

240 24463 0 24463 0.0 0.0 0.0 Flex X

The process of performing SRSS or sine/cosine operations to obtain restraint loads in the element coordinate
system can be tedious. As an alternative, a restraint report can be generated where all of the loads are aligned
with the associated element coordinate system. The report for the same small job displays in the table below.

Operating Case Restraint Loads – Local Element Coordinate System

NODE fx lb. fy lb. fz lb. mx ft.lb. my ft.lb. mz ft.lb.

100 -24463 66 514 1340.5 -6418.6 273.3 Rigid ANC

119 0 -24528 0 0.0 0.0 0.0 Rigid Z

140 34595 0 0 0.0 0.0 0.0 Flex X

200 -24463 66 514 1340.5 -6418.6 273.3 Rigid ANC

219 -17344 -17344 0 0.0 0.0 0.0 Rigid Z

240 34595 0 0 0.0 0.0 0.0 Flex X

In reviewing the relationship between the local versus global restraint loads note the following:
 The global FY (vertical) load at node 100 of -514 translates to a local fz load. For details on the
global to local coordinate system relations, please refer to Chapter 6 of the Technical Reference
Manual. (These two values are shown in the tables in “bold” for ease of visualization.)

 At node 140, the skewed axial restraint, the first table showing the global coordinate system loads,
reports the two equal component loads. The second table showing the local loads, reports only the
resultant axial load at the restraint. (These values are shown in the tables in italics for ease of
visualization.)
 6-18 Static Output Processor

Restraint Summary
Similar to the restraint report, this option provides force and moment data for all valid selected load cases
together on one report.

Note: Users may now use the Filters feature to sort reports containing fields from more than one class.
For more information see Filtering Report.
 Chapter 6 Static Output

Nozzle Check Report

The Nozzle Check report defines the appropriate force/moment limits on a specified nozzle.

Data for the first nozzle at node 10 corresponds to the previous input. The Limits shown in the report are the
values from the input. Similarly, the Comparison method also reflects the input setting. The loads shown are
the loads on the nozzle for the indicated load cases. If any load exceeds its corresponding allowable load, then
entire line is shown in “red” (with an asterisk at the far right in the event the report is printed).

The Resultant column reports the resultant forces and moments for the SRSS Comparison method, and the
unity check value for the Unity Check method.
 6-20 Static Output Processor

Flange Reports
Flange Reports are available after completing the In-line Flange Evaluation analysis. There are two methods
and two corresponding reports for evaluating flanges under load: Kellogg Equivalent Pressure Method (Peq)
and ASME B&PVC Section III Subsection NC-3658.3 Method (NC-3658.3).

The reports display some of the relevant input items along with the calculated corresponding Moments and
Stresses or Equivalent Pressure for each node where the Flange Evaluation was requested. This is an elemental
type report, and the flanges may be defined on either end of the element; so some lines in the report with no
corresponding output would appear blank.

Flange Repor t
 Chapter 6 Static Output

Global Element Forces

Forces and moments on the piping are reported for each node in the model.

Note: Users may now use the Filters feature to sort reports containing fields from more than one class.
For more information see Filtering Report.
 6-22 Static Output Processor

Local Element Forces

These forces and moments have been transferring into the CAESAR II Local Coordinate system. Refer to the
Technical Reference Manual for information on this local coordinate system.

Note: Users may now use the Filters feature to sort reports containing fields from more than one class.
For more information see Filtering Report.
 Chapter 6 Static Output

Stresses
S!Fs and Code Stresses are reported for each node in the model. The code stresses are compared to the
.Allowable stress at each node as a percentage. Note that stresses are not computed at nodes on rigid elements for
more information see the figure on the following page.

CAESAR II Ver.4.99.0. (Build 050930) Date: SEP 1.2005 Time: 7:50

Job: E:\CAESAR5.00\EX6.MPLES\TUTOR
Licensed To: COADE.Inc. ·Internal Net Testing ·· ID 10001
STRESSES REPORT: Stresses on Elements
CASE 4 (SUS)W•Pl+H

Piping Code: B31.3 ·2004.April29.2005

CODE STRESS CHECK PASSED :LOADCASE 4 (SUS)W•P1 •H

Highest Stresses: ( KPa )

CodeStress Ratio: 11.B @Node 30
CodeStress: 14133.1 Allowable: 119279.3
Axial Stress: 2905.0 @Node 2B
Bending Stress: 12752.4 @Node 30
Torsion Stress: 1021.7 @Node 35
HoopStress: 2B61.1 @Node 10
3D Max Intensity: 14133.1 @Node 30

NODE Bending Stress Torsion Stress SIF In Plane SIF Out Plane Code Stress Allowable Stress Ratio
KPa KPa KPa KPa %

5 0 ·0 1.000 1.000 13B1 119279

10 0 0 1.996 2.32B 14B1 119279

10 2142 ·0 1.996 2.32B 37B6 119279 3

15 1242 0 1.000 1.000 2915 119279 2

15 0 0 0.000 0.000 0 0 0
20 0 0 0.000 0.000 0 0 0

20 1910 ·0 1.000 1.000 4077 119279 3

25 4147 0 1.996 2.32B 6343 119279 5

25 B1B4 ·0 1.996 2.32B 10629 119279 9

2B 4101 0 1.000 1.000 7006 119279 6

Note: Users may now use the Filters feature to sort reports containing fields from more than one class.
For more information see Filtering Report.
 6-24 Static Output Processor

Stress Summary
The highest stresses at each node are presented for all load cases selected in summary format for quick review.

Note: Users may now use the Filters feature to sort reports containing fields from more than one class.
For more information see Filtering Report.
 Chapter 6 Static Output

Code Compliance Report

Stress checks for multiple load cases may be included in a single report using the Code Compliance report,
available from the Static Output processor. For this report, the user selects all load cases of interest, and then
highlights Code Compliance under the Report Options. The resultant report shows the stress calculation for all
load cases together, on an element-by-element basis.
 6-26 Static Output Processor

CUmulatiYe Usage Report

The Cwnulative Usage report is available only when there are one or more fatigue-type load cases present.
Once the Cwnulative Uage report is generated, regardless of the number of load cases selected, showing the
combined impact of simulating selected fatigue loadings.

CAESAR II CUMULATIVE USAGE FILE:FATIGUE

DATE:JUN 16,2005
F om Usage To Usage
Load Case Cycles Node Ratio Node Ratio

•••• CUMULATIVE USAGE EVALUATION PASSED

HIGHEST USAGE RATIO IS 0.87 AT NODE HINODE

MINIMUM ALLOWABLE CYCLES IS 12338

CASE 10 (FAT) 110=L6-L4 0 5 0 0.00 stat:t 0 0.00

CASE 11 (FAT) L11=L6-L7 0 5 0 0.00 stat::t 0 0.00
CASE 12 (FAT) 112=L6-L8 0 5 0 0.00 stat:t 0 0.00
CASE 13 (FAT) 113=L3-L8 0 5 0 0.00 stat::t 0 0.00
TOTAL 5 0.00 stat:t 0.00

CASE 10 (FAT) 110=L6-L4 200 sta<t11201984 0.00 1511200832 0.00

CASE 11 (FAT) L11=L6-L7 11800 sta<t11220608 0.00 1511219904 0.00
CASE 12 (FAT) 112=L6-L8 188000 sta<t INFINTY 0.00 15 INFINTY 0.00
CASE 13 (FAT) 113=L3-L8 12000 sta<t INFINTY 0.00 15 INFINTY 0.00
TOTAL stat:t 0.00 15 0.00

10 110=L6-L4 200 1510302976 0.00 2010303424 0.00

11Ann n.nn n777 n.nn ·I
 Chapter 6 Static Output

General Computed Results

Load Case Report
The Load Case Report documents the Basic Names (as built in the Load Case Builder), User-Defined Names,
Combination Methods, Load Cycles, and Load Case Options (Output Status, Output Type, Snubber Status,
Hanger Stiffness Status, and Friction Multiplier) of the static load cases. This report is available from the
General Computed Results column of the Static Output Processor.
 6-28 Static Output Processor

Hanger Table with Text

This report provides basic information regarding spring hangers either selected by CAESAR II or the user.
Information provided includes the node number, the number of springs required, the hanger table figure number
and size, the hot load, the theoretical installed load, which is what the hangers are set to in the field prior to
pulling the pins, the actual installed load, which is the load on the hanger when the pipe is empty, the spring rate
from the catalog, and the horizontal movement determined from the CAESAR II output. If constant effort
supports are selected then the hanger constant effort force is reported.

Input Echo
The input echo allows the user to select which portions of the input are to be reported in this output format. All
basic element data (geometry), operating conditions, material properties, and boundary conditions are available
in this report option.
 Chapter 6 Static Output

Miscellaneous Data
This report displays the Allowable Stress Summary, Bend Data, Nozzle Flexibility Data, Pipe Report, Thermal
Expansion Coefficients used during analysis, Bill of Materials, the Center of Gravity Report, and Wind and
Wave input data.

Static Output Processing 1!1EJ

Miscellaneous REPORT, Miscellaneous Data Items

File: C:\CAESAR\EXAHPLE._L

---------
CAESAR II
--------- -------
MISC. BEND REPORT
-------
FILE:EXAHPLE.-p
--------- --------- ------
BEND TYPE SIFi SIFo Ki Ko
---------
60. l
--------- ---------
Flange l. 87058
-------
l.55882
---------
6.81371
-----------
6.81371
------

?. :-:174:-:13 I
 6-30 Static Output Processor

Warnings
All warnings reported during the error checking process are summarized here.
 Chapter 6 Static Output

Output Viewer Wizard

After clicking More >> in the lower right corner of the Static Output Processor, an Output Viewer Wizard
dialog displays to the right. The Output Viewer Wizard can be hidden again by clicking Less <<.

Out put Viewer Wizar d

The Output Viewer Wizard consists of the Report Order window and auxiliary operational buttons. It enables
users to add any report to the view by clicking Add or delete any report not needed by clicking Remove. Users
can arrange the order of the reports by moving them up or down by clicking Move Up or Move Down on the
selected report.

Users may send a report to screen or to printer by checking the appropriate radio button in the upper section of
the Output Viewer Wizard dialog. After clicking Finish, the reports are automatically sent to the specified
device in the order displayed in the Report Order window.

To generate a table of contents place a check mark in the Generate Table of Contents (TOC) box and a (TOC)
is appended to the printed reports.

Note The TOC will display if Send to Screen was selected, regardless if the TOC check box was
enabled or disabled.
 6-32 Static Output Processor

Printing or Saving Reports to File Notes

The tabular results brought to the screen may be sent directly to a printer. Different combinations of load cases
and report types may be chosen, each followed by the File-Print command, to create a single report.

Button and Name Description

Prints copies of the reports. To print copies of multiple reports as a single report, use
Print the Output Viewer Wizard to populate the report order tree, click Send To Printer
and then Finish.

Sends reports to a file (in ASCII format) rather than the printer. After selection, a
File Save dialog appears where users must select the file name. To change the file name for a
new report, select FILE-SAVE AS.

Typically, the set of output reports that a user might wish to print out for documentation purposes might be:

Load Case Report Purpose

SUSTAINED STRESS Code compliance

EXPANSION STRESS Code compliance

OPERATING DISPLACEMENTS Interference checks

OPERATING RESTRAINTS Hot restraint, equipment loads

SUSTAINED RESTRAINTS As-installed restraint, equipment loads

Note Load cases used for hanger sizing produce no reports. Also, the hanger table and hanger table
with text reports are printed only once even though more than one active load case may be highlighted.

To save multiple reports as a single report to a file, use the Output Viewer Wizard.

Save As Dialog
 Chapter 6 Static Output

Note: The signs in all CAESAR II Reports show the forces and moments that act “ON” something.
The Element Force/Moment report shows the forces and moments that act “ON” each element to keep
that element in static equilibrium. The Restraint Force/Moment report shows the forces and moments
that act “ON” each restraint.

Note: When sending reports to MSWord, if a file named "header.doc" exists in the \caesar\system
directory, its contents will be read and used as the page header when CAESAR II exports the report to
MSWord. The intent is that "header.doc" contains the company logo, address details and formatting for
tables. The interface uses a style names "report table" which users can setup in "header.doc".
 6-34 Static Output Processor

3D/HOOPS Graphics in the Static Output Processor

The Static Output Processor Graphics Engine is used to review analytic results in graphic mode. The Static
Output 3D Graphics Engine shares the same general capabilities as the Piping Input Processor's Graphics. It
uses the same HOOPS Standard Toolbar that enables users to zoom, orbit, pan, and several other options among
them the ability to switch views and modes.

Additional capabilities of the Static Output Graphics Engine can be found on the Output Toolbar and include
the display of displaced shapes, highlighting and zooming to maximum displacements, restraint loads, and
stresses of the model. One of the major advantages of the 3D Graphics over the original CAESAR II graphics is
the graphical representation of stresses by value and by percent using color.

Out put T oolba r

A variety of CAESAR II Output Plot functions are accessed from the Show menu that is broken into sub-
menus Displacements, Restraints, Forces/Moments, and Stresses. Alternatively, these functions can be activated
by clicking the appropriate buttons

The CAESAR II Output Graphics Engine is extensive. Users are encouraged to experiment with all the output
options, noting which ones could be most appropriate for a given application. Some of the output options are
discussed below.

Button and Name Description

Overlays the scaled geometry with a different color into the current plot for the
Deflected Shape
selected load case. Clicking the arrow to the right of this button displays an
additional menu with the selected feature checked and the Adjust Deflection Scale
option.

Specifies the deflected shape plot scale factor.

Adjust Deflection Scale Note: Entering a value that is too small may prevent visual detection of the
deflected shape. Entering a scale value that is too large may graphically "break" or
discontinue the model. This option can also be accessed from the Show menu, by
clicking DISPLACEMENT/DEFLECTED SHAPE.

Gives users an option to visually display the expansion of a selected pipe due to
Grow the addition of heat.
 Chapter 6 Static Output

Button and Name Description

Places the actual magnitude of the X, Y, or Z displacements on the currently

displayed model.
Maximum Displacements Note: The element containing the displaced node is highlighted, and the camera
viewpoint is repositioned (preserving the optical distance to the model) to bring the
displaced node to the center of the view. It starts with highest value for the given
direction, after pressing Enter, the remaining values are placed in a similar manner
until all values are exhausted or become zero. Clicking the Maximum
Displacements button again clears the view of the displayed values and
highlighting. This option can also be accessed from the Show menu, by clicking
DISPLACEMENT/MAXIMUM DISPLACEMENT/(X, Y, OR Z). If none of the highlighted
operations was previously used, the default report shown will be the Stresses
Report for currently selected load case.

Shows/hides the Event Viewer on the plot. One of the advantages of the Event
Show Event Viewer Viewer Grid dialog is its ability to enable users to navigate among the elements,
Grid navigate to various reports within a load case, and view the reports for other load
cases. This is done in the Report Selection window on the left in the dialog. This
window has a tree structure similar in operation to Windows Explorer™. Clicking
the + sign for a particular load case will expand the tree of its reports. Selecting the
report displays the data in the grid view to the right. Selecting a node or an element
in the grid view (when Select Elements is enabled) highlights the corresponding
element on the graphics view, and zooms to the selected element if the
corresponding Zoom to Selection is enabled. Similarly, clicking an element on the
graphics view highlights the corresponding data row in the report view of the
Event Viewer dialog. Thus, this is a bidirectional connection.
Changing the load case within the Event Viewer Grid dialog will update the
graphics view (if applicable) and the Load Case Selection pull-down box on the
toolbar.

Allows the user to select one element at a time in the graphics. The Event Viewer
Select Elements dialog is also used in conjunction with the Select Elements button. When Select
Elements is active, or when users double click on an element, CAESAR II
highlights it and displays it in the Event Viewer dialog with the corresponding
element highlighted in the report grid.

Adds restraints symbols to the plot. Restraints are plotted as arrowheads with the
Output Restraints direction of the arrow indicating the direction of the force exerted by the restraint
Symbols on the piping geometry

Places the actual magnitude of the calculated restraint loads (corresponding to the
particular button) for a selected load case on the currently displayed geometry.
The Maximum Restraints Loads button displays the load magnitude value next
to the node, the element containing the node is highlighted and is brought to the
Maximum Restraint center of the graphics view. The Zoom to Selection and Show Event Viewer
Loads Grid options are still available at the discretion of the user. After pressing Enter
any remaining values will be placed in a similar manner.
 6-36 Static Output Processor

Button and Name Description

Displays the stress magnitudes in descending order one at a time.

Maximum Code
Stress Note: The Maximum Code Stress buttons’ operation is similar to the Maximum
Displacements button, the stress value is displayed next to the node and the
element containing the node is highlighted and is moved to the center of the view.
The Zoom to Selection and Show Event Viewer Grid options are still available at
the discretion of the user. After pressing Enter the 2nd, the 3rd, etc. highest value
is placed in the similar manner with corresponding element highlighting.
In addition to the "dry" numbers that could be found in a corresponding report, this
option gives the user graphical representation and distribution of large calculated
code stresses throughout the system.

Displays the overstressed point distribution for a particular load case. Nodes with a
Overstress calculated "code stress to allowable stress ratio" of 100% or more display in red;
the remaining nodes/elements display in the color selected for the lowest percent
ratio. This feature is useful to quickly observe the overstressed areas in the model.

Note: Overstressed conditions are only detected for load cases where a code compliance check was done (i.e.,
where there are allowable stresses available).

Note: Overstressed nodes will display in red in the Event Viewer Grid (if it is enabled).

Note: The model is still fully functional, it can be zoomed, panned, or rotated at the discretion of the
user.

Button and Name Description

Displays the piping system in a range of colors, where the color corresponds to a
Code Stress Colors certain boundary value of the code stress. This feature is used to quickly see the
by Value distribution of the code stresses in the model for a particular load case.

In addition to the model color highlight in the graphics view, the corresponding color key legend window is
displayed in the top left corner of the graphics view. The legend window can be resized and moved.

The colors and corresponding stress levels can be set in the CONFIGURATION/SETUP module, on the Plot Colors tab.

Button and Name Description

Displays the piping system in a range of colors, where the color corresponds to a
Code Stress Colors by certain percent ratio of code stress to allowable stress. This option is only valid for
Percent load cases where a code compliance check was done (i.e., where there are
allowable stresses available).
 Chapter 6 Static Output

Code Stress Colors by Percent is similar to the Stress Colors by Value option and is generally used to quickly
see the distribution of the code stress to allowable ratios in the model for a particular load case. The legend
window with the corresponding color key also displays in the left upper corner of the graphics view. The legend
window can be resized and moved.

Clicking the arrow to the right of this button displays an additional menu with two options: Display and Adjust
Settings . Selecting the Display option displays the color distribution. Selecting the Adjust Settings option
displays the Stress Settings dialog where desired values and corresponding colors could be set or adjusted.
These settings are related to the particular job they are set for and are saved in the corresponding job_name.XML
file in the current job data directory (see 3D/HOOPS Graphics in Piping Input Processor, 3D Graphics
Configuration chapter for more information on the *.XML file).

Code Str ess C olor s by Per cent

 6-38 Static Output Processor

Animation of Static Results Notes

CAESAR II allows the user to view the piping system as it moves to the displaced position of the basic load cases.
To animate the static results, execute the View-Animate command. The following screen appears:

Anima ted Gr aphic Scr een

The Animated Plot menu has several plot selections. Motion and Volume Motion are the commands to activate
the animation. Motion uses centerline representation while Volume Motion produces 3D graphics. The desired
load case may be selected from the drop down list. Animations may be sped up or slowed down or stopped using
the toolbars.

CAESAR II also enables users to save animated plots as HTML files by clicking FILE/SAVE AS ANIMATION. After
saving these files users can view them on any machine outside of CAESAR II.

Note The corresponding animation graphics file <job_name>.HSF must be transferred along with the
HTML file for proper display.
Chapter 7 Dynamic Input and Analysis

In This Chapter
Dynamic Capabilities in CAESAR II ................................... 7-2
Dynamic Analysis Input Processor Overview ...................... 7-6
Input Overview Based on Analysis Category ....................... 7-8
Harmonic............................................................................... 7-29
Earthquake (Spectrum) ......................................................... 7-32
Relief Loads (Spectrum) ....................................................... 7-37
Water Hammer/Slug Flow (Spectrum) ................................. 7-38
Time History ......................................................................... 7-39
Error Handling and Analyzing the Job ................................. 7-42
 7-2 Dynamic Input and Analysis

Dynamic Capabilities in CAESAR II

The dynamic analysis capabilities found in CAESAR II include natural frequency calculations, harmonic analysis,
response spectrum analysis, and time history analysis. Included with the CAESAR II Dynamic modules are
processors, which can generate several types of dynamic loads. An example is the processor, which converts
loading with respect to time into a force response spectrum. This ability to define different types of dynamic
effects improves the accuracy of dynamic modeling and makes these methods suitable for a wider range of
dynamic problems.

Natural frequency information can indicate the tendency of a piping system to respond to dynamic loads. A
system’s modal natural frequencies typically should not be too close to equipment operating frequencies and, as
a general rule, higher natural frequencies usually cause less trouble than low natural frequencies. CAESAR II
provides both calculation of a system’s modal natural frequencies, as well as animated plots of the associated
mode shapes.

CAESAR II also provides for the analysis of dynamic loads that are cyclic in nature. Applications of harmonic
analyses include fluid pulsation in reciprocating pump lines or vibration due to rotating equipment. These loads
are modeled as concentrated forces or displacements at one or more points in the system. To provide the proper
phase relationship between multiple loads a phase angle can also be associated with these forces or
displacements. Any number of forcing frequencies may be analyzed allowing easy analysis of equipment start-
up, and any operating modes. Harmonic responses represent the maximum dynamic amplitude the piping system
undergoes and have the same form as a static analysis - node deflections and rotations, local forces and
moments, restraint loads, and stresses. For example, if the results show an X displacement at node 45 of 5.8 cm.
then the dynamic motion due to the cyclic excitation would be from +5.8 cm. to -5.8 cm. at this point in the
system. The stresses shown are one half of, or one amplitude of, the full cyclic stress range.

The third type of dynamic analysis available in CAESAR II is the response spectrum method. The response
spectrum method allows an impulse type transient event to be characterized by a response vs. frequency spectra.
Each mode of vibration of the piping system is related to one response on the spectrum. These modal responses
are summed together to produce the total system response. The stresses for these analyses, summed with the
sustained stresses, should be compared to the occasional stress allowables defined by the piping code. Spectral
analysis can be used in a wide variety of applications. Ground motion associated with a seismic event is supplied
as displacement, velocity, or acceleration response spectra. The assumption is that all the supports move with the
defined ground motion and the piping system “catches up” to the supports; it is this inertial effect, which loads
the system. The shock spectra, which define the ground motion, may vary between the three global directions
and may even change for different groups of supports (independent as opposed to uniform support motion).
Another response spectrum application is based on single point loading rather than a uniform inertial loading.
CAESAR II makes effective use of this technique to analyze a wide variety of impulse type transient loads. Relief
valve loads, water hammer loads, slug flow loads, and rapid valve closure type loads all cause single impulse
dynamic loads at various points in the piping system. The response to these dynamic forces can be confidently
and conservatively predicted using the force spectrum method.

The fourth type of dynamic analysis is time history analysis. This is one of the most accurate methods, in that it
uses numeric integration of the dynamic equation of motion to simulate the system response throughout the load
duration. CAESAR II’s Time History Analysis method can solve any type of dynamic loading, but due to its
exact solution, requires more resources (memory, calculation speed and time) than other methods. Therefore, it
may not pay to use this method when, for example the spectrum method offers sufficient accuracy.
 Chapter 7 Dynamic Input and Analysis 7-3

Model Modifications for Dynamic Analysis

The dynamic techniques employed by CAESAR II require strict linearity in the piping and structural systems.
Dynamic responses associated with nonlinear effects are not addressed. An example of a nonlinear effect is
slapping, such as when a pipe lifts off the rack at one moment and impacts the rack the next. For the dynamic
model the pipe must be either held down or allowed to move freely. The nonlinear restraints used in the static
analysis must be set to be active or inactive for the dynamic analysis. CAESAR II allows the user to set the
nonlinear restraints to any configuration found in the static results (this is done by specifying the number of the
Static Load Case for Nonlinear Restraint Status). Most often the user selects the operating case to set the
nonlinear restraint configuration. For example, if a +Y support is active in the static operating case (normally
case 1 or 3), and the operating case is used to set the status of the nonlinear supports for dynamics, CAESAR II
installs a double-acting Y support at that location for the dynamic analysis. The pipe will not move up or down
at that point regardless of the dynamic load or tend to move.
 7-4 Dynamic Input and Analysis

A second nonlinear effect is friction. Friction effects must also be linearized for use in dynamic analysis. By
default CAESAR II excludes the effects of friction from the dynamic analysis. If requested CAESAR II can
approximate the friction resistance to movement in the dynamic model by including spring stiffness normal to
the restraint line of action. For a Y restraint with friction, the friction stiffness would be added in the X and Z
directions. The stiffness of these springs is a user-defined function of the friction has calculated in the static
analysis. For a Y restraint with friction, the friction stiffness would be added in the X and Z directions. The
stiffness of these springs is a user-defined function of the friction load calculated in the static analysis. CAESAR II
computes the friction stiffness by multiplying the resultant force on the restraint from the selected static case
results, by the friction coefficient, and by the user-defined Stiffness Factor for Friction. For example, given a
normal force on the restraint from the static analysis is 1000 lb and the friction coefficient (mu) is 0.3; the total
friction load is 300 lb. If the user-defined Stiffness Factor for Friction is 500, then springs having a stiffness of
SQRT(10002 + 3002)*0.3*500=156605 lb./in are inserted into the dynamic model in the two directions
perpendicular to the friction restraint's line of action. Converting friction damping into stiffness is not
mathematically legitimate, but can serve as a good engineering approximation for dynamic friction in a wide
variety of situations. Note that the stiffness of "force" / "length" incorporates the user defined value for "force" but
the length here is always inches.
 Chapter 7 Dynamic Input and Analysis 7-5

Major Steps in Dynamic Input

Developing dynamic input for CAESAR II comprises four basic steps:

1 Specifying the load(s)

2 Modifying the mass and stiffness model
3 Setting the parameters that control the analysis
4 Starting and error checking the analysis
Except for starting the analysis, these steps may occur in any order. Due to the amount of data, which may be
specified, it is best to establish some sort of pattern in defining the input.

There is no reason to specify dynamic loads if only natural frequencies are to be counted or calculated. Harmonic
analysis requires the input of driving frequencies and forces or displacements to define and locate the
sinusoidally varying point loads. Creating the dynamic loads for spectra or time history analysis requires the
most attention by the user. The response spectra or time history profile must be defined, built, or selected. Force
sets must be built for force response spectra and time history analysis. Response spectra /time history (and force
sets) are combined with other data to build the load cases to be analyzed. Finally, additional load cases may be
constructed by combining shock results with static results to check code compliance on occasional stresses.
CAESAR II provides several processors to simplify many of these tasks.

For dynamic analysis, CAESAR II converts each piping element from a continuous beam element between two
nodes to a stiffness between two masses. Additional stiffness is added at the mass (node) points to model
anchors, restraints, hangers, and other supports in the static analysis model. The masses assigned to each node
are one half the sum of all element masses framing into the node. These masses are used as translational inertias
only. Rotational moments of inertia are ignored in the dynamic mass model. (Their inclusion in the analysis
would cause a large increase in solution time without a corresponding improvement in the general accuracy of
the analysis.)

In many instances the mass and stiffness established in the static model will be used without modification in the
dynamic analysis. Some situations, however, can be improved by the deletion of mass points or degrees of
freedom. Usually this occurs in analyses where the “unnecessary” masses are far from the area of interest in the
model or where the “unnecessary” degrees of freedom do not act in the direction of interest. Some piping
systems have supports that are installed to suppress vibration and do not affect the static analysis. These shock
absorbers or snubbers can be entered (if not entered in statics) during the dynamic input as additional stiffness.

The major function of the control parameter list is to set the type of analysis to be performed: calculation of
natural frequencies and mode shapes, harmonic analysis, spectral analysis, or time history. General settings for
the analysis are also defined in the control parameter list such as maximum frequency cutoff and mode
summation methods. It is here, too, that the static configuration for nonlinear restraints (if any) is defined, and
the friction factor for including friction in the dynamic run is entered (the default friction factor is 0.0, which
implies that no friction stiffness will be used). The advanced option allows the user to change the parameters
governing the eigensolution (which does the modal extraction). These parameters should only be altered under
special circumstances.
 7-6 Dynamic Input and Analysis

Dynamic Analysis Input Processor Overview

Entering the Dynamic Analysis Input Menu
The dynamic input module allows the user to specify the dynamic loads imposed on the piping system. To
perform a dynamic analysis, the static model must first be created and error checked through the CAESAR II
Input processor. Usually the model is also run through static analysis before the dynamic analysis begins but
this is not a requirement unless nonlinear supports or hanger selections are included in the model. If nonlinear
supports are present the static analysis must be run and the results made available before the dynamic analysis
can be performed. To enter the dynamics input, the proper job name must be current prior to selecting the
Analysis-Dynamics file options of the Main Menu.

Analysis-Dyna mics Option

Upon entering the dynamic input processor, the following screen appears.

Dyna mic I nput Pr ocessor

 Chapter 7 Dynamic Input and Analysis 7-7

The type of analysis is indicated in the drop down list in the upper left portion of the screen (new jobs default to
Other). Input data is organized in pages according to type. Users can access these pages by selecting their title
tabs. After data is entered, the job can be saved, error checked only, or analyzed, using the menu commands or
toolbars.

A variety of dynamic analysis options are available and require different types of input. To simplify the input
process, the user should select the analysis from the drop list. Once selected, the input screen changes to reflect
the required inputs.

Dyna mic Analysis Type Specification

Available commands during dynamic input processing are:

Button and Name Description

Saves the current input data.

File-Save Input

Checks the input data for errors or inconsistencies.

File-Check
Input
Starts the dynamic analysis.
File-Run
Analysis

Adds a new data line on the current input page (tab page).
Edit-Add Entry
Deletes the selected data lines on the current input page.
Edit-Delete
Entry

Allows the user to generate a file containing a Dynamic Load Factor vs. Frequency
DLF Spectrum Spectrum from a Force vs. Time profile.
Generator

Provides a utility for estimating loads, flows, and other results for gas or liquid relief
Tools-Relief valves.
Load Synthesis

Used to enter data points for user-defined spectra.

Tools-Spectrum
Data Points
 7-8 Dynamic Input and Analysis

Input Overview Based on Analysis Category

The multitude of dynamic analysis types available in CAESAR II can be somewhat intimidating at first. Selection
of Analysis Type from the pull down list displays only those tabs for which input is appropriate. Those items are
discussed by analysis type.

Modal
Specifying the Loads
Modal analysis simply extracts natural frequencies and shapes for the system’s modes of vibration. Therefore no
loadings need to be or may be specified.

Lumped M asses
On this page, the user may add or delete mass from the mass model. Extra mass which may have been ignored as
insignificant in the static model (e.g. a flange pair) can be directly entered here. Also weights modeled as
downward acting concentrated forces, must be added here (CAESAR II does not assume that concentrated forces
are system weights, i.e., forces due to gravity acting on a mass). Masses may also be deleted from the static mass
model; this is the same as deleting degrees-of-freedom. For the most part, mass deletion is a tool used to
economize the analysis. If the system response to some dynamic load is isolated to specific sections of the piping
system, other sections of the system may be removed from the dynamic model by removing their mass. Mass can
also be deleted selectively for any of the three global coordinate directions when deletion of directional degrees-
of-freedom is desired.

For example, if a piping system includes a structural frame which supports the weight (the piping rests on the
structure and is connected to the structure only in the Y direction), these two systems (piping and structure) are
independent of each other in the X and Z directions, so the X and Z mass of the structure can be removed
without affecting the piping model’s results. With the X and Z masses removed, the calculations for the piping
structural model proceed much faster.

Snubbers

Snubber s
 Chapter 7 Dynamic Input and Analysis 7-9

Certain supports, called snubbers, only resist dynamic loading, while allowing static displacement, such as that
due to thermal growth. It is on this page that snubbers can be included in the model. Snubbers must have their
stiffness explicitly entered (they do not default to rigid, since snubbers are typically not as stiff as other types of
restraints).

Note: Snubbers may also be entered in the input processor rather than in the dynamic processor.

DLF/Spectrum Generator - The Spectrum Wizard

Several common shock definitions are based on just a few parameters. Supplying these parameters to the
DLF/Spectrum Generator or Spectrum Wizard will produce these shock definitions. Three sources for seismic
spectra are used - the Uniform Building Code, ASCE 7 and the International Building Code - to build period
versus g load spectra. Two types of force response spectra (dynamic load factor versus frequency) are also built
here - the safety relief valve response spectrum found in B31.1 and a general force response spectrum derived
from the user's own time history.

Clicking the icon in the dynamic analysis input processor opens the Spectrum Wizard.

The following window appears:

\
 7-10 Dynamic Input and Analysis

Each of the five spectra may be selected using the radio buttons on the left side of the window. A default
spectrum name is provided but any valid file name, without blanks, may be entered in its place. Once the input
parameters are entered, the spectrum is built for the analysis by clicking the Generate Spectrum button. To exit
this processor, click Done.

After clicking Generate Spectrum, the processor will display the spectrum data and await a user response -
Save to File, OK or Cancel. A completed shock spectrum is shown below:

Save to File
Saves the spectrum as a file with the same spectrum name in the current folder. Two files are saved for the
seismic spectra, 1 horizontal and 1 vertical distinguished by the suffix H or V at the end of the name. You must
specify a unique spectrum name, or the processor will overwrite any existing files of the same name. It is not
necessary to save the spectrum data to a file to use the data in the current job. Clicking OK does that. Use Save
to File only if you wish to reuse the data in other CAESAR II Dynamic analyses.

OK
After clicking OK, the processor loads the appropriate data in the Spectrum Definitions tab in the Dynamic
Input and moves the data to the dynamic input. Closing the processor, updates the dynamic input; lists the
spectrum definitions and enables reviewing of the generated spectra by clicking the Enter/Edit Spectra Data
button at the top of the dynamic analysis input window.

Cancel
Clicking Cancel on this display quits the display without loading the data into the dynamic input. The specifics
for each spectrum generator are discussed below.
 Chapter 7 Dynamic Input and Analysis 7-11

UBC
Selecting this option creates earthquake spectra horizontal and vertical according to the 1997 Uniform Building
Code (UBC).
 7-12 Dynamic Input and Analysis

Spectrum Name
This is the group name for the pair of seismic shock spectra that will be generated here. A suffix of H and V is
added to indicate the horizontal and vertical spectrum, respectively. Once properly entered, these names are
listed in the Spectrum Definitions tab and can be used to build Spectrum Load Cases. You can also use these
names as data file names if you like. Do not include a space in the spectrum name.

The horizontal design response spectrum will be based on the curve shown in UBC Figure 16-3 (below).
Ts=Cv/2.5Ca & T0=Ts/5
 Chapter 7 Dynamic Input and Analysis 7-13

The vertical spectrum will be set to 50% of I·Ca across the entire period range.

Importance Factor
This is the Seismic Importance Factor, I, as defined in Table 16-K. The calculated spectrum accelerations will
be multiplied by this value to generate the shock spectra. Values range from 1.0 to 1.25 based on the function of
the structure.

Seismic Coefficient Ca
Based on soil profile type and seismic zone factor, this is the "Zero Period Acceleration" for the site as defined in
Table 16-Q. Table values range from 0.06 to 0.66.

Seismic Coefficient Cv
Based on soil profile type and seismic zone factor, this parameter sets the ground acceleration at higher periods
(lower frequencies) for the site as defined in Table 16-R. Table values range from 0.06 to 1.92.
 7-14 Dynamic Input and Analysis

ASCE7
Selecting this option creates earthquake spectra horizontal and vertical according to the ASCE 7 Standard.

Spectrum Name
This is the group name for the pair of seismic shock spectra that will be generated here. A suffix of H and V will
be added to indicate the horizontal and vertical spectrum, respectively. Once entered, these names are listed on
the Spectrum Definitions tab and can be used to build Spectrum Load Cases. You can also use these names as
data file names if you like. Do not include spaces in the spectrum name.

The horizontal design response spectrum will be based on the curve shown in ASCE 7 Figure 9.4.1.2.6 (below).
Ts=SD1/SDS & T0=Ts/5. Above a period of 4 seconds, the horizontal spectrum acceleration changes to.
 Chapter 7 Dynamic Input and Analysis 7-15

The vertical spectrum will be set to 20% of SDS across the entire period range. Neither I nor R affect the
vertical spectrum.

Importance Factor Ip
This is the Occupancy Importance Factor, Ip, as defined in Table 11.5-1, applied in accordance with paragraph
12.9.2. The calculated horizontal spectrum accelerations will be multiplied by this value to generate the shock
spectra. Values range from 1.0 to 1.5 based on the function of the structure

Site Coefficient Fa
Listed in Table 11.4-1, Fa is based on site class (soil profile) and the mapped short period maximum considered
earthquake acceleration (SS). Table values range from 0.8 to 2.5. This value is used with the mapped short
period acceleration to set the response accelerations based on local soil conditions.

Site Coefficient Fv
Listed in Table 11.4-2, Fv is based on site class (soil profile) and the mapped 1-second period maximum
considered earthquake acceleration (S1). Table values range from 0.8 to 3.5. This value is used with the
mapped 1-second period acceleration to set the response accelerations based on local soil conditions.

Mapped MCESRA at Short Period (SS)

This is the mapped ground acceleration (the maximum considered earthquake spectral response acceleration) at
the system location for a structure having a period of 0.2 second and 5% critical damping. Short period
accelerations are defined in the maps located in Chapter 22.

Mapped MCESRA at One Second (S1)

This is the mapped ground acceleration (the maximum considered earthquake spectral response acceleration) at
the system location for a structure having a period of 1 second and 5% critical damping. One-second period
accelerations are defined in the maps located in Chapter 22.

Response Modification Rp
This is the Response Modification Coefficient, Rp, as defined in Table 12.2-1 and applied in accordance with
paragraph 12.9.2.
 7-16 Dynamic Input and Analysis

IBC
Selecting this option creates earthquake spectra horizontal and vertical according to the International Building
Code 2000

Spectrum Name
This is the group name for the pair of seismic shock spectra that will be generated here. A suffix of H and V will
be added to indicate the horizontal and vertical spectrum, respectively. Once properly entered, these names will
be listed in the Spectrum Definitions tab and can be used to build Spectrum Load Cases. You can also use these
names as data file names if you like. Do not include a space in the spectrum name.

The horizontal design response spectrum will be based on the curve shown in IBC 2000 Fig. 1615.1.4 (below).
Ts=SD1/SDS & T0=Ts/5
 Chapter 7 Dynamic Input and Analysis 7-17

The vertical spectrum will be set to 20% of SDS (implied in 1617.1.2) across the entire period range.

Importance Factor
This is the Occupancy Importance Factor, IE, as defined in Section 1616.2 and shown in Table 1604.5. The
calculated spectrum accelerations will be multiplied by this value to generate the shock spectra. Values range
from 1.0 to 1.5 based on the function of the structure.

Site Coefficient Fa
Listed in Table 16.15.1.2(1), Fa is based on site class (soil profile) and the mapped short period maximum
considered earthquake acceleration (SS). Table values range from 0.8 to 2.5. This value is used with the
mapped short period acceleration to set the response accelerations based on local soil conditions.

Site Coefficient Fv
Listed in Table 1615.1.2(2), Fv is based on site class (soil profile) and the mapped 1-second period maximum
considered earthquake acceleration (S1). Table values range from 0.8 to 3.5. This value is used with the
mapped 1-second period acceleration to set the response accelerations based on local soil conditions.

Mapped MCESRA at Short Period (SS)

This is the mapped ground acceleration (the maximum considered earthquake spectral response acceleration) at
the system location for a structure having a period of 0.2 second and 5% critical damping where the probability
of its exceedance over 50 years is 2%. Short period accelerations are defined in the maps of Section 1615.1.

Mapped MCESRA at One Second (S1)

This is the mapped ground acceleration (the maximum considered earthquake spectral response acceleration) at
the system location for a structure having a period of 1 second and 5% critical damping where the probability of
its exceedance over 50 years is 2%. One-second period accelerations are defined in the maps of Section 1615.1.

Response Modification R
This is the Response Modification Coefficient, R, as defined in Table 9.5.2.2. The calculated horizontal
spectrum accelerations will be divided by this value to generate the shock spectra in accordance with Equation
9.5.6.5-3. This term reflects system ductility. Values range from 3.0 to 8.0 for most plant structures and 3.5 for
piping is not atypical.
 7-18 Dynamic Input and Analysis

Mexican Response Spectrum

 Generating a Mexican Response Spectrum:
You can generate a Mexican Response Spectrum using the Mexican Seismic Code. Generate the spectrum from
the Dynamic Input by clicking . Clicking displays the DLF Spectrum Generator dialog. Once the
dialog displays, click CFE Diseno por Sismo and enter the corresponding data on the right, as displayed below.

Spectrum Name
This is the group name for the pair of seismic shock spectra that are generated here. A suffix of H and V is added
to indicate the horizontal and vertical spectrum, respectively. Once entered, the names are listed on the
Spectrum Definitions tab and can be used to build Spectrum Load Cases. You can also use these names as data
file names if you like. Do not include spaces in the spectrum name.

Seismic Zone
Select the correct zone from the menu. There are 4 different choices available: A, B, C and D. For more
information on the choices please refer to the Manual DE Diseno por Sismo (Seismic Design Manual) for
Mexico. Page 1.3.29 of the manual displays a map with the different regions. It would appear that zone D is the
zone of highest seismic activity while zone A is the least active.
 Chapter 7 Dynamic Input and Analysis 7-19

Soil Type
Ground deposits formed exclusively by layers with propagation velocity b0 = 700 m/s or
I Hard Soil:
modulus of rigidity >= 85000 t/m².

Ground deposits with fundamental period of vibration and effective velocity of

II Med. Soil:
propagation which meets the condition: βc Ts + βs Tc> βc Tc

Ground deposits with fundamental period of effective vibration of propagation which

III Soft Soil:
meet the condition: βc Ts + βs Tc < βc Tc

Structural Group
Group A High Degree of Safety

Group B Intermediate Degree of Safety

Group C Low Degree of Safety

Towers and tanks are examples of Group A structures since a high degree of safety is required during their
design. Group B structures require an intermediate safety degree and those belonging to group C require a low
degree of safety.

Orthogonal Increase Factor

Mexican Earthquake Code considers an SRSS type effect on the structure. This value scales up the earthquake
loads in a linear (scalar) fashion. Traditionally this value 1.118 and should always be > 1.0.

Analysis Notes:
 7-20 Dynamic Input and Analysis

As with every other earthquake loading analysis, the object is to compute the shear force at the center of mass of
each vessel element. Once the shear force at each elevation is known, the moments can be accumulated to the
base, leg or lug support.

You should begin the analysis by computing the weights and centroidal distances of all of the vessel elements.
It is very important to model the structure in sections that are appropriate in length. For cylinders, this value is
about 10 or 12 feet ( 3m ). This ensures that the program has enough information to compute the natural period
of vibration with sufficient accuracy.

With the given input data and calculated earthquake weights and natural frequency, PVElite determines the
values from table 3.1 of the Mexican Seismic Code.

The values are:

ao Spectral Coordinate used in computing a

c Spectral Coordinate used in computing a

Ta(s) Period Value used in computing a

Tb(s) Period Value used in computing a

r Exponent used in computing a

Note: For group A structures the values of the spectral ordinates ao, c obtained from table 3.1 are
multiplied by 1.5.

After defining the needed data, click Generate Spectrum to create the spectrum, as shown below.

Note: This spectrum and its associated data are also linked with the remainder of the dynamic input
stream.

B31.1 Appendix II (Safety Valve) Force Response Spectrum

 Chapter 7 Dynamic Input and Analysis 7-21

Selecting this option creates a normalized force response (Dynamic Load Factor) spectrum for loads from a
safety valve discharge into an open system in accordance with the non-mandatory rules of B31.1 Appendix II -
Rules for the Design of Safety Valve Installations.

Spectrum Name
This is the name for the force response spectrum that is generated here. Once entered, this name is listed on the
Spectrum Definitions tab and can be used to build Spectrum Load Cases. You can also use these names as data
file names if you like. Do not include spaces in the spectrum name.

The spectrum is based on the curve shown in B31.1 Appendix II, refer to Fig. II-3-2.

Opening Time (milliseconds)

Enter the opening time of the relief valve.
 7-22 Dynamic Input and Analysis

User Defined Time History Waveform

Selecting this option creates a normalized force response (Dynamic Load Factor) spectrum based on a user-
entered load vs. time history.
 Chapter 7 Dynamic Input and Analysis 7-23

Spectrum Name
This is the name given to the Force Response Spectrum created from the time history load defined here. Once
entered, this name is listed in the Spectrum Definitions tab and is used with the Force Sets to build the
Spectrum Load Cases. You can also use these names as data file names if you like. Do not include spaces in the
spectrum name.

Max. Table Frequency

Enter the maximum frequency desired for the force response spectrum you are about to generate. The upper
limit should fall beyond the peak of the dynamic load factors calculated here. Ideally, the maximum table
frequency will show a constant dynamic load factor of 1.0

Number of Points
Enter the number of frequency/dynamic load factor pairs you want to generated for your data. Twenty is a
typical value.

Enter Pulse Data

Clicking here displays a table where you can define the time history of the event. For example a trapezoid event
defined at time 0 where there is no load, this load ramps up to full load of 1.0 (the load is normalized here) in 80
milliseconds; the load remains constant for the next 920 msec (at the time 1000 msec) and then ramps down to
zero over 250 msec.
 7-24 Dynamic Input and Analysis

Generate Spectrum
Clicking here converts the time history into its equivalent force response spectrum in terms of Dynamic Load
Factor versus frequency (below). The buttons on this window perform the same tasks as those defined at the
start of this section.

Spectrum Definitions

Spectr um Definitions
 Chapter 7 Dynamic Input and Analysis 7-25

Response spectrum table values can be entered directly or built and stored as a file for use by CAESAR II such as
those generated through the DLF Spectrum Generator. Data stored in a file can be referenced by any job run on
the machine.

The Spectrum Wizard also serves this purpose -providing the spectrum definitions and data points. There are two
parts to the shock definition - 1) the statement of the name and type of data and 2) the table of actual spectrum
data points. If the spectrum data is to be read from a file, the second part of the shock definition is not necessary,
instead, the symbol # should precede the spectrum name to indicate that the data comes from a file on the hard
disk. The name of the hard disk file is the name of the shock spectrum without the symbol and without an
extension; it must be located in the same directory as the piping job.

Note The Spectrum Wizard automates common shock definitions, for more information refer to the
DLF/Spectrum Generator - The Spectrum Wizard later in this chapter.

When using a file created by the DLF Spectrum Generator, the user must tell CAESAR II the type of data which
resides in the file. (The actual file only contains a table of data points.) This will always be Frequency vs. Force-
Multiplier data, with linear interpolation) so a typical definition might look like

#TESTFILE FREQ FORCE LIN LIN

This line tells CAESAR II that there is a file containing spectrum table points on the hard disk by the name of
TESTFILE, the table is comprised of frequency versus force multiplier data, and is to be interpolated linearly.

Note The data in this file may alternatively be read in directly from the Spectrum Data Points dialog
box. In this case the "#" should be omitted from the spectrum declaration.

Force Sets

For ce Sets
 7-26 Dynamic Input and Analysis

Force spectrum analyses, such as a relief valve loading, differ from earthquake analyses in that there is no
implicit definition of the load distribution. For example, for earthquakes, the loading is uniform over the entire
structure and proportional to the pipe’s mass. With relief valves (and other point loadings) the load is not
uniformly distributed and is not proportional to the mass. A water hammer load, for example, is proportional to
the speed of sound and the initial velocity of the fluid. Its point of application is at subsequent elbow-elbow
pairs. Force spectrum analyses require more information than the more common earthquake simulations. This
information is the load magnitude, direction, and location. Forces are grouped into like-numbered force sets
when these forces occur together, or need to be manipulated in the analysis together. Typical force set input
might appear as

-3400 Y 35 1
-1250 Y 35 2

where the -3400 and the -1250 are clearly the loads, Y is the direction, 35 is the node number, and the 1 and 2
are the respective load cases. This might indicate two different loading levels of one particular load.

For a skewed load, the force spectrum input might appear as shown below:

-2134 Y 104 1
-2134 X 104 1

This demonstrates multiple components in a single pulse spectrum set. (In the case above the pulse spectrum set
number is 1). These forces obviously belong in the same force set, since different components of a skewed load
always occur together.

Spectrum/Load Cases

Spectr um L oa d Ca ses

Spectrum Load Cases for force spectrum analyses are set up somewhat differently than Spectrum Load Cases for
earthquake analyses. The Spectrum Load Cases for force spectrum runs must link a Force Multiplier spectrum to
a force set.

The load case definition consists of one or more lines on which a spectrum, scale factor (usually 1.0), direction,
and force set number is given.

TESTFILE 1.0 Y 1
 Chapter 7 Dynamic Input and Analysis 7-27

Note The direction specified on this line does not need to be the direction of the load (which is
specified in the force set). This direction is used for labeling and designation of “independent” vs.
“dependent” loadings.

More complex nuances of force spectrum load cases are discussed in the Technical Reference Manual. The
complexity increases as the number of components in the load case goes beyond 1, and as the time history
phenomena being modeled deviates from true impulse type loading.

Static/Dynamic Combinations
This is discussed under Earthquake.

Modifying Mass and Stiffness Model

Lumped masses and snubbers are modified in the same way as described for Modal Analysis.

Control Parameters

Cont r ol Par a meter s

These parameters describe how the analysis is to be conducted. Particular attention should be paid to the modal
summation methodology. Details are discussed in the Technical Reference Manual.

Advanced
These rarely need to be changed by the user. For more information, see the Technical Reference Manual.
 7-28 Dynamic Input and Analysis

Control Parameters

Cont r ol Par a meter s

These parameters describe how the analysis will be conducted. In general, this page would be used to set the
number of modes of vibration to extract by specifying a maximum number, a cutoff frequency, or both. Details
on these entries are discussed in the Technical Reference Manual.

Advanced Parameters Show Screen

These parameters rarely need to be changed by the user. For more information, see the Technical Reference
Manual.
 Chapter 7 Dynamic Input and Analysis 7-29

Harmonic
Specifying the Loads

Har monic Loads - Excitation Fr equency

Harmonic load definition is broken down into two parts: 1) definition of the excitation fraudulency or
frequencies and 2) location and magnitude of the force and/or displacement load(s). Three input tabs are
available for specifying the loads.

Any number of individual frequencies, or frequency ranges (indicated by a starting, ending, and incremental
frequency) may be specified, one to a line. CAESAR II performs a separate analysis for each frequency requested.

Note The number of anticipated load cycles may be entered for each frequency range. If the number
is entered, the load cases are calculated with a fatigue stress type. Otherwise, the load cases are
calculated with an occasional stress type.

Harmonic loads may be specified on the Harmonic Forces or Harmonic Displacements input tabs. These
pages allow the user to enter loads (either force or displacement), direction, phase angle and node(s).

Har monic For ces

Har monic Displacements

 7-30 Dynamic Input and Analysis

Phasing can be important if more than one force or displacement is included. The phase angle (entered in degrees)
relates the timing of one load to another. For example, if two harmonic loads are acting along the same line but at
different nodes, the loads can be directed towards each other (i.e. in opposite directions), which would produce no
net dynamic imbalance on the system, or the loads could be directed in the same direction (i.e. to the right or to
the left together), which would produce a net dynamic imbalance in the system equal to the sum of the two forces.
It is the phase angle, which primarily determines this relationship. The harmonic load data

1500 X 0 10
1500 X 0 105
produces an “in phase,” or same direction dynamic load in the system (1500 lbf. in the X direction and zero
phase at nodes 10 and 105), while

1500 X 0 10
1500 X 180 105
produces an “out of phase,” or opposite direction dynamic load on the system, which will tend to pull the system
apart. The two most common phased loadings are those due to rotating equipment and reciprocating pumps.

Rotating equipment may have an eccentricity, a speed, and a mass. These items must be converted into a
harmonic load that acts on the rotor at the theoretical mass centerline. The magnitude of the harmonic load is
computed from:

Fn = (mass)(speed)2(eccentricity),
where (speed) is the angular velocity of the shaft in cycles per second. This load is applied along both axes
perpendicular to the shaft axis and at a 90º phase shift.

In the case of a reciprocating pump, the pump introduces a pressure wave into the line at some regular interval
that is related to the valving inside the pump and the pump speed. This pressure wave moves away from the
pump at the speed of sound in the fluid. These pressure waves will cause loads at each bend in the piping system.
The load on each subsequent elbow in the system starting from the first elbow will be phase shifted by an
amount that is a function of the distance between the elbows, from the first elbow to the current elbow. It is the
amount of phase shift between elbow-elbow pairs that produces the net unbalanced dynamic load in the piping.
The phase shift, in degrees from the first elbow, is calculated from

phase = [(frequency)(length) / (speed of sound)]360º

where frequency is the frequency of wave introduction at the pump, and length is the distance from the first
elbow to the current elbow under study. The magnitude of the pressure load at each elbow is

Harmonic Force = 0.5 (Pressure variation) (Area)

Note All specified loads are considered to act together (with phasing considerations) at each applied
frequency.

Modifying Mass and Stiffness Model

Lumped masses and snubbers are modified in the same way as described for Modal Analysis.
 Chapter 7 Dynamic Input and Analysis 7-31

Control Parameters

Har monic Contr ol Par a met er s

These parameters describe how the analysis will be conducted. Undamped harmonic analysis may be done by
setting damping to 0.0. Details of these fields are discussed in the Technical Reference Manual.
 7-32 Dynamic Input and Analysis

Earthquake (Spectrum)
Specifying the Loads
Earthquake loads are defined by defining one or more response spectra and applying them in a specified
direction over part or all of the piping system.

Spectr um Definitions
Response spectrum table values can be entered directly or built and stored as a file for use by CAESAR II. Data
stored in a file can be referenced by any job run on the machine. In either case, for a response table to be used by
CAESAR II it must first be defined in the Spectrum Definitions page.

There are two parts to the shock definition - 1) the statement of the name and type of data and 2) the table of
actual spectrum data points. The Spectrum Wizard also serves this purpose -providing the spectrum definitions
and data points. If the spectrum data is to be read from a file, the second part of the shock definition is not
necessary. Spectrum Definition describes the type of data in the spectrum (period or frequency vs. Force
Multiplier/DLF, Acceleration, Velocity, or Displacement) as well as the interpolation method for each axis. In
order to define a spectrum, the user should add a blank line.

Note To indicate that the spectrum is to be read from a file the symbol “#” should immediately
precede the spectrum name. (The name of the file is the name of the spectrum, without the “#” symbol,
and no extension is allowed.) Subsequent references to that spectrum do not use the “#” symbol.

Note The Spectrum Wizard automates common shock definitions, for more information refer to the
DLF/Spectrum Generator - The Spectrum Wizard section later in this chapter.

Button and Name Description

Spectrum If not read in from a file, the data points for a user-entered spectrum may be
Data Points entered by using the Tools - Spectrum Data Points command, selecting the
spectrum name, and entering the data.
 Chapter 7 Dynamic Input and Analysis 7-33

Data Points

CAESAR II also has several shock spectra built in. These spectra may be used as part of a shock load case
without further input.
ELCENTRO - Based on the May 18, 1940 El Centro California earthquake N-S component, and applies to
elastic systems with 5-10% damping. Values are taken from Biggs - Introduction to Structural Dynamics.
1.60H.5 - U. S. Atomic Energy Commission Regulatory Guide 1.60 Rev. 1, Dec. 1973 Horizontal Design
Response Spectra for 0.5% critically damped systems.
1.60H2 - Other AEC horizontal spectra for 2, 5, 7 and 10% critically damped systems.
1.60H5
1.60H7
1.60H10
1.60V.5 - Other AEC vertical spectra for 0.5, 2, 5, 7 and 10% critically damped systems.
1.60V2
1.60V5
1.60V7
1.60V10
UBCSOIL1 - Spectra from Uniform Building Code, 1991, soil type 1
UBCSOIL2 - Spectra from Uniform Building Code, 1991 soil type 2
UBCSOIL3 - Spectra from Uniform Building Code, 1991 soil type 3

Note: Use of the Reg. Guide 1.60 or UBC spectra requires the input of the ZPA (zero period
acceleration) in the Control Parameters. This is the maximum ground acceleration at the site and is
used to scale the spectrum curves. The default ZPA is 0.5g.
 7-34 Dynamic Input and Analysis

Spectrum Load Cases

Spectr um L oa d Ca ses
Load cases consist of simultaneously applied spectra. Each spectrum in the shock case is assigned a direction
and factor. For earthquakes, the “direction” input defines the orientation of the uniform inertial loading
(commonly earthquakes have 3 direction components: X, Y, and Z). The “factor” is used to modify the
magnitude of the shock. For example, the seismic evaluation of a piping system might include two
Spectrum/Time History Load Cases: 1) 1.0 (100%) times of the El Centro spectrum in the X direction and 0.67
(67%) times of the El Centro spectrum in the Y direction and 2) 1.0 in Z and 0.67 in Y.

CAESAR II also supports options for independent support motion earthquakes. Here, parts of the system are
exposed to different shocks. An example is a piping system supported both from ground and building supports.
Because the building will filter the earthquake, supports attached to the building will not be exposed to the same
shock as the supports attached to the ground. In this case two different shock inputs are required, one for the
ground supports, and one for the building supports. To specify an independent support motion shock the node
range that defines a particular group of supports must be given. Additionally, the maximum displacement
(seismic anchor movements) of the support attachment point must be specified.

The example below shows first a typical uniform support earthquake specification, and second a typical
independent support motion earthquake:

* UNIFORM SUPPORT MOTION EARTHQUAKE INPUT

ELCENTRO 1 X
ELCENTRO 1 Z
ELCENTRO .667 Y

* INDEPENDENT SUPPORT MOTION EARTHQUAKE INPUT

HGROUND 1 X 1 100 1 0.25

HGROUND 1 Z 1 100 1 0.25

VGROUND 1 Y 1 100 1 0.167
HBUILDING 1 X 101 300 1 0.36
HBUILDING 1 Z 101 300 1 0.36
 Chapter 7 Dynamic Input and Analysis 7-35

VBUILDING 1 Y 101 300 1 0.24

The uniform support motion earthquake above contains only components of the El Centro earthquake acting
uniformly through all of the supports. There is a 33% reduction in the earthquake’s magnitude in the Y direction.

The independent support motion earthquake above has two different support groups: the 1-100 group, and the
101-300 group. The 1-100 group is exposed to a ground spectrum. The 101-300 group is exposed to a building
spectrum. Different horizontal and vertical components were given for both the ground and the building spectra.
The last values specified are the seismic support movements.

Stress types may be assigned to the spectrum load cases by selecting from the drop list. If the Fatigue stress type
is selected, the user should also enter the number of anticipated load cycles.

Static/Dynamic Combinations

Static/Dyna mic Combinations

Each shock case produces an output report listing displacements, forces, moments, and stresses. For stresses,
however, most piping codes combine the occasional dynamic stresses with the sustained static stresses. It is the
sustained plus occasional stress sum that is compared to the occasional allowable stress. This occasional stress
combination is provided through the Static/Dynamic Combinations page. Each combination references the static
load case number and the dynamic load case number to be combined. The static load case number identifies one
of the static load cases (usually the sustained case) in the static output. In most cases this is static load case 4 if
hanger sizing is included, or load case 2 if it is not. The numbers used to reference the dynamic cases are set by
the order of the dynamic load case input. Factors are specified with the static and dynamic case numbers to
increase or decrease the summed values. Any static/dynamic combination specified will produce an additional
dynamic output report. There can be any number of static or dynamic loads summed together in a single load
case. Each case to be added should be placed on a separate line. Both static only and dynamic only cases can be
manipulated. There is also independent control of the combination method. SRSS (Square Root of the Sum of
the Squares) methods or ABS methods can be used. The default is the ABS method. The input to sum 100% (1.0
times) of static case 2 with 100% (1.0 times) dynamic case 1 appears as follows:

S2 1.0
D1 1.0
 7-36 Dynamic Input and Analysis

Modifying Mass and Stiffness Model

Lumped Masses and Snubbers are modified in the same way as described for Modal Analysis.

Control Parameters

These parameters describe how the analysis is to be conducted. Particular attention should be paid to the modal
summation methodology Details are discussed in the Technical Reference Manual.

Advanced Parameters
These rarely need to be changed by the user. For more information see the Technical Reference Manual.
 Chapter 7 Dynamic Input and Analysis 7-37

Relief Loads (Spectrum)

Specifying the Loads
This method is set up to solve a relief valve loading through Force Spectrum Methodology. In order to analyze a
piping system for a relief valve loading, it is first necessary to estimate the force-time profile for the loading.
This must then be converted to a Force Multiplier (Dynamic Load Factor) spectrum. The applied force then must
be applied in conjunction with this spectrum.

Relief Load Synthesis

Relief Loa d Synthesis

If the user does not know the characteristics of the relief valve load, the Tools-Relief Load Synthesis button
provides a calculation scratch pad based upon a model of a relief valve venting steam or liquid to atmosphere.
This utility can be used to estimate relief valve thrust loads, exit velocities, and pressures which can in turn be
used to estimate the force vs. time profile of the applied load. Once all data is entered, clicking the Calculate
Results button performs the calculations. For more information, see the Technical Reference Manual.

Means of estimating the Force-Time profile for a relief load are shown in the Applications Guide.
 7-38 Dynamic Input and Analysis

Water Hammer/Slug Flow (Spectrum)

Specifying the Load
This method of solving water hammer or slug problems is the force spectrum method as used for relief valve
loadings, except the relief load synthesizer is not necessary. The user estimates a Force-Time profile, then turns
it into a Force Multiplier spectrum, which is then linked to Force sets in the load cases. Means of estimating the
Force-Time profile are shown in the Applications Guide; subsequent steps proceed as described for Relief
Loads.

Pulse Table/DLF Spectrum Generation

This is discussed under Relief Loads.

Spectrum Definitions
This is done in the same way as described under Relief Loads.

Force Sets
These are set up in the same way as described under Relief Loads.

Spectrum Load Cases

Development of the load cases is identical to that discussed under Relief Loads.

Static/Dynamic Combinations
Static/Dynamic combinations are set up as discussed under Earthquake.

Modifying Mass and Stiffness Model

Lumped masses and snubbers are modified in the same way as described for Modal Analysis.
 Chapter 7 Dynamic Input and Analysis 7-39

Time History
Time history analysis is used to solve the dynamic equation of motion for the extracted nodes of vibration, the
results of which are then summed to find the system results.

Specifying The Load

Loadings are specified in terms of Force-Time profiles and force sets. The Force-Time profile is used to define
the load timing; the force set is used to define the load direction and location. Either the profile or the force set
can be used to define the magnitude.

Time History Profile Definitions

Pr ofile Definitions
Time history profiles are defined in a way similar to the definition of response spectra -- the profile must be
given a name, data definitions (which must be Time vs. Force), and interpolation methods. As for response
spectra, the data must also be defined-either directly or by reading in from a file (in which case the file name
must be preceded by the “#” symbol). The profile data may either be either be entered with actual forces, or
normalized to 1.0 (depending on how the force sets are defined).

One force-time profile should be defined for each load which hits the piping system i.e., each independent point
load. The loading case consists of one or more force profiles which may create a staggered loading on the
system.

Force Sets

For ce Sets
 7-40 Dynamic Input and Analysis

Force sets are defined as described for Relief Loads. There should be one or more force set for each load profile
defined.

Note If the force-time profiles were normalized to 1.0, the maximum magnitude of the loads should
be entered here. If the profiles were entered using their actual values, the force set values should be
entered as 1.0.

Time History Load Cases

Time history load cases consist of the multiple linkages of force-time profiles to force sets, as described to Relief
Loads. Only a single load case may be defined for Time History analyses.

Note For Time History analysis, the direction entry is used only for labeling, rather than as an analytic
input value.

Static/Dynamic Combinations
This is discussed under Earthquake.

Modifying Mass and Stiffness Models

Lumped masses and snubbers are modified as described for Modal Analysis.

Control Parameters

Cont r ol Par a meter s

These parameters define how the analyses are to be conducted. Details are discussed in the Technical Reference
Manual.
 Chapter 7 Dynamic Input and Analysis 7-41

Advanced
These rarely need to be changed by the user. For more information see the Technical Reference Manual.
 7-42 Dynamic Input and Analysis

Error Handling and Analyzing the Job

Button Description

Reviews the entries on each page and notifies you of any errors which must be fixed.
Check Input

Performs the error check, and then if no errors are found, performs the analysis. In this
Run Analysis case, the next stop is normally the output review.

Performing the Analysis

Each of the 4 dynamic analysis methods modes, harmonic, spectrum, and Time History has their own procedure
for producing results. All of these analyses, however, start in the same manner. Once you save and check the
dynamic input, CAESAR II follows an execution path similar to that found in Statics. If you activate accounting,
the account number is requested, the ESL is accessed (limited run ESLs are decremented), the element and
system stiffness matrices are assembled, and load vectors are created where appropriate. In Dynamics, the
system mass matrix is also generated. From this point the processing progresses according to the type of analysis
selected. Each of the 4 types of dynamic analyses are discussed below.

Modes
Once dynamic initialization and the basic equation assembly is completed, CAESAR II enters the eigensolver. The
eigensolver calculates the natural frequencies and modes of vibration. Each natural frequency appears on the
screen as it is calculated. The elapsed time of the analysis is also listed with the frequency. The processor
essentially searches for the natural frequencies, starting with the lowest, and continues until the frequency cutoff
is exceeded or the mode count reaches its limit. Both the frequency cutoff and mode cutoff are dynamic analysis
control parameters. The frequencies appear to pop out in a random fashion, perhaps three in rapid succession and
then one more several seconds later. The amount of time to calculate or find these frequencies is a function of
the system size, the grouping of the frequencies and the cutoff settings. Eigensolution may be cancelled at any
time, with the analysis continuing using the mode shapes selected up to that point. After the last frequency is
calculated, CAESAR II uses the Sturm Sequence Check to confirm that no modes were skipped. If the check
fails, you may either return to the dynamic input or continue with the spectral analysis. Sturm Sequence Check
failures are usually satisfied if the frequency cutoff is set to a value greater than the last frequency calculated.
 Chapter 7 Dynamic Input and Analysis 7-43

Eigensolver

After calculations are complete, control is passed to the Dynamic Output Processor. You can review natural
frequencies and mode shapes in text format. You can also display the node shapes in and animated format.

Harmonic
For each forcing frequency listed in the dynamic input, CAESAR II performs a separate analysis. These analyses
are similar to static analyses and take the same amount of time to complete. At the completion of each solution
the forcing frequency, its largest calculated deflection, and the phase angle associated with it are listed on the
screen. The root results for each frequency, and the system deflections, are saved for further processing. Only
twenty frequencies may be carried beyond this point and into the output processor. When all frequencies are
analyzed, CAESAR II presents the frequencies on the screen and allows the user to select those needed (in terms
of frequency and phase angle) for further analysis. This choice can be made after checking deflections at
pertinent nodes for those frequencies.
 7-44 Dynamic Input and Analysis

Selection of Phase Angles

Phased solutions are generated when damping is considered or when the user enters phase angles in the dynamic
input.

For all “phased” harmonic analyses, the user is given a choice of selecting from 18 separate phase angle solutions,
(including the cycle maxima and minima) for each excitation frequency. Each separate phase angle solution
represents a point in time during one complete cycle of the system’s response. The primary difference between a
solution with and without phase angles is when phase angles are entered, there is no way of knowing beforehand
just when the maximum stresses, forces, and displacements are going to occur during the cycle. For this reason,
the displacements and stresses are often checked for a number of points during the cycle for each excitation
frequency. The user must select these points interactively when the harmonic solution ends. There will be a
complete displacement, force, moment, and stress solution for each frequency/phase selected for output. In most
cases the largest displacement solution will represent the largest stress solution, but this is not always guaranteed.
The user is also presented with the option of letting CAESAR II select the frequency/phase pairs offering the largest
displacements on a system basis. The displaced shapes for the remaining frequencies are then processed just like
static cases with local force, moment, and stress calculations. Control then shifts to an output processor identical
to the static output processor. The output processor also provides the user an animated
display of the harmonic results. Users should remember that all harmonic results are amplitudes. For example, if
a harmonic stress is reported as 15200 psi, then the stress due to the dynamic load, which will be superimposed
onto any steady state component of the stress, can be expected to vary between +15200 psi and -15200 psi. The
total stress range due to this particular dynamic loading would be 30400 psi.

Spectrum
The spectrum analysis procedure can be broken down into three tasks - 1) calculate the system’s natural
frequencies, mode shapes, and mass participation factors; 2) using the system frequencies, pull the
corresponding response amplitudes from the spectrum table and calculate the system response for each mode of
vibration; 3) combine the modal responses and directional components of the shock.

The first part of the analysis proceeds exactly as with the modal analysis.

After the natural frequencies are calculated, system displacements, forces, moments, and stresses are calculated
on the modal level and combined. Once all the results are collected, the dynamic analysis output screen appears.
The spectral results may be examined here, and the user may also review the natural frequencies and animated
mode shapes.

Time History
The modal time history analysis follows steps similar to a spectrum analysis. The modes of vibration of the
system are computed, the dynamic equation of motion is solved through numeric integration techniques for each
mode at a number of successive time steps, with the modal results being summed, yielding system responses at
each time step.

The output processor displays one load case (and optionally, one load combination) with the maximum loads
developed throughout the load application. There also are as many “snap-shot” cases as requested by the user.
Chapter 8 Dynamic Output Processing

In This Chapter
Entry into the Processor ........................................................ 8-2
Report Types ......................................................................... 8-4
Notes on Printing or Saving Reports to a File ...................... 8-17
3D/HOOPs Graphics in the Animation Processor ................ 8-18
 8-2 Dynamic Output Processing

Entry into the Processor

The dynamic output processor is accessed directly following completion of the dynamic analysis, or it may be
accessed anytime subsequently from the Main Menu Output options.

Dyna mic Analysis Out put

There are four types of dynamic output results to process:
• Harmonic results
• Frequency/Modal results from a Mode-Only solution (this solution also exists if a spectrum solution was run).
• Spectrum results, from earthquake, waterhammer, and relief valve solutions
• Time History results
Harmonic results are reviewed using the static output processor, which is discussed in Chapter 7 special notes on
reviewing harmonic results are presented later in this chapter. The other 3solution types share the same dynamic
output processor. After entering this processor, the Dynamic Processor screen appears:

Dyna mic Pr ocessor

 Chapter 8 Dynamic Output Processing 8-3

The left-hand column shows the load cases that were analyzed. The top center column shows the reports
available for those load cases. The right-hand column shows General Results, or reports that are not associated
with load cases.

For Spectrum analyses, the load cases listed constitute all of the Spectrum load cases as well as all of the
static/dynamic combinations. For Time History analysis, the listed loads are the “results maxima” case and each
of the “snap-shot” cases for the single Time History load case and each of the static/dynamic combinations.

You can select the reports and the load cases you want to view by highlighting one or more load cases (if
necessary) and simultaneously one or more reports (reports that display in the right-hand column do not require
that the report is highlighted to print). (Select by clicking, CTRL clicking, and SHIFT clicking with the mouse.)
You can send the reports to a printer, print to file, save to file or display.

A number of commands are available from this screen:

Option Description

Opens a different job for output review. You are prompted for the file; Modal/Spectrum
File-Open results are stored in *._s files, while Time History results are stored in *._t files.

Prints the selected reports.

Print

Writes the selected reports to file, in ASCII format.

Save

Allows you to view animated motion. Modem and spectrum results allow animation of
Animate the mode shapes, while time history analysis provides an animated simulation of the
system response to the force-time profile.

Returns to the piping input processor.

Input

Allows you to enter report titles for this group of reports

Title

Provides a summary of each dynamic load case including the spectrum name, scale
View Load factor, direction cosines, and node range.
Cases
Displays the selected reports on the terminal. Each report selected is presented, one at a
View Reports time, for inspection. You may scroll through the reports where necessary. You can also
locate and highlight specific node numbers or results with the FIND (Ctrl-F) command.
To move to the next report click the right-arrow button.

Provides the ability to send output reports directly to Word. This feature is activated
when producing a report and enables the use of all of Word’s formatting (font selection,
margin control, etc.) and printing features. You can append multiple reports to form a
Microsoft® Word final report, by selecting the desired reports, clicking the button, closing Word, selecting
Output the next report to be added, clicking the button again, etc. A table of contents, is
displayed reflecting the cumulatively produced reports.
 8-4 Dynamic Output Processing

Report Types
There are two types of reports available from the dynamic output processor. There are those associated with
specific load cases (the Report Options shown in the center column) and those not associated with specific load
cases (the General Results in the right column).

Note: For Modal analysis, there are no load cases, so the center column is blank

Reports associated with load cases are those associated with the spectral or time history displacement solution.
The Report Options are displacements, reactions, forces, moments and stresses.

Displacements
This report gives the magnitude of the displacement for each load case. For spectral results, due to summing
methodology, all displacement values in this report are positive. For time history analysis, the values are
correctly signed.

The displacement report gives the maximum displacement that is anticipated due to the application of the
dynamic shock. For spectral analysis, note that all of the displacement values are positive. The direction of the
displacement is indeterminate, i.e. there will be a tendency for the system to oscillate due to the potential energy
stored after undergoing some maximum dynamic movement. The displacements printed are relative to the
movement of the earth.

Restraints
This report gives the magnitude of the reactions for each load case. A typical entry is shown as follows:

NODE FX

5 716
649
2X(1)
The first line for each node contains the maximum load that occurred at some time during the dynamic event.
The second line for each node contains the maximum modal contribution to the load, and the third line for each
node tells which mode and loading was responsible for the maximum. This form of the report permits easy
identification of the culprit modes.

The mode identification line is broken down as follows:

2 X (1)
mode load direction (load component)
 Chapter 8 Dynamic Output Processing 8-5

For example, at node 5 the resultant dynamic load due to the shock was 716. The largest modal component (of
the 716) was 649, due to mode 2, and produced by the first X direction component (either the first support
motion set for displacement response spectrum analysis or the first force set for force response spectrum
analysis). This form of dynamic output report allows us to know if there is a problem, and if there is, then which
mode of vibration and load component is the major contributor to the problem.

If the component shows up as a (P), then it was the pseudostatic (seismic anchor movement) contribution of the
loading that resulted in the major component of the response. If the component shows up as an (M), this
indicates that it was the missing mass contribution. A typical restraint report follows:
 8-6 Dynamic Output Processing

Local Forces
This report gives elemental forces and moments in the element local a-b-c coordinate system. The a-b-c
coordinate system is defined as follows:

For straight pipe not connected to an intersection:

“a” is along the element axis (i.e. perpendicular to the pipe cross-section)

“b” is axY, unless a is vertical and then b is along X

“c” is axb.

For bends and elbows, and for each segment end:

“a” is along the element axis (i.e. perpendicular to the pipe cross-section)

“b” is to the plane of the bend

“c” is axb

For intersections, and for each segment framing into the intersection:

“a” is along the element axis (i.e. perpendicular to the pipe cross-section)

“b” is to the plane of the intersection

“c” is axb

Note: X indicates the vector cross product.

Force, moment, and stress reports are similar to restraint reports in that each has the maximum response, followed
by the modal maximum, followed by the modal maximum load identifier. All force/moment reports are setup to
represent the forces and moments that act on the end of the element to keep the element in equilibrium.
Gbool Forces
This report contains informalion identical to that given above for local forces except that it is oriented along the
glob a! X, Y, and Z axes. A typical report follows:

t':jDynamic Output £J

GLOBAL FORCE REPORT, Fo<ces on Elements

(OCC)SHOCK CASE # 1

NODE -----------Fo<ces(lb.)----------- ---------Moments(ft.lb.)--------

TOTALS.... FX FY FZ MX MY MZ
MODE MAX.. FX/Mode FY/Mode FZ/Mode MX/Mode MY/Mode MZ/Mode
..:.J
In the epot below, each item consists of (3) lines of data:
- Line 1 is the total esponse.
- Line 2 is the cont ibution of the max cont ibutoto the total esponse.
- Line 3 details the maximum cont ibuto :
(a) the mode, the load component (di ection and sequence numbe )
(b) missing mass cont ibution and associated load
(c) pseudo-static cont ibution and associated load.

160 172 878 1359 621

89 57 104 457 722 263
9 Y(l) 2 Y(l) 11 Y(l) 2 Y(l) 2 Y(l) Y(l)
10 160 172 524 1168 423
89 57 104 389 643 216
9 Y(l) 2 Y(l) 11 Y(l) 2 Y(l) 2 Y(l) Y(l)

10 147 88 164 524 1168 423

86 57 102 389 643 216
9 Y(l) 2 Y(l) 11 Y(l) 2 Y(l) 2 Y(l) Y(l)
15 147 88 164 951 1094 471
86 57 102 425 659 228 ..:.J
Stresses
The stress report contains axial, bendinmaximwn octahedral, and code stresses as well as in-plane and out-of­
plane stress intensification factors. These reports contain mode, and modal maximum data as well. A typical
report follows:

t':jDynamic Output £J

STRESS REPORT, St esses on Elements

(OCC)SHOCK CASE # 1

NODES ----------St<ess(lb./sq.in.)-----------­ --(lb./sq.in.)-­

TOTALS...AXIAL BENDING TORSION STRS INTNSTY CODE STRS ALLOlJ
MODE MAX.AX/Mode BND/Mode TOR/Mode SHR/Mode SIFI SIFO STRESS/Mode

In the epot below, each item consists of (3) lines of data:

- Line 1 is the total esponse.
- Line 2 is the cont ibution of the max cont ibutoto the total esponse.
- Line 3 details the maximum cont ibuto :
(a) the mode, the load component (di ection and sequence numbe )
(b) missing mass cont ibution and associated load
(c) pseudo-static cont ibution and associated load.

'l\''lt'l\''lt B31.3 -2004, Ap<il 29, 2005

'lt'l\''lt'l\'
NO CODE STRESS CHECK PROCESSED

HIGHEST STRESSES: (lb./sq.in.)

CODE STRESS: 3903.7 @NODE 40
BENDING STRESS: 3795.3 @NODE 40
TORSIONAL STRESS: 872.8 @NODE 40
AXIAL STRESS: 1348.6 @NODE 40
3D MAX INTENSITY: 4279.7 @NODE 40

228 143 372 233

105 76 187 108
2 Y(l) 2 Y(l) 2 Y(l) 2 Y(l) 2 Y(l)
10 523 536 2.21 528
310 22 310 310
Y(l) 2 Y(l) Y(l) 2 Y(l) 2 Y(l)
El
Forces/Stresses
This report is intended to be a brief summary of the forces and code stresses for a particular load case. This
report contains maximwn responses only, the calculated stress, and it's allowable.

t':jDynamic Output £J
 8-10 Dynamic Output Processing

Cumulative Usage
This report is available only when there are one or more Fatigue Stress types present. Only one report is
generated, regardless of the number of Fatigue load cases selected. The report shows, on an element-by-element
basis, the impact of each load case on the total Fatigue allowable, as well as the cumulative impact of all
simultaneously selected load cases. If the total Usage Factor exceeds 1.0; this implies Fatigue failure under that
loading condition.
 Chapter 8 Dynamic Output Processing 8-11

The General Results reports comprise the following and are independent of the load cases selected. They are as
follows:

Mass Participation Factors

This report gives one number for each mode and load direction for each dynamic load case. This value provides
the user with a “feel” for the effect the dynamic loading and the mass had on the particular mode. Neither the
absolute magnitude nor its sign has any significance, only the relationship between values for a single load case
is important.
 8-12

Natural Frequencies
Calculated modal natural frequencies are reported in Hertz and radians per second; period is reported in seconds.

Modes Mass Normalized

A mass normalization procedure is used to compute valued magnitudes for mode shapes. A number of programs
use this normalization procedure, and this report was generated to make it easier for CAESAR II users to compare
their results to other programs’ results.
 Chapter 8 Dynamic Output Processing 8-13

Modes Unity Normalized

This report scales the largest displacement in the mode shape to 1.0, with all other displacements and rotations
scaled accordingly. This mode report is the easiest way to get a “feel” for the shape of the mode.

The example shows two mode shapes from a small job. Users should note that in the first mode the largest single
component is in the Y direction (which we would expect from the earlier participation factor report), and in the
second mode the largest single component is in the Z direction.

Note Unity normalized means that the largest displacement component in the mode is set to 1.0 and
all other displacement values are scaled accordingly.
 8-14

Included Mass Data

The Included Mass Data report displays the percent of the total system mass/force included in the extracted
modes, and the percent of system mass/force included in the missing mass correction (if any) for each of the
individual shocks of each of the dynamic load cases. This value gives an indication of the accuracy of the total
system response captured by the dynamic model, with 100% being the difficult to achieve ideal.

The first 3 items displayed by the report are the Load Case, the Shock Description, and the direction cosines. The
next item, the % Mass Included, shows the percentage of mass active in each of the X, Y, and Z directions.
Following the % Mass Included is the % Force Active. This value is computed by taking the algebraic sum in
each of the global directions, and then applying the SRSS method to each of the three directions. (The sums of
the three directions are added vectorally.) The final column displays the % Force Added. This value is obtained
by taking the % Force Active and subtracting from 100.

Input Listing
This report, which may be displayed or printed, lists the input for the piping model or for the dynamic input.
 Chapter 8 Dynamic Output Processing 8-15

Mass Model
The Mass Model Report shows how CAESAR II lumped masses for the dynamic runs. The mass lumping report
should show a fairly uniform distribution of masses. Large or irregular variations in the values shown should be
investigated. Usually these large values can be reduced by breaking down exceedingly long, straight runs of
pipe.

The mass lumping report shown below is very uniform in distribution and should produce a good dynamic
solution. Note that CAESAR II ignores rotational terms.
 8-16

Boundary Conditions
The Active Boundary Condition Report shows the user how CAESAR II dealt with the nonlinear restraints in
the job. It shows which directional supports were included, which gaps were assumed closed, and just how
friction resistance was modeled.

c Output £J

DYNAMIC BOUNDARY CONDITION REPORT

-------Cosines-------- (lb./in.)
NODE X Y Z STIFFNESS DESCRIPTION

5 0.000 0.000 0.000 RIGID Rigid ANC

30 0.000 LOOO 0.000 LOOOOOOe+OlZ Rigid Y
45 0.000 LOOO 0.000 LOOOOOOe+OlZ Rigid Y
zz 0.000 LOOO 0.000 4.500000e+OOZ Pt::oq Design VSH
zo 0.000 LOOO 0.000 3.400000e+OOZ Pt:oq Design VSH
 Chapter 8 Dynamic Output Processing 8-17

Notes on Printing or Saving Reports to a File

The tabular results brought to the screen may be sent directly to a printer. To print a hard copy of the
reports click FILE-PRINT. To send reports to a file rather than the printer, click File-Save. After initial
selection, the user is presented with a file dialog to select the name of the file. To change the file name
for a new report, the user should select FILE-SAVE AS.

Sends reports to Microsoft Word. The reports display in Microsoft Word where you can access
Microsoft Word’s feature set. All reports that are to be saved in the output file need not be declared at
one time. Subsequent reports sent to the file during the session are appended to the file started in the
session. (These output files are only closed when a new output device, file or printer is defined.) After
closing the report, a table of contents is added.
 8-18

3D/HOOPs Graphics in the Animation Processor

The Animation module allows users to view animated motion of the system for static displacements or various
dynamic movements. The mode and spectrum results, for example, allow animation of the mode shapes, while
time history analysis provides an animated simulation of the system response to the force-time profile.

The animation options can be accessed from the CAESAR II Main Menu, by going to the OUTPUT/ANIMATION and
selecting the appropriate animation type from the sub-menu choices. In addition, the animation processor can
also be activated from each of the individual Static/Dynamic Output Processors by clicking the View Animation
button.

Animation of any type has identical set of buttons and menu choices (similar to ones described in the Piping
Input Graphics Processor) that will be described herein. Any relevant differences will be described below for
each corresponding animation type. Launching the Animation Processor causes the following dialog to display.
 Chapter 8 Dynamic Output Processing 8-19

The piping model is shown in its default state (volume mode, isometric view, orthographic projection). For the
convenience of the user, it can be displayed in any of the defined orthographic views Front/Back, Top/Bottom,
Left/Right, or Isometric by clicking the corresponding buttons. Similar to the Input Processor Graphics, the model
can be interactively rotated, zoomed, or panned. Zoom to Window and Zoom to Selection options are also
available.

Perspective or orthographic projections can also be set. Node numbers can be displayed by clicking the Nodes
button. The desired load case or mode shape can be selected from the corresponding drop down list. The
frequency of the load case associated with the animation is shown at the top of the view plot whenever the Titles
option (available from the Action menu) is activated.

The animated plot menu displays several plot selections. Motion and Volume Motion are the commands to
activate the animation. Motion uses the centerline representation while Volume Motion produces the volume
graphics image. Each of the motion options causes the graphics processor to animate the current plot. If the Node
Numbers button is clicked, the node number text is moved together with the corresponding node. Once the plot is
“moving” on the screen, it may be sped up, slowed down, or stopped using appropriate toolbar button.
After selecting a different load case or mode shape from the drop down list, the motion automatically stops. One
of the motion buttons should be clicked again to activate the model “movement”.

Print Motion option (available from the File menu) prints all of the vibration positions of the current mode. It is
not available for the Time History animation. For clarity purposes, it is recommended to use the single line
(Motion) option to generate the printouts. The Volume Motion option generates a printout which is often too
cluttered to be useful.

Save Animation to File

The animated graphics can be saved to a file by clicking the Create an Animation File button. Alternatively,
this option can be accessed from the dynamic plot menu FILE/SAVE ANIMATION. After activating this option, the
standard Windows Save As dialog will display prompting the user to enter the file name and directory to save
the files. By default the current file name and current data directory will be used. There will be two files created
an *.HTML file and a *.HSF file. To view the saved animation, find the corresponding *.HTML file and double
click on it within Windows Explorer™. The corresponding *.HSF file containing the animation routines will be
displayed. The *.HTML file contains buttons to play or pause the animation. The model can also be viewed at
different orthogonal planes, or returned to the isometric view.

Note The *.HTML is an interactive file.

The first time a CAESAR II created .HTML file is opened with Internet Explorer™ or another internet browser,
the user will receive a message requesting permission to download a control from Tech Soft 3D. The user should
answer “Yes” to allow the download, after which the image will display. Once the model appears, right-clicking
the model will show the available viewing options, such as orbit, pan, zoom, and/or different render modes. The
image can be printed or copied to the clipboard as necessary.
 8-20

Animation of Static Results - Displacements

CAESAR II allows the user to view the piping system as it moves to the displaced position for the basic load
cases. To animate the static results, execute the Options/View Animation menu choice from the Static Output
Menu. Alternatively, clicking View Animation allows the user to view graphic animation of the displacement
solution.

Static animation graphics has all the model projection and motion toolbar options described earlier. The load
case can be selected from the drop down list. The title consists of the load case name followed by the file name
and can be toggled on and off from the Action menu.

The Static Animation processor allows viewing of the single line and volume motion, controls the speed of the
movement, and the animation can be saved to a file as described above.

Note The static animation does not have much physical meaning behind it. This is just a “one-time”
move produced from the CAESAR II calculated displacements (from temperature growth, initial SUS
system sag and/or any other related loads). It is better to use the Deflected Shape button on the
3D/HOOPS Graphics view of the Static Output Processor toolbar. For more information refer to
3D/HOOPS Graphics Tutorial for Static Output Processor, Deflected Shape.
 Chapter 8 Dynamic Output Processing 8-21

Animation of Dynamic Results – Modal/Spectrum

This option allows the user to view the calculated modes of vibration that correspond to particular natural
frequencies of the system. It is available from the Dynamic Output Processor after running the Modal analysis.

After invoking the Modal animation type, the system is displayed in its default state. The animation screen
display the same toolbar options described earlier. Natural frequencies can be selected from the drop down list to
animate the corresponding mode shape. The title shows the natural frequency in Hz followed by the current file
name and the date.

Animated graphics for a particular mode shape (frequency) can be viewed in a single line or volume mode
motion with speed control, and/or saved to an HTML file for later presentation as described above.

Animation of Dynamic Results – Harmonic

During the harmonic analysis, CAESAR II calculates the system response to the excitation frequency. This
response can be animated.

The Harmonics Animation module can be launched from the Harmonic Output Processor by clicking View
Animation. The system displays in its default isometric state. The animation screen displays the same toolbar
options described earlier that allow single line and volume motion as well as speed up and slow down options.
Occasional cases corresponding to the excitation frequencies may be selected from the drop down list. The title
shows the currently selected frequency, file name, and the date. The title may be disabled from the Action menu.

Animated graphics for each load case analyzed can be saved to an HTML file for later presentation.

Animation of Dynamic Results – Time History

The Time History animation module can be launched from the CAESAR II Dynamic Output processor by
clicking View Animation. The system displays in the centerline isometric mode. The model can be rotated,
zoomed, or panned and can be set to different orthographic projections. The current time history time step and
the job name are shown in the title on the top of the graphics view. Due to complexity of the time history
calculations and to decrease the animation time, the animation is only available in centerline mode.

Note: Save Animation to File is not available in the time history animation for the same reason.
 8-22

An additional feature of the Time History animation engine is the Element Viewer. The Element Viewer
displays specific element information for a given time step. After clicking Element Viewer , the Element Info
dialog appears displaying the nodal displacements, forces, moments, code stress, and SIF information provided
for the current element at a current time step. Clicking Next >> or << Previous will change the information to
correspond to the next or previous element in the system for the same time step.

There are several ways to animate the model using the Motion button; clicking Next Step/Previous Step,
jumping to the beginning or the end of the time history animation; or using the Time Slider. Clicking Motion
starts the animation, the current time step is displayed in the title line, and the task bar at the bottom of the
animation graphics view shows the progress. You can increase, decrease or stop the animation speed by clicking
the correct toolbar buttons. Clicking Next Time Step or Previous Time Step while the Element Info dialog is
active will update the dialog information for the current element for the next or previous time step. If the
animation is stopped, this will advance or back space the animation one step. Clicking View Animation again
after stopping the animation will continue the time history motion from the location (the time step) where the
animation was stopped. Clicking the Plot the First Time Step or Plot the Last Time Step brings the animation
to the beginning or the end correspondingly. Dragging the Time Slider to the appropriate time step. The position
of the bar adjusts automatically as the animation progresses or you can click on the slider with the left mouse
button and drag it along the time-line to find the time step you want or to see the displaced shape of the model. If
the Element Info dialog is active, the highlighted element information is updated to correspond to the current
time step.
 Chapter 8 Dynamic Output Processing 8-23

Time Histor y Animation View with Element Viewer Dialog

Clicking the corresponding button can enable the node numbers however, it is recommended to have node
numbering disabled when using the animation processor. As the animated elements move, the node numbers are
redrawn for every position in the system creating a blinking effect that makes it hard to follow the animation.
Chapter 9 Structural Steel Modeler

In This Chapter
Overview of Structural Capability in CAESAR II................ 9-2
3D/HOOPS Graphics ............................................................ 9-7
Sample Input ......................................................................... 9-10
Structural Steel Example #1.................................................. 9-11
Structural Steel Example #2.................................................. 9-18
Structural Steel Example #3.................................................. 9-31
 9-2 Structural Steel Modeler

Overview of Structural Capability in CAESAR II

Str uct ur al Steel Fr a me

 Chapter 9 Structural Steel Modeler 9-3

Start the CAESAR II Structural Element Preprocessor from the Main Menu by first opening an existing (or
new) structural file, and then using the Input-Structural command. The following screen appears:

Input - Str uctur al Steel

Note Structural file names should be limited to eight characters (with no embedded spaces) since
CAESAR II currently is unable to include long file names in piping models. The structural file must
also be located in the same directory as the piping model.

Input is a interactive/batch keyword. This is a method of input most familiar to the finite element/structural
analyst and probably not so familiar to the piping engineer. Those users not already familiar with “keyword
type” input should pay particular attention to the examples, and make liberal use of the help functions ([F1]).

The general input format is:

<keyword>, <parameter #1>, <parameter #2>, ..., <parameter #n>
or
<keyword>, <key1=n1>, <key2 = n2>, ..., <key3 = n3>
For example......
FIX 5 ALL Fixes node 5, all degrees of freedom
SECID = 1,W10X49Defines properties for section #1.
 9-4 Structural Steel Modeler

EDIM 5 10 DY=12-0Define vertical member from 5 to 10.

Exa mple I nput

 Chapter 9 Structural Steel Modeler 9-5

Since many structures have a considerable degree of “repeatability”, there are various forms, options, and
deviations of the above commands to help the user generate large structural models quickly and easily. For the
most part however, and albeit with a little more time and effort, the above method of single element generation is
well suited to most pipers’ needs.

The most commonly used keywords display below:

EDIM Define structural element
FIX Define structural anchor (ALL) or restraint
LOAD Define concentrated forces
UNIF Define uniform loads
SECID Define cross section properties
A full explanation of all keywords is included in the Technical Reference Manual.

To delete a command highlight it and click Edit-Delete Card.

New lines may be created by selecting a keyword command from the menu or from the toolbars.

Certain commands set parameters that remain set for all further element generations. DEFAULT sets the default
section and material ID, ANGLE sets the default element orientation, and BEAMS, BRACES, and COLUMNS
set the default end connection type.

The full AISC database with over 900 cross-sectional shapes is available on a “per-member-name” basis,
additionally the user may define any arbitrary cross sectional shapes. The proper database (either AISC77.BIN,
AISC89.BIN, UK. BIN, AUST90.BIN, SAFRICA.BIN, KOREAN.BIN, or GERM91.BIN) must be selected
using the Configuration/Setup Module before starting the construction of a structural model. Sections may be
selected from a tree structure, grouping sections by type.
 9-6 Structural Steel Modeler

Configur ation/Set up

AISC names should be keyed in exactly as shown in the AISC handbook with the exception that fractions should
be represented as decimals to four decimal places, i.e. the angle L6X3-1/2X1/2 would be entered:
L6X3.5000X0.5000.

Member end connection freedom is a concept used quite frequently in structural analysis that has no real parallel
in piping work. Several of the example problems contain free end connection specifications and should be studied
for details.

Structural models may be run alone, or may be included in piping jobs.

 To run a structural model alone:

1 After selecting a job name, enter the Structural Input processor using Input-Structural from the
Main Menu.
2 Enter the structural steel model and its loading use File-Save to exit model building, do error
checking, and build CAESAR II Execution files if there are no errors. After completing these steps
return to the Main Menu.
3 Start CAESAR II up at the analysis level. Select the load cases to be analyzed. Do not use
CAESAR II’s recommendations unless a weight-concentrated load case is all that is needed.
4 When the analysis level finishes, enter the standard CAESAR II Output Processor. Displacements,
forces, and moments will be available for each structural element.
5 Run the Analysis Program to ensure that the most heavily loaded members still satisfy the code.
 Chapter 9 Structural Steel Modeler 9-7

 To include a structural model (or models) in a piping job:

1 Enter the structural steel input processor as described above.
2 Enter the structural steel model and its loading.
3 Use FILE-SAVE to exit model building, do error checking, and build the CAESAR II Execution files
if there are no errors.
4 Open the Piping Input file. After the piping model has been entered to the user’s satisfaction click
Environment-Include Structural Files.
5 From the Include Structural Files dialog use the Browse button to select the structural files to
include in the piping job.
6 Exit the preprocessor after all structural models have been properly included in the piping job.
7 Perform and error check of the model. Once error checking finishes without a fatal message, run the
entire model. After analysis, the structural elements are included in the piping output processor as
though they were pipe, except that stresses are not computed.

Note: A stand alone AISC Code Check Program is available to verify that forces and moments on
standard structural shapes do not exceed the various allowables as defined by the American Institute of
Steel Construction.
 9-8 Structural Steel Modeler

3D/HOOPS Graphics
The 3D/HOOPS Graphics Engine in the Structural Steel Modeler is mainly used to verify the model
geometry for completeness and accuracy. An Interactive Command Generator allows user-friendly entering and
updating of the element data, along with a graphics view that instantly reflects any changes.

The Structural Steel Modeler 3D Graphics Engine shares the same general capabilities as the Piping Input
Processor's Graphics. It uses the same HOOPS Standard Toolbar that enables users to zoom, orbit, pan, and
several other options among them the ability to switch orthographic views and volume to single line mode.
 Chapter 9 Structural Steel Modeler 9-9

The Structural Steel Graphics Engine can also show or hide the supports and restraints, anchors, the compass,
node numbers, and element lengths. The restraints may also be changed in size relative to the structural elements.

The geometry displays on the screen to the right when the user defines enough information. For example, using
Method 2 - Node/Element Specification Generator, if only NODEs (absolute coordinates of a point in space) are
generated, nothing can be shown. However, when ELEM is defined (to specify a single element between two
points in space), the corresponding graphical element displays. When using Method 1 - Element Definition
EDIM (similar to defining elements in the CAESAR II Piping Input Processor), the corresponding graphical
element displays after the EDIM command is completed. For more information and a comparison of the two
methods, refer to the CAESAR II Technical Reference Manual, Chapter 4 Structural Steel Modeler.

The Structural Steel Command Generator may be resized and/or disabled to allow the graphics to fill the
entire viewing area. It may also be docked on or off the main frame. Once docked off, it can be removed from
the view or closed. To show/hide (open/close) the Structural Steel Commands Generator, click VIEW-INPUT.

Just as the Piping Input Graphics does, the Structural Steel Modeler has a Change Display Option that
enables users to change the default colors for all steel elements and restraints. For more information refer to the
discussion in the Piping Input 3D Graphics Processor.

Note Loads, such as Uniform or Wind, are not available in plot/graphics mode in the Structural Steel
Modeler.

An additional feature of the Structural Steel Modeler is its ability to flip the coordinate system, on the fly. All
relevant user-entered data is also modified to comply with the newly selected coordinate system, either Y-up or
Z-up.
 9-10 Structural Steel Modeler

Sample Input
This section contains three Structural Steel Examples. These examples are presented so that the user can enter
them into the computer from the listed input. This is without question the best way to become familiar with the
structural capability in CAESAR II.
 Chapter 9 Structural Steel Modeler 9-11

Structural Steel Example #1

Determine the stiffness of the structural steel support shown below. Use the estimated “rigid support” piping
loads from the piping analysis to back calculate each stiffness.

Str uct ur al Steel Exa mple #1

 9-12 Structural Steel Modeler

A U-bolt pins the pipe to the top of the channel at node 20. The piping loads output from the pipe stress program
are:
F x= -39.0 lbs.
F y= -1975.0 lbs.
F z= 1350.0 lbs.
Select FILE-NEW from the CAESAR II Main Menu, click the Structural Input radio button and enter a job
name (for example SUPP). Then enter the CAESAR II Structural Steel Processor by selecting option Input-
Structural from the CAESAR II Main Menu. This brings up the blank data entry screen, ready to define the
units.

Input - Str uctur al Steel

 Chapter 9 Structural Steel Modeler 9-13

At this time the user enters the keywords and parameters that define the model input. Input for the example is as
follows:
9-14 Structural Steel Modeler
Chapter 9 Structural Steel Modeler 9-15
 9-16 Structural Steel Modeler

 UNIT ENGLISH.FIL
 MATID 1 30E6 .3 11.6E6 36000. 0.283 ;SPECIFY MATERIAL
 SECID 1 W16X26 ;DEFINE CROSS SECTIONS
 SECID 2 MC8X22.800
 SECID 3 L6X4X0.5000
 EDIM 5 10 DY=144. SECID=1 ;DEFINE ELEMENTS
 EDIM 10 15 DY=72. SECID=1
 EDIM 15 20 DZ=70 SECID=2
 EDIM 20 25 DZ=20 SECID=2
 EDIM 25 10 DZ=-90 DY=-72 SECID=3
 FIX 5 ALL ;SPECIFY SUPPORTS
 ;TRY A PLOT HERE
 LOAD 20 FX=-39 FY=-1975 FZ=1350 ;SPECIFY LOADS

Input Str uct ur al Steel - Sa mple

 Chapter 9 Structural Steel Modeler 9-17

The model can be checked and saved with the File-Save command. At this time the input is checked, and if no
fatal errors are found, the CAESAR II Execution files are written, and the model may be used in a piping
analysis or analyzed by itself. (For the purposes of this example the model will be analyzed by itself.)

When error checking has completed successfully, the user is returned to the CAESAR II Main Menu. When
this is done, the Analysis-Static menu option should be chosen. From this point, structural steel analysis is
performed just like a piping analysis.

Note: Don't forget to include F1 in the SUS load case.

Output from a structural analysis is comprised of displacements, forces, and moments.

The desired results from the analysis of SUPP are the displacements at node 20 of:
x = -9.63 in.
y = -0.44 in.
z = 0.88 in.
These displacements are excessive for a support which is to be assumed rigid in another analysis. The
translational stiffness for the support can be computed as follows:
Kx = 39.0 lb. / 9.63 in. = 4.05 lb./in
Ky = 1975.0 lb. / 0.44 in. = 4488.64 lb./in.
•Kz= 1350.0 lb. / 0.88 in. = 1534.09 lb./in.
 9-18 Structural Steel Modeler

Structural Steel Example #2

A support must be designed to limit the loads on the waste heat boiler’s flue gas nozzle connection. The
maximum allowable loads on the nozzle are:
Fshear = 500 lb. Faxial = 1500 lb.
Mbending = 5000 ft. lb. Mtorsion = 10000 ft. lb.
Check the piping and structure shown in the following four figures:

Str uct ur al Steel Exa mple #2

Piping Dimensions
 Chapter 9 Structural Steel Modeler 9-19

Str uct ur e Nodes

Str uct ur e Dimensions

 9-20 Structural Steel Modeler

Select a job name (for example SUPP2) and enter the structural input processor as described earlier. The
structural input screen appears:

Input - Str uctur al Steel

 Chapter 9 Structural Steel Modeler 9-21

At this time the user enters the keywords and parameters (using menu options and/or toolbars) that defines the
model input, and adds them to the file using the Edit-Add command. Input for the example is as follows:
 UNIT ENGLISH.FIL
 SECID 1 W24X104 ;DEF INE SECTIONS
 SECID 2 W18X50
 MATID 1 YM=29E6 POIS=0.3 G=11.6E6 DENS=0.283 ;DEFINE MATERIALS
 ANGLE=90 ;COLUMN ORIENTATION
 EDIM 230 235 DY=10- ;VERTICAL COLUMNS
 EDIM 235 220 DY=13-10
 EDIM 200 205 DY=10-
 EDIM 205 210 DY=13-10
 EDIM 245 250 DX=8.392- DY=10- ;SLO PED COLUMNS
 EDIM 260 255 DX=8.392- DY=10-
 EDIM 250 220 DX=11.608- DY=13-10
 EDIM 255 210 DX=11.608- DY=13-10
DEFAULT SECID=2;MAKE BEAMS DEFAULT SECTION
EDIM 235 240 DZ=-2.5-
EDIM 240 205 DZ=-2.5-
EDIM 220 215 DZ=-2.5-
EDIM 215 210 DZ= -2.5-
EDIM 250 255 DZ=-5-
;THE FINAL SET OF HORIZONTAL BEAMS ALONG THE X AXIS HAVE A STANDARD
;STRONG AXIS ORIENTATION
ANGLE=0.0
EDIM 250 235 DX=11.608-
EDIM 255 205 DX=11.608-
;ANCHOR THE BASE NODES
FIX 245 ALL
FIX 260 ALL
FIX 230 ALL
FIX 200 ALL
At any time during input the user can generate plots of the model by executing OPERATIONS-PLOT. Once the user is
satisfied that the model is correct, exiting with File-Save command checks and saves the model. If no fatal errors
are found, then the CAESAR II Execution files are written. The model may now be used in a piping analyses or
analyzed by itself. (For the purposes of this example the model will be analyzed with a piping model.)
 9-22 Structural Steel Modeler

When error checking has completed successfully, the user is returned to the CAESAR II Main Menu. The user
should change the jobname to the name of the piping input filename (PIPE2 for this example) and enter the input
for the piping system to be analyzed.
Chapter 9 Structural Steel Modeler 9-23
 9-24

The input for this job is shown below:

c OutputProcessing R EJ

Input Echo

PIPE DATA

F<om 5 To 10 DX= 6-417 ft­

PIPE
Dia= 30-000 in- Wall= -375 in- Insul= -000 in-
GENERAL
Tl= 850 F T2= 70 F T3= 70 F Pl= -0000 lb-/sq-in-
Mat= (5)INT CHROMEMOLY 5%-9% E= 27,400,000 lb-/sq-in- v = -289
Density= -2894 lb-/cu-in-
BEND at "TO" end
Radius= 45-000 in- (LONG) Bend Angle= 90-000 Angle/Node @1= 45-00 9
Angle/Node @2= -00 8
RESTRAINTS
Node 5 ANC
ALLOWABLE STRESSES
B3L3 (2004) Sc= 20,000 lb-/sq-in- Shl= 18,000 lb-/sq-in-

F<om 10 To 15 DY= -8-000 ft-

Ft:om. 15 To 115 DX= -2-500 ft-

RIGID Weight= -00 lb-
RESTRAINTS
Node 115 X Cnode 215
Node 115 2 Cnode 215
Node 120 X Cnode 240
Node 120 2 Cnode 240

F<om 15 To 20 DY= -13-833 ft-

F<om 20 To 120 DX= -2-500 ft­

RIGID Weight= -00 lb-
 Chapter 9 Structural Steel Modeler 9-25

 To connect the pipe to the structure, follow these procedures:

1 The user must tell CAESAR II the name of the structural steel file to include. From the Input
Spreadsheet select the Environment-Include Structural Files Menu option. The Include
Structural Files Dialog appears.
2 Enter the name of the structural steel model to be included (SUPP2), by typing or browsing for it.
3 Define the connectivity between pipe and structural nodes using restraints with connecting nodes.
For the example problem, the node 115 in the pipe model should be tied to node 215 in the
 9-26 Structural Steel Modeler

structural model in the X and Z directions similarly; node 120 in the pipe model should be tied to
node 240 in the structural model. These connecting nodes may be defined from the piping spread-
sheet on any convenient element. Auxiliary field input for these two connections is shown as
follows:

Restraint Auxiliary Data

If the pipe and structure do not plot properly relative to one-another then either:
a) The connecting nodes were not defined correctly.
b) The CONNECT_GEOMETRY_THRU_CNODES directive was not set to YES in the
Configuration/Setup module.
 Chapter 9 Structural Steel Modeler 9-27

The properly plotted pipe and structure is shown below:

Str uct ur al Steel Exa mple #2 Plot

Once the pipe and structure are properly plotted relative to one-another, the piping input processor can be exited
and error checking performed. The error checker includes the pipe and structure together dwing checking. The
execution files that are written a!so include the structural data. In the output the pipe and structure are also plotted
together and can only be separated via the plot RANGE command.

• Reports Templates Dialog £J

+ + H bl .;, 6'-.f

CAESAR II Ver.4, 99, 0, (Build 050316) Date:JUN 28, 2005 Time: 9:43
Job: C:\CAESAR\PIPE2
Licensed To: CDADE ESL DEALER/EVAL COPY ·· ID 10001
RESTRAINTS REPORT: Loads Dn Restraints
CASE 1 (SUS) W•T1

NODE FX FY FZ MX MY MZ
lb. lb. lb. lt.lb. lt.lb. lt.lb.

5 ·49242 58856 ·2200 19983 ·23259 212675 Rigid ANC

30 0 ·77547 0 0 0 0 Rigid +Y
35 0 0 0 0 0 0 Rigid +Y
65 9110 524 ·2338 ·253515 436949 7294 Rigid ANC
115 0 0 ·854 0 0 0 RigidZ
115 57479 0 0 0 0 0 Rigid X
120 0 0 5391 0 0 0 RigidZ
120 ·17346 0 0 0 0 0 Rigid X
200 ·3792 0 0 0 0 0 Rigid X
200 0 ·36744 0 0 0 0 RigidY
200 0 0 1979 0 0 0 RigidZ
200 0 0 0 10554 0 0 RigidRX
200 0 0 0 0 ·B 0 RigidRY
200 0 0 0 0 0 13511 RigidRZ
230 ·4820 0 0 0 0 0 Rigid X
230 0 ·34476 0 0 0 0 RigidY
230 0 0 1601 0 0 0 RigidZ
230 0 0 0 9299 0 0 RigidRX
230 0 0 0 0 4 0 RigidRY
230 0 0 0 0 0 20040 RigidRZ
245 22683 0 0 0 0 0 Rigid X
245 0 27007 0 0 0 0 RigidY
245 0 0 741 0 0 0 RigidZ
245 0 0 0 5692 0 0 RigidRX
245 0 0 0 0 ·4778 0 RigidRY
245 0 0 0 0 0 1364 RigidRZ
260 26062 0 0 0 0 0 Rigid X
260 0 30887 0 0 0 0 RigidY
260 0 0 216 0 0 0 RigidZ
260 0 0 0 3992 0 0 RigidRX
260 0 0 0 0 ·3350 0 RigidRY
260 0 0 0 0 0 784 RigidRZ
 Chapter 9 Structural Steel Modeler 9-29

The loads on the anchor at 5 are grossly excessive. The structural steel frame and pipe support structure as
shown are not satisfactory. Some displaced shape plots from the analysis are shown in the next figure:

Plot Showing Displacement

In this example, displacement of the structure is small relative to the displacement of the pipe. The pipe is
thermally expanding out away from the boiler nozzle and down, away from the boiler nozzle.

Plot Showing Displacement

Using the RANGE command the structure is plotted without the pipe. The displaced shape of the structure
shows that the pipe is pulling the structure in the positive X direction at the top support and pushing the structure
in the negative X direction at the bottom support. These displacements will only result in higher loads on the
boiler nozzle. The vertical location of the structural supports should be studied more closely.

Perhaps vertical springs at 30 and 35 would help, along with a repositioning of the structural supports vertically,
i.e. the support at 120 should be moved down so that its line of action in the X direction more closely coincides
with the center line of the pipe between 25 and 40.
 Chapter 9 Structural Steel Modeler 9-31

Structural Steel Example #3

Estimate the X, Y, and Z stiffness of the structure at the point 1000. (Note that, in general, the stiffness of a
three-dimensional structure, condensed down to the stiffness of a single point, must be represented by a 6 6
stiffness matrix. As a first estimate, only the on-diagonal, translational stiffnesses are often estimated, as is being
done here.)

Str uct ur al Steel Exa mple #3

Select a job name (for example SUPP3) and enter the structmal input processor as described earlier. The
structmal input screen appears.

At this time the user enters the keywords and parameters (using menu commands and/or toolbars) that define the
model input. Input for the example is shown below:

!":1CAESAR StructuralModeler - SUPP3.str 111113

; Eile !;.dit :!_iew Insert Corrll'lands !::!elp
iD i) Q
i .!ES. I:l i 10 .!'. ::..;: kJ 1 A A \. .!"!. f N :::::;
i _f,}-l i . 0.
Q tX I ! I1b
Card Stack f.'loi:J

8 Card Stack
E1 UNIT ENGLISH.Fil
E1 MATID I
El SECID=I W12X65
El SECID2 WIOX22
El ANGLE=90
E1 EDIM 5, 10
E1 EDIM 25, 30
E1 EDIM 45, 50
E1 EDIM 65, 70
E1 ANGLE=O
El RELEASE Tt£ BEAM MC
El DEFAULT 2,0
E1 Beams FREE
E1 EDIM 10, 30
E1 EDIM 30, 50
E1 EDIM 50, 70
E1 EDIM 70, 10
El Beams FIX
E1 EDIM 20, 1000
E1 EDIM 40, 1000
E1 FIX 5 All
El FIX 25 ALL
El FIX 45 ALL
El FIX 65 ALL
LOAD 1000

Card stack IList Options I

Ready

EJ: mplc IDput

 Chapter 9 Structural Steel Modeler 9-33

At any time during input the user can generate plots of the model executing Operations-Plot. Once the user is
satisfied that the model has been entered properly, the model can be checked and saved with the File-Save
command. If no fatal errors are found, then the CAESAR II execution files are written. The model may now be
used in a piping analysis or analyzed by itself. (For the purposes of this example the model will be analyzed by
itself.)

The structural input processor generates a number of lists to be used for documentation and checking. Click the
List Options tab for various list types.

Of particular interest in this model is the element orientation data that shows that the columns strong axis was
indeed rotated 90 degrees. Also the free-end-connection lists show that the specification entered for the beams
produced the desired results.

Elements a nd Pr oper ties

!":jCAESAR Structural Modeler 1111EJ
; file dit l!jew Insert Commands !::!elp

l D e liiil :ft.ID Iii I§ GQ J

IlJ i 10 ":;. :;..!: i A A )f .R. tN =:; G Ei,iJ 5I lliill
l Iii 18 tI!:i! tD 11:J () • l .R •·o;:. 0 + -+ !! :·
Lrst Options f H3 ,-
! N0DA-L--
FIXITI
E-S-------------------------- L------- L-------------------------------
Index NODE FIX-X FIX-Y FIX-Z ROT-X ROT-Y ROT-Z
(' Nodes

r Elements

r- Restraints

(' Loads

r Orientations

(' U nlorm Loads

(' Free Ends

(' Materiai iO's

r Section ID's

r Status

(' ALL

Card Stack list Options

For Help,press Fl

Nodal Fmitic•
 Chapter 9 Structural Steel Modeler 9-35

!":'jCAESAR Structural Modeler I!I EJ

; file dit l!jew Insert Commands !::!elp
l D e liiil !D iil @l ? GQ J
IlJ kJ l>o :;..!: l A A )f .R. tN =:; G Ei,iJ 5I lliill
l lllil 18 I @ til I!:J I () • l .R ··a;:. () + -+ ,, II; :·
lost Optoons !
f H3 NODAL LOADS
Index NODE FOR-X FOR-Y FOR-Z ltOU-X umt-Y UOJ.l-Z
(' Nodes 1 1000 10000 10000 10000 0 0 0

r Elements

(' Restran
i ts

r- Loads

r Orientations

(' U nlorm Loads

(' Free Ends

(' Materiaii O's

r Section ID's

r Status

(' AUL

Card Stack list Options

For Help,press Fl

Nodal Loads
Element M ater ial Data
 Chapter 9 Structural Steel Modeler 9-37

Element Geomet r y Data

Element of Or ient ation Dat a
 Chapter 9 Structural Steel Modeler 9-39

r CAESAR StructuralModeler 1!1EJ

i Elle dlt '!jew Insert Commonds t!elp

lost Optoons f!l£J 'FROll' ELEMEIIT EIID

-----TRAIISL----- ----BEIIDIIIG----- -----TRAIISL----- ----BEIIDIIIG-----
r Nodes Index FROM TO AX STR WEAK TOR STR WEAK AX STR WEAK TOR STR WEAK
From To 1 10 30 FIX FIX FIX FREE FREE FREE FIX FIX FIX FREE FREE FREE
r
I
lements
E 15 H FIX FIX FIX FREE FREE FREE FIX FIX FIX FREE FREE FREE
3 30 50 FIX FIX FIX FREE FREE FREE FIX FIX FIX FREE FREE FREE
r Restooints
35 55 FIX FIX FIX FREE FREE FREE FIX FIX FIX FREE FREE FREE
r Loads 5 40 60 FIX FIX FIX FREE FREE FREE FIX FIX FIX FREE FREE FREE
6 50 70 FIX FIX FIX FREE FREE FREE FIX FIX FIX FREE FREE FREE
r Ooienalilons 7 55 75 FIX FIX FIX FREE FREE FREE FIX FIX FIX FREE FREE FREE
8 60 80 FIX FIX FIX FREE FREE FREE FIX FIX FIX FREE FREE FREE
Loods
9 70 10 FIX FIX FIX FREE FREE FREE FIX FIX FIX FREE FREE FREE
(o' Foee Ends
10 75 15 FIX FIX FIX FREE FREE FREE FIX FIX FIX FREE FREE FREE
11 80 20 FIX FIX FIX FREE FREE FREE FIX FIX FIX FREE FREE FREE
r Maleoa
i iiD's 12 20 1000 FIX FIX FIX FREE FREE FREE FIX FIX FIX FREE FREE FREE
13 40 1000 FIX FIX FIX FREE FREE FREE FIX FIX FIX FREE FREE FREE
r SectionID's

r Stotus

r ALL

Card Stack List Options I

For Help1 press Fl
When error checking has completed successfully, the user is returned to the CAESAR II Main Menu. The user
should change the current jobname to that of the structural filename. When this is done the Analysis-Static menu
option should be selected. From this point structural steel analysis is performed just like a piping analysis.
Output from a structural analysis is comprised of displacements, forces, and moments.

The displacement and force report for the (Force Only) load case follows. Note that the structure is stiffer in the
X direction, even though the Z dimension is greater due to the orientation of the columns. The Force/Moment
report is particularly interesting given that all of the beams have pinned ends. Note that most of the beams carry
no load. This is because the transfer of the load to the beams in this model is due to rotations at the column ends,
and not translations. (Cross-braces would eliminate this problem and cause the beams to pick up more of the
load.) The 1000 end of the elements from 20-1000 and from 40-1000 carries a moment because it is not a pinned
end connection. 1000 is just a point at midspan for the application of the load.
Chapter 9 Structural Steel Modeler 9-41

• Reports Templates Dialog £J

+ + H bl .;, 6'-.f

CAESAR II Ver.4, 99, 0, (Build 050316) Date:JUL 25, 2005 Time: 10:0
Job: C:\CAESAR\SUPP3
Licensed To: CDADE ESL DEALER/EVAL COPY ·· ID 10001
GLOBAL ELEMENT FORCES REPORT: Forces on Elements
CASE 2 (SUS) F1

FY

·2503 ·5000 ·5000 ·179999.9 0.0 90009.3

10 2503 5000 5000 120000.0 0.0
10 ·2492 ·5000 ·5000 ·120000.0 0.0 59979.0
2492 5000 5000 60000.0 0.0

·2507 ·5000 ·5000 ·60000.0 0.0

20 2507 5000 5000 0.0 0.0 ·0.0

25 ·2503 ·5000 ·5000 ·179999.9 0.0 90009.3

30 2503 5000 5000 120000.0 0.0

30 ·2492 ·5000 ·5000 ·120000.0 0.0 59979.0

2492 5000 5000 60000.0 0.0

·2507 ·5000 ·5000 ·60000.0 0.0

40 2507 5000 5000 0.0 0.0 ·0.0

45 ·2497 0.0 0.0

50 2497 ·0 ·0.0 0.0

50 0.0 0.0 60020.6

250B ·0 ·0.0 0.0

·2493 0.0 0.0

60 2493 ·0 0.0 0.0 0.0
·2497 0.0 0.0
70 2497 ·0 ·0.0 0.0
70 0.0 0.0 60020.6
75 250B ·0 ·0.0 0.0
75 ·2493 0.0 0.0
2493 ·0 ·0.0 0.0 0.0
10 0.0 0.0 0.0
30 0.0 0.0 0.0 t.:.J :
:d
• Reports Templates Dialog £J
+ + H Q.;,"-f
CAESAR II Ver.4, 99, 0, (Build 050316) Date:JUL 25, 2005 Time: 10:0
Job: C:\CAESAR\SUPP3
Licensed To: COADE ESL DEALER/EVAL COPY .. ID 10001
GLOBAL ELEMENT FORCES REPORT: Forces on Elements
CASE 2 (SUS) F1

FY

10 0.0 0.0 0.0

30 0.0 0.0 0.0

0.0 0.0 0.0

·0 0.0 0.0 0.0

30 ·0 ·0 0.0 0.0 0.0

50 11 0.0 0.0 0.0

·0 ·0 0.0 0.0 0.0

·15 0.0 0.0 0.0
40 2493 ·0 ·0 0.0 0.0 0.0
60 ·2493 0.0 0.0 0.0

50 ·0 0.0 0.0 0.0

70 0.0 0.0 0.0

·0 0.0 0.0 0.0

75 0.0 0.0 0.0

60 ·0 ·0 0.0 0.0 0.0

0.0 0.0 0.0
70 11 0.0 0.0 0.0
10 ·0 ·0 0.0 0.0 0.0
75 ·15 0.0 0.0 0.0
·0 ·0 0.0 0.0 0.0

·2493 0.0 0.0 0.0

20 2493 ·0 ·0 0.0 0.0 0.0

20 ·5000 ·5000 ·5000 0.0 0.0 0.0

1000 5000 5000 5000 ·35000.0 35000.0 0.0
40
1000
·5000
5000
·5000
5000
·5000 0.0 0.0
5000 35000.0 ·35000.0
0.0
0.0 [:j ,
Chapter 10 Buried Pipe Modeling

In This Chapter
Modeler Overview ................................................................ 10-2
Using the Underground Pipe Modeler .................................. 10-3
Notes on the Soil Model........................................................ 10-9
Recommended Procedures .................................................... 10-17
Example ................................................................................ 10-18
Modeler Overview
The CAESAR II Underground Pipe Modeler is designed to simplify user input of buried pipe data. This
processor will take an unburied layout and bury it. The Modeler performs the following functions for users:
 Allows the direct input of soil properties. The Modeler contains the equations for buried pipe
stiffnesses that are outlined later in this chapter. These equations are used to calculate first the
stiffnesses on a per length of pipe basis, and then generate the restraints that simulate the discrete
buried pipe restraint.
 Breaks down straight and curved lengths of pipe to locate soil restraints. CAESAR II uses a zone
concept to break down straight and curved sections. Where transverse bearing is a concern for
example near bends, tees, and entry/exit points soil restraints are located in close proximity.
 Breaks down straight and curved pipe so that when axial loads dominate, soil restraints are spaced
far apart.
 Allows the direct input of user-defined soil stiffnesses on a per length of pipe basis. Input
parameters include axial, transverse, upward, and downward stiffnesses, as well as ultimate loads.
You can specify user-defined stiffnesses separately, or in conjunction with CAESAR II’s
automatically generated soil stiffnesses.
 Chapter10

Using the Underground Pipe Modeler

You can start the Buried Pipe Modeler by selecting an existing unburied job, and then choosing Input-
Underground from the CAESAR II Main Menu. The Modeler is designed to read a standard CAESAR II
Input Data File that describes the basic layout of the piping system as if it was not buried. From this basic input
CAESAR II creates a second input data file that contains the buried pipe model. This second input file typically
contains a much larger number of elements and restraints than the first job. The first job that serves as the “pat-
tern” is termed the original job. The second file that contains the element mesh refinement and the buried pipe
restraints is termed the buried job. CAESAR II names the buried job by appending a “B” to the name of the
original job.

Note The original job must already exist and serves as the pattern for the buried pipe model building.
The modeler removes any restraints in the buried section during the process of creating the buried
model. Any additional restraints in the buried section can be entered in the resulting buried model. The
buried job, if it exists, is overwritten by the successful generation of a buried pipe model. It is the
buried job that is eventually run to compute displacements and stresses.

When the Buried Pipe Modeler is initially started, the following screen appears:
This spreadsheet is used to enter the buried element descriptions for the job. The buried element description
spreadsheet serves several functions:
• allows you to define which part of the piping system is buried.
• allows you to define mesh spacing at specific element ends.
• allows the input of user-defined soil stiffnesses
Typical buried pipe displacements are considerably different than similar above ground displacements. Buried
pipe deforms laterally in areas immediately adjacent to changes in directions (i.e. bends and tees). In areas far
removed from bends and tees the deformation is primarily axial. The optimal size of an element (i.e. the distance
between a single FROM and a TO node) is very dependent on which of these deformation patterns is to be
modeled. Not having a continuous support model, CAESAR II or the user, must locate additional point supports
along a line to simulate this continuous support. So for a given stiffness per unit length, either many, closely
spaced, low stiffness supports are added or a few, distant and high stiffness supports are added. Where the
deformation is “lateral”, smaller elements are needed to properly distribute the forces from the pipe to the soil.
The length over which the pipe deflects laterally is termed the “lateral bearing length” and can be calculated by
the equation:
Lb = 0.75( ) [4EI/Ktr] 0.25

Where:
E = Pipe modulus of elasticity
I = Pipe moment of inertia
Ktr = Transverse soil stiffness on a per length basis, (defined later)

CAESAR II places three elements in the vicinity of this bearing span to properly model the local load distribution.
The bearing span lengths in a piping system are called the Zone 1 lengths. The axial displacement lengths in a
piping system are called the Zone 3 lengths, and the intermediate lengths in a piping system are called the Zone
2 lengths. Zone 3 element lengths (to properly transmit axial loads) are computed by 100*Do, where Do is the
outside diameter of the piping. The Zone 2 mesh is comprised of up to 4 elements of increasing length; starting
at 1.5 times the length of a Zone 1 element at its Zone 1 end, and progressing in equal increments to the last
which is 50*Do long at the Zone 3 end. A typical piping system, and how CAESAR II views this “element
breakdown” or “mesh distribution” is illustrated below. All pipe density is set to zero for all pipe identified as
buried, so that deadweight causes no bending around these point supports.
 Chapter10

Zone Definitions

Note: CAESAR II automatically puts a Zone 1 mesh gradient at each side of the pipe framing into an
elbow. It is your responsibility to tell CAESAR II where the other Zone 1 areas are located in the piping
system.
A critical part of the modeling of an underground piping system is the proper definition of Zone 1or lateral
bearing regions. These bearing regions primarily occur:
 On either side of a change in direction.
 For all pipes framing into an intersection.
 At points where the pipe enters or leaves the soil.
 Using any user-defined node within or near Zone 1.
The left side of the Buried Element Description Spreadsheet displays below:

Bur ied Element Descr iption Spr ea dsheet

 Chapter10

There are 13 columns in this spreadsheet. The eight not shown above carry the user-defined soil stiffnesses and
ultimate loads. The first two columns contain element node numbers for each piping element included in the
original system. The next three columns Soil Model No, From End Mesh Type, To End Mesh Type, are
discussed in detail below:
Soil Model No.—This column is used to define which of the elements in the model are buried. A nonzero entry
in this column implies that the associated element is buried. A 1 in this column implies that the user wishes to
enter user defined stiffnesses, on a per length of pipe basis, at this point in the model. These stiffnesses must
follow in column numbers 6 through 13. Any number greater than 1 in the SOIL MODEL NO. column points
to a CAESAR II soil restraint model generated using the equations outlined later under Soil Models from user
entered soil data.
From/ To End Mesh Type—A check in either of these columns implies that a Zone 1 should be placed at the
corresponding element end. For example:
FROM TO SOIL FROM TO
NODE NODE MODEL MESH MESH
5 10 2 

The element 5 to 10 is buried. CAESAR II will generate the soil stiffnesses from user-defined soil dataset #2, and
the node 5 end will have a fine mesh so that lateral bearing will be properly modeled. Since CAESAR II
automatically places lateral bearing meshes adjacent to all buried elbows, the user must only be concerned with
the identification of buried tees and points of soil entry or exit. The figure below is illustrative:
Please note the following:
 The user has separated the node numbers in the original piping system by varying the incremental
range by 20. This is so CAESAR II can maintain the sequence of node numbers for the added nodes.
This is not required but is useful in comprehending results. For very long runs, node increments of
100 may be helpful.
 From/To Lateral Bearing mesh specifications are not needed for nodes 30, 110 and 130, since
CAESAR II places lateral bearing meshes on each side of a bend by default.
 A lateral bearing mesh is not needed at 90 because there is no tendency for the model to deflect in
any direction NOT axial to the pipe.
 The tendency for lateral deflection must be defined for each element framing into an intersection
(node 50).
Commands available in this module are:

Button Description

Opens a new piping file as the original job.

File Open

File-Change Renames the buried job (in the event that the user does not wish to use the CAESAR II
Buried Pipe Job default of “B” appended to the original job name).
Name

Prints the element description data spreadsheet.

File- Print

Allows the user to specify soil data for CAESAR II to use in generating one or more
Soil Models soil restraint systems. This is described in detail below.

Converts the original job into the buried job by meshing the existing elements and
Convert adding soil restraints. The conversion process creates all of the necessary elements to
satisfy the Zone 1, Zone 2, and Zone 3 requirements, and places restraints on the
elements in these zones accordingly. All elbows are broken down into at least two
curved sections, and very long radius elbows are broken down into segments whose
lengths are not longer than the elements in the immediately adjacent Zone 1 pipe
section. Node numbers are generated by adding “1” to the element’s FROM node
number. CAESAR II checks before using a node number to make sure that it will be
unique in the model. All densities on buried pipe elements are zeroed to simulate the
continuous support of the pipe weight. A conversion log is also generated, which
details the process in full.
 Chapter10

Notes on the Soil Model

The following procedures for estimating soil distributed stiffnesses and ultimate loads should be used only when
the analyst does not have better data or methods suited to the particular site and problem. Our soil restraint
modeling algorithms are based on the ideas presented by (1) The CAESAR II Basic Model L.C. Peng in his
paper entitled “Stress Analysis Methods for Underground Pipelines,” published in 1978 in Pipeline Industry and
(2) Appendix B: Soil Spring Representation from the Guidelines for the Design of Buried Steel Pipe by the
American Lifelines Alliance http://www.americanlifelinesalliance.org/pdf/Update061305.pdf.

Soil supports are modeled as bi-linear springs having an initial stiffness, an ultimate load, and a yield stiffness.
The yield stiffness is typically set close to zero, i.e. once the ultimate load on the soil is reached there is no
further increase in load even though the displacement may continue. The two basic ultimate loads that must be
calculated to analyze buried pipe are the axial and transverse ultimate loads. Many researchers differentiate
between horizontal, upward, and downward transverse loads, but when the variance in predicted soil properties
and methods are considered, this differentiation is often not warranted. Note that CAESAR II allows the explicit
entry of these data if so desired.

Once the axial and lateral ultimate loads are known, the stiffness in these directions can be determined by
dividing the ultimate load by the yield displacement. Researchers have found that the yield displacement is
related to both the buried depth and the pipe diameter. The ultimate loads and stiffnesses computed are on a
force per unit length of pipe basis.

Button Description

The user enters soil data by executing the Soil Models Command. This option allows the user to
specify the soil properties for the CAESAR II Buried Pipe Equations.

Note Valid soil model numbers start with 2. Soil model number 1 is reserved for user-defined soil
stiffnesses. Up to 15 different soil models may be entered for a single job.

Upon entry, the soil modeler dialog appears. Select either the CAESAR II Basic Model (Peng) or the American
LifeLines Alliance.
CAESAR II Basic Model (Peng)
Either the friction coefficient or the undrained shear strength may be left blank. Typically for clays the friction
coefficient would be left blank and would be automatically estimated by CAESAR II as Su/600 psf. Both sandy
soils and clay-like soils may be defined here.
 Chapter10

The soil restraint equations use these soil properties to generate restraint ultimate loads and stiffnesses. The
TEMPERATURE CHANGE is optional. If entered the thermal strain is used to compute and print the theoretical
“virtual anchor length.”) These equations are:
Axial Ultimate Load (Fax)
Fax = ∝D[ (2〉sH) + ( 〉pt) + ( 〉f)(D/4) ]
Where:
∝= Friction coefficient, typical values are:
0.4 for silt
0.5 for sand
0.6 for gravel
0.6 for clay or Su/600
Su = Undrained shear strength (specified for clay-like soils) H = Buried depth to the top of pipe
D = Pipe diameter 〉p = Pipe density
〉s = Soil density t = Pipe nominal wall thickness
〉f = Fluid density

Transverse Ultimate Load (Ftr)

Ftr = 0.5〉s (H+D)2[tan(45 + /2)]2OCM

If Su is given (i.e. has a clay-like soil), then Ftr as calculated above is multiplied by Su/250 psf.
Where:
 = Angle of internal friction, typical values are:
27-45 for sand
26-35 for silt
0 for clay

Notes on the Overburden Compaction Multiplier (OCM)

The OCM is an artificial CAESAR II term used to allow you to take a conservative approach when modeling
uncertain soil response. Since a higher stiffness will generally produce conservative results, you may wish to
increase the transverse soil stiffness, CAESAR II uses the OCM to serve this purpose.
Users have reduced the OCM (from its default of 8) to values ranging from 5 to 7, depending on the degree of
compaction of the backfill. There is no theory which suggests that the OCM cannot equal 1.0.
For a strict implementation of Peng's Theory as discussed in his articles (April 78 and May 78 issue of Pipeline
Industry) you should use a value of 1.0 for the OCM.
Yield Displacement (yd):
yd = Yield Displacement Factor(H+D)

Note: The Yield Displacement Factor defaults to 0.015(suggested for H = 3D).

 Axial Stiffness (Kax) on a per length of pipe basis:
Kax=Fax / yd
Transverse Stiffness (Ktr) on a per length of pipe basis:
Ktr=Ftr / yd

Once you click OK, the soil data is saved in a file entitled .SOI.

American Lifelines Alliance Soil Model

The following information references the American Lifelines Alliance document "Guidelines for the Design of
Buried Steel Pipe " Appendix B: Soil Spring Representation

http://www.americanlifelinesalliance.org/pdf/Update061305.pdf. This document provides bilinear stiffness of

soil for axial, lateral, uplift and bearing. Each stiffness term has a component associated with sandy soils
(subscripted q) and a component associated with clays (subscripted c). Data can be entered for pure granular
soils and pure clays.

Soil stiffness for both clay and sand (cohesive and granular soils, respectively) are defined through the following
parameters supplied by the user:
c= soil cohesion representative of the soil backfill
H = soil depth to top of pipe (this is converted by C2 to depth to pipe centerline in ALA calculations)

= effective unit weight of soil

= total dry unit weight of fill

K0 =
coefficient of earth pressure at rest (can be calculated based on internal friction angle of soil)
f = coating-dependent factor relating the internal friction angle of the soil to the friction angle at the
soil-pipe interface
= internal friction angle of soil
 Chapter10

Elastic range of soil is either fixed or a function of D & H with limits based on D.

Yield Displacement Factor Entry Limited by

Δt (dT) – Axial Length units ―

Δp (dP) – Lateral Multiple of D 0.04(H+D/2)
Δqu (dQu) – Upward Multiple of H
Minimum
Δqu (dQu) – Upward Multiple of D
Δqd (dQd) – Downward Multiple of D ―
Axial:

Tu = D〈c + DH  (1 + K0 ) tan 
2
Tu = peak friction force at pipe-soil interface maximum axial soil force per unit length that can be
transmitted to pipe)
D= pipe OD
〈= adhesion factor (for clays only)
0.274 0.695
〈 = 0.608 0.123c  2 + 3
c + 1 c + 1 where c is in ksf
c = soil cohesion representative of the soil backfill (undrained shear strength)
H = depth of cover to pipe centerline

= effective unit weight of soil

K 0 = coefficient of earth pressure at rest

The ratio of the horizontal effective stress acting on a supporting structure and the vertical effective stress in the
soil at that point. At rest indicates the pipe does not move for this calculation.

= interface angle of friction for pipe and soil,

 = f
f = coating-dependent factor relating the internal friction angle of the soil to the friction angle at
the soil-pipe interface

Pipe Coating f

Concrete 1.0
Coal Tar 0.9

Rough Steel 0.8

Smooth Steel 0.7

Fusion Bonded Epoxy 0.6

Polyethylene 0.6
 Chapter10

 = internal friction angle of soil

t = axial displacement to develop

Tu = 0.1 inch for dense sand

= 0.2 inch for loose sand
= 0.3 inch for stiff clay
= 0.4 inch for soft clay

Lateral:

Pu = N ch cD + N qh  HD

Pu =
maximum horizontal soil bearing capacity (maximum lateral soil force per unit length that can be
transmitted to pipe)
N ch = horizontal soil bearing capacity factor for clay (0 for c=0)

N qh =
horizontal soil bearing capacity factor for sand (0 for φ=0°)
c d
N ch = a + bx + 2 + δ9
( x + 1) ( x + 1) 3

N qh = a + b( x) + c( x 2 ) + d ( x 3 ) + e( x 4 )

Factor φ x a b c d e

Nch 0° H/D 6.752 0.065 -11.063 7.119 --

Nqh 20° H/D 2.399 0.439 -0.03 1.059E-3 -1.754E-5

Nqh 25° H/D 3.332 0.839 -0.090 5.606E-3 -1.319E-4

Nqh 30° H/D 4.565 1.234 -0.089 4.275E-3 -9.159E-5

Nqh 35° H/D 6.816 2.019 -0.146 7.651E-3 -1.683E-4

Nqh 40° H/D 10.959 1.783 0.045 -5.425E-3 -1.153E-4

Nqh 45° H/D 17.658 3.309 0.048 -6.443E-3 -1.299E-4

Nqh can be interpolated for φ between 20°and 45°

p = Pu
horizontal displacement to develop
D
= 0.04(H + ) δ 0.01D
2 to 0.15D
Vertical Uplift:

Qu = N cv cD + N qv  HD

Qu = maximum vertical upward soil bearing capacity (maximum vertical uplift soil force per unit length
that can be transmitted to pipe)
N cv = vertical upward soil bearing capacity factor for clay (0 for c=0)

H
N qv = N qv = ( ) δ Nq
vertical upward soil bearing capacity factor for sand (0 for 44D °)
H
N cv = 2( ) δ 10
D applicable for (H/D)≤10

H
N qv = ( ) δ Nq
44D

Nq = exp( tan  ) tan 2 (45 + )
2
qu = Qu
vertical displacement to develop
= 0.01H to 0.02H for dense to loose sands < 0.1D
= 0.1H to 0.2H for stiff to soft clays < 0.2D

Vertical Bearing:

D2
Qd = N c cD + N q  HD + N  
2
Qd = maximum vertical bearing soil force per unit length that can be transmitted to pipe

N c , N q , N  = vertical downward soil bearing capacity factors

 + 0.0 01
N c = [cot( + 0.001)]{exp[ tan( + 0.001)] tan 2 (45 + )1}
2

N q = exp( tan  ) tan 2 (45 + )
2
N  = e( 0.18 2.5)
= total dry unit weight of fill

qd = Qd
vertical displacement to develop
= 0.1D for granular soils
= 0.2D for cohesive soils
 Chapter10

Recommended Procedures
The recommended procedure for using the buried pipe modeler is outlined below:

1 Select the original unburied job and enter the buried pipe modeler. The original job must already
exist, and will serve as the basis for the pipe model. The original model need only contain the basic
geometry of the piping system. The modeler will remove any existing restraints in the buried
portion. Add any additional underground restraints ( e.g. thrust block) to the buried model. Rename
the buried job if the CAESAR II default name (JOBNAME B) is not appropriate.
2 Enter the soil data using Soil Models or collect any user-defined soil data.
3 Describe the sections of the piping system that are buried, and define any required fine mesh areas
using the buried element data spreadsheet or enter user-defined soil data (columns 6-13).
4 Convert the original model into the buried model by clicking Convert Input. This step produces a
detailed description of the conversion.
5 Exit the Buried Pipe Modeler and return to the CAESAR II Main Menu. From here the user may
review and edit the buried model and perform the analysis of the buried pipe job.
A buried-pipe example problem is shown in the following section. This example illustrates the features of the
modeler and should in no-way be taken as a guide for recommended underground piping design.
Example

The following input listing represents the unburied model shown above.
 Chapter10

Terminal nodes 100 and 1900 are above ground. Nodes 1250 and 1650 (on the sloped runs) mark the soil entry
and exit points.

Soil Model Number 2, a sandy soil, is entered.

Elements 1250-1300 through 1600-1650 are buried using soil model number 2. Zone 1 meshing is indicated at
the entry and exit points.
 Chapter10

Clicking Convert on the toolbar to begins the conversion to a buried model.

E.ile !;.dit :tiew Buried Pipe

. Iiii i [9. db 8 I&i!ICM. lJ

8asic Soil Properties
Buried Element Descriptions
. . I
13 120
I
: Element of

I
......... ELEMENT 900 000

NOT BURIED...
............ ELEMENT 000 00

NOT BURIED...

............ ELEMENT 00 200

NOT BURIED...

............ ELEMENT 200 250

NOT BURIED...

............ ELEMENT 250 300

Buried S oi. Mo de No. 2

CAESAR s oi. m.ode eype
'Virtua Ancho r Lengeh (in.) = 0 ?5
Axial. Sei £fness ( 1b. /in. / in. ) = 62
Trans Sei.£fness ( 1b. /in. / in. ) = 29?6
Yie l. d Di.spl.acem.ene (in.) = .2600

COMPUTED STIFFNESSES:
Direceion Stiffness Ul.ti.m.at e Load
( l.b _ / in. /in. ) ( l.b. /in. )
AXIAL 62 ?8
TRANS 29?6 3?49
UP 29?6 3?49
DOWN 29?6 3?49

Lateral. Bearing Lengeh (in.) = 298.0471

-- ---- -

I OK
I Cancel I
The screen listing can also be printed.
 Chapter10

The original unburied model is shown along with the "buried" model below. Note the added restraints around the
elbows and along the straight runs.

"Unburied Pipe" - note above ground restraints

"Buried Pipe" - note added restraints and their location

Note the bi-linear restraints added to the ried model. The stiffness used is based upon the distance between
nodes.

: Ell• dit t:!odel En lronment Qptlons yjew tools t1olp

iDbli I:DI il§ l a - MJ £i\.. 1:\1. 1 <".>I±]-+ I tt I ti e 111 i!IPI!r l ll iii i JI- '
:EE I f'i tl EHHH a< CJ@E)I -;r· I ID I [P I M - Llli1] : :R' - -

i l ilOl i ®DI e.l i

a - 0 - J J;. r:o - : $,.<il,;;.OO *
"i) i Classic Piping Input

jr
))

c From: r Bend r Reducer

liD To: r Nam r Rigid
Expnsion Joint
r SIFs Uees Code: 18318 :.:J f'ii£l
J;;J
-
Q)
OX: I P' Restraints r Displacements ...ir 177000.000

DY: I d rr Hengers
r
r Flenge

"1
T1: F1:1J
Nozzles
,..
DZ 1·311. 3000 in
r F01ces/Moments T2 F2 i!!
l
r Offsets 113
= - Diameler: po 0000 ))l r Uniform Loeds
r Wind/Wave i}
T3 F3R
T4: 1.000 F4:
-
/}.X

m WIISch: f0:65oO >-;- T5 F5 b

m i ...
y

..
Meleriel: I1306).:1P·
I 5L X65
r Seem Welded TS Fs iJ 6':
..:J))l
Iii +Mill Tol %:112.5000
·Mill Tol %:112.5000
P' Allowable Stress
Eleslic Modulus (C): I2.9500E+007
,- ;;!.

1;;;"
T?
TS: 1.000
F? R
FS: zAx l!!.
I

.-.
Conosion: Elastic Modulus (H1): I2.9260E+007 T9 FS y:-
(J lnsul Thk: [O:OOoO
- "
Eleslic Modulus (H2): I2.9500E+007 _j §· Ell Fee: .hl.J

..
;Restraints X
QjJ
D

FROM TO RfSTR STIFFNESS or

TVPE
NODE NODE NODE lb.Jin.
l'""iil
1 100 200 100 ANC
....
2 100 200 200 +Y 10zo
3 100 200
4 100 200 ....J
5 400 500 500 +YROD 24.0000 q
6 400 500 [jjl
7 400 500
6 400 500
9 600 700 700 +V C'llJ
10 600 700
11 600 700
12 600 700
13 700 800 800 +Y
14 700 800
..:J
Reedy CAP NUM SCRL A
 Chapter10

Note that the first buried element, 1250-1251, has no density.

The buried job can now be analyzed.

Chapter 11 Equipment Component and Compliance

In This Chapter
Equipment and Component Evaluation ................................ 11-2
Intersection Stress Intensification Factors ............................ 11-3
Bend Stress Intensification Factors ....................................... 11-6
WRC 107 Vessel Stresses ..................................................... 11-10
WRC Bulletin 297................................................................. 11-17
Flange Leakage/Stress Calculations...................................... 11-18
Remaining Strength of Corroded Pipelines B31G ................ 11-27
Expansion Joint Rating ......................................................... 11-31
Structural Steel Checks - AISC............................................. 11-38
NEMA SM23 (Steam Turbines) ........................................... 11-46
API 610 (Centrifugal Pumps) ............................................... 11-53
API 617 (Centrifugal Compressors) ..................................... 11-59
API 661 (Air Cooled Heat Exchangers) ............................... 11-61
Heat Exchange Institute Standard For Closed Feedwater Heaters
............................................................................................... 11-66
API 560 (Fired Heaters for General Refinery Services) ....... 11-67
Equipment and Component Evaluation
The CAESAR II Equipment and Component Compliance Analytical Modules are executed from the
CAESAR II Main Menu using the Analysis Menu. Vessels, flanges, turbines, compressors, pumps and heat
exchangers can be checked for excessive piping loads in accordance with appropriate standards. Input is via
tabbed spreadsheets, and help screens are available for each data cell (launched with [F1] or the ? key). Output
reports can be sent to the printer, terminal or files.

Often suction (inlet), discharge (exhaust), and extraction lines are analyzed for forces and moments in separate
runs of a pipe stress program. Once all of the loadings for a particular piece of equipment are computed, the
equipment program is executed to determine if these loads are acceptable in accordance with the governing code.
The user enters the equipment’s basic geometry and the loads on its nozzles computed from the piping program.
The equipment analysis determines if these loads are excessive.

One convenient feature of the CAESAR II Equipment programs is that nozzles on equipment can be analyzed
separately. Often times a user will only have suction side loads, and often the particular dimensions of the pump
are unknown, or are difficult to obtain. In these cases, CAESAR II accepts zeros or “no-entries” for the unknown
data and will still generate a “single-nozzle” equipment check report. Therefore, while overall compliance may
not be evaluated, the user can still check the individual nozzle limits. This is a valuable tool to have, as in this
case the user is looking more for load guidance, rather than for some fixed or precise limit on allowables.

Analysis M enu

All of these program modules share the same interface for easy transition. The individual modules are described
following section.
 11

Intersection Stress Intensification Factors

With this module, intersection stress intensification factors (SIFs) can be computed for any of the three-pipe type
intersections available in CAESAR II:

Inter section Types

A sample input spreadsheet is shown below.

Inter section Str ess Int ensification Fa ctor s

 11

Stress intensification factors are reported for a range of different configuration values.

Inter section Str ess Int ensification Fa ctor s – Repor t

Bend Stress Intensification Factors
This module provides a scratch pad for determining stress intensification factors (SIFs) for various bend
configurations under different codes.

Bend stress intensification factors can be computed for

 Pipe bends without any additional attachments. These calculations are done exactly according to the
piping code being used.
 Mitered pipe bends. These calculations are done exactly according to the piping code being used.
 Pipe bends with a trunnion attachment. These calculations are taken from the paper “Stress Indices
for Piping Elbows with Trunnion Attachments for Moment and Axial Loads,” by Hankinson,
Budlong and Albano, in the PVP Vol. 129, 1987.
The bend stress intensification factor input spreadsheet is shown below:

Bend Str ess I ntensification Spr ea dsheet

 11

Input here is fairly straight forward; if there is a question about a particular data entry, the help screens should be
queried. In most cases data that does not apply is left blank. For example, to review the SIFs for a bend that
does not have a trunnion, the three trunnion related input fields should be left blank.

Bend Str ess I ntensification F act or s - Tr unnion

Pressure Stiffening
The pressure stiffening option in the input is provided so you can see the effect that pressure stiffening has on the
bend’s flexibility factor and stress intensification factor. This option is controlled by you in CAESAR II via the
setup file, but is most commonly left to the default condition. The default is different for each piping code because
some of the codes mention pressure stiffening explicitly and some do not.

Pressure stiffening has its most significant effect in larger diameter bends adjacent to sensitive equipment
(compressors). Including pressure stiffening where it is not included by default will draw more of the system
moment to the nozzle adjacent to the bend.

Flanges Attached to Bend Ends

This is the number of rigid fittings that are attached to the end of the bend preventing the ovalization of the bend.
It is the ovalization that provides for a large amount of the bend’s flexibility. BS-806 The British Power Piping
Code recommends that flanges or valves (or any rigid cross-sectional fitting) that are within two diameters of the
ending weld point of the bend be considered as being attached to the end of the bend for this calculation.

Bends with Trunnions

There are limits that must be satisfied before SIFs can be calculated on trunnions. These limits come directly
from the paper by Hankinson, Budlong and Albano, and they are:
t/T ε 0.2 and t/T δ 2.0
D/T ε 20 and D/T δ 60
d/D ε 0.3 and d/D δ 0.8

Where:
t = Wall Thickness of the Trunnion
T = Wall Thickness of the Bend
d = Outside Diameter of the Trunnion
D = Outside Diameter of the Bend
 11

Stress Concentrations and Intensification

The stress intensification calculation for bends with trunnions is based on the relationship between the ASME
NB stress indices C2, K2, and the B31 code “i” factor or stress intensification factor. That relationship has long
been taken to be
(m)(i) = (C2)(K2)
Where:
m = multiplier, usually either 1.7 or 2.
i = B31 stress intensification factor
C2 = ASME NB secondary stress index
K2 = ASME NB peak stress index

The peak stress index (K2) is commonly known as the “stress concentration factor,” and is so-called in
CAESAR II. Simply put, this factor is the ratio of the highest point stress at an intensification (i.e. at an
intersection or an elbow) and the nominal local computed stress at the same point. Peak stresses typically only
exist in a very small volume of material, on the order of fractions of the wall thickness of the part.

Because most piping components are formed without crude notches, gross imperfections or other anomalies, the
peak stress index is kept well in control. Where a smooth transition radius is provided which is at least t/2, where
(t) is the characteristic thickness of the part, the peak stress index is typically taken as 1.0. At unfinished welds,
sockets, and where no transition radius is provided the peak stress index approaches values of 2.0.

Note If you enter a trunnion (where there will be a weld between the trunnion and the elbow), and
you do not enter a stress concentration factor (the third input for the trunnion), CAESAR II assumes a
stress concentration factor of 2.0.
WRC 107 Vessel Stresses
The Welding Research Council Bulletin 107 (WRC 107) has been used extensively since 1965 by design
engineers to estimate local stresses in vessel/attachment junctions. There are 3 editions of the WRC 107 bulletin
available in the program, set the default using Configure/Setup. The WRC 107 Bulletin provides an analytical
tool to evaluate the vessel stresses in the immediate vicinity of a nozzle. You can use this method to compute the
stresses at both the inner and outer surfaces of the vessel wall, and report the stresses in the longitudinal and
circumferential axes of the vessel/nozzle intersection. The convention adopted by WRC 107 to define the
applicable orientations of the applied loads and stresses for both spherical and cylindrical vessels display below.
 11

Spherical Shells Cylindrical Shells

Defining WRC Axes: Defining WRC Axes:
P-axis: Along Nozzle centerline and positive entering vessel. P-axis: Along Nozzle centerline and positive entering vessel.

M1-axis: Perpendicular to nozzle centerline along convenient MC-axis: Along vessel centerline and positive to correspond
global axis. with any parallel global axis.

M2-axis: Cross P-axis into M1 axis and the result is M2-axis. M2-axis: Cross the P-axis with MC axis and result is ML-axis.
Defining WRC Stress Points: Defining WRC Stress Points:
u—upper, stress on outside of vessel wall at junction. u-upper, stress on outside of vessel wall at junction.
l—lower, stress on inside of vessel at junction. l-lower, means stress on inside of vessel at junction.
A-Position on vessel at junction along negative M1 axis. A-Position on vessel at junction along negative MC axis.
B-Position on vessel at junction along positive M2 axis. B-Position on vessel at junction, along positive MC axis.
C-Position on vessel at junction along positive M2 axis. C-Position on vessel at junction, along positive ML axis.
D-Position on vessel at junction along negative M2 axis. D-Position on vessel at junction, along negative ML axis.
Note: Shear axis "VC" is parallel, and in the same direction
as the bending axis "ML." Shear axis "VL" is parallel, and in
the opposite direction as the bending axis "MC."

It has also been a common practice to use WRC 107 to conservatively estimate vessel shell stress state at the
edge of a reinforcing pad, if any. The stress state in the vessel wall when the nozzle has a reinforcing pad can be
estimated by considering a solid plug, with an outside diameter equal to the O.D. of the reinforcing pad,
subjected to the same nozzle loading.

Note: Before attempting to use WRC 107 to evaluate the stress state of any nozzle/vessel junction, you
should always verify that the geometric restrictions limiting the application of WRC 107 are not
exceeded. These vary according to the attachment and vessel types, you should refer to the WRC 107
bulletin directory for this information.

WRC 107 should probably not be used when the nozzle is very light or when the parameters in the WRC 107 data
curves are unreasonably exceeded. Output from WRC 107 includes the figure numbers for the curves accessed,
the curve abscissa, and the values retrieved. You should check these outputs against the actual curve in WRC 107
to get a “feel” for the accuracy of the stresses calculated. For example, if parameters for a particular problem are
always near or past the end of the figures curve data, then the calculated stresses may not be
reliable.
Enable WRC 107 by clicking ANALYSIS - WRC 107/297 from the Main Menu. The WRC 107/297 window
appears.

Analysis-WRC 107
The WRC 107/297 Analysis module allows multiple analyses to be saved inside the same file. The Job
Explorer window lists each analysis contained in the job, sorted by analysis type: WRC-107 or WRC-297. The
items in the list are created by combining the item’s description and item number, which can be changed in the
data input window. The Job Explorer window is a docking window that can be hidden and pinned open by
clicking the Pushpin in the upper right corner.

The WRC 107/297 Toolbar enables users to select a specific analysis type, launch an analysis of data, or output
analysis results to MS Word.

Button Description
 11

Enables you to define a data set as a WRC-107 analysis.

Enables you to define a data set as a WRC-297 analysis.

Starts the analysis and displays the results in the program’s window.

Performs the initial WRC 107 calculation and summation and sends the result to MicroSoft™ Word

New analyses can be added to the job by clicking the appropriate analysis type button 107or 297 on the toolbar.
An analysis can be removed from the job by selecting it in the Job Explorer window, then clicking the Pencil
Eraser button on the toolbar. To display an analysis in the Data Input window (the grid-like window on the
right) select it from the list in the Job Explorer window on the left.

You can navigate through the Data Input window by clicking on a cell with the mouse, or by using the
keyboard. The Tab key moves the cursor from the left cell (label) to the right cell (value), then to the next left
cell label, and so on. The Up/Down Arrow keys move through the cells. You can enter data when the focus is
either on a label or value. When a cell has a list selection such as an attachment type, display the list by clicking
on the cell, and using the Alt + Down Arrow key combination, or by clicking the drop list arrow with the mouse.

The analysis results and the graphical representation display on the Analysis and Drawing tabs on the right side
of the Data Input window. These two tabs are also docking panes that can be opened or hidden by clicking on
the Pushpin in the upper right corner. The two tabs automatically update after each change in the Data Input
window, even if they are hidden.
Below displays a sample Analysis report, you can undock, move, and resize the report according to preference.

Analysis Repor t
Nozzle curves in the WRC Bulletin 107 cover essentially all applications of nozzles in vessels or piping;
however, should any of the interpolation parameters, i.e. Beta, etc. fall outside the limits of the available curves,
some extrapolation of the WRC method must be used. The current default is to use the last value in the particular
WRC table. If you wish to control the extrapolation methodology interactively, you may do so by changing the
WRC 107 default from USE LAST CURVE VALUE to INTERACTIVE CONTROL on the Computation
Control tab located inside the Configure-Setup module of the Main Menu or directly in the WRC 107 input
file, on the Vessel Data tab.
 11

WRC 107 Stress Summations

Because the stresses computed by WRC 107 are highly localized, they do not fall immediately under the B31
code rules as defined by B31.1 or B31.3. Appendix 4-1 of ASME Section VIII, Division 2 “Mandatory Design
Based on Stress Analysis” does however provide a detailed approach for dealing with these local stresses. The
analysis procedure outlined in the aforementioned code is used in CAESAR II to perform the stress evaluation. In
order to evaluate the stresses through an elastic analysis, three stress combinations (summations) must be made:
 Pm
 P m + P l + Pb
 Pm + Pl + Pb + Q
Where Pm is defined as the general membrane stress due to internal pressure removed from discontinuities, and
can be estimated for the vessel wall from the expression (PD) / (4t) for the longitudinal component and (PD) /
(2t) for the hoop component, where P is the design pressure of the system. The allowable for Pm is kSmh where
Smh is the allowable stress intensity (See the CAESAR II Technical Reference Manual for definition). The value of
k can be taken from Table AD-150.1 of the code (which ranges from 1.0 for sustained loads to 1.2 for sustained
plus wind loads or sustained plus earthquake loads). Pl is the local membrane stress at the junction due to the
sustained piping loads, Pb is the local bending stress (defined as zero at the nozzle to vessel connections per
Section VIII, Division 2 of ASME Code), while Q is defined as the secondary stress, due to thermal expansion
piping loads, or the bending stress due to internal pressure thrust and sustained piping loads. The allowable stress
intensity for the second stress combination is 1.5kSmh, as defined by the Figure 4-130.1 of the Code, while Smh is
the hot stress intensity allowable at the given design temperature. Both Pl and Q will be calculated by the WRC
107 program. The third combination actually defines the “range” of the stress intensity, and its allowable is
limited to 1.5(Smc+Smh). See the Technical Reference Manual for a detailed discussion.

This summation is done automatically following the WRC 107 analysis. This calculation provides a comparison
of the stress intensities to the entered allowables, along with a corresponding PASS-FAIL ruling. Failed items
display in red.
WRC 107 Analysis M odule - Dr awing Tab
 11

WRC Bulletin 297

Published in August of 1984, Welding Research Council (WRC) 297 attempts to extend the existing analysis
tools for the evaluation of stresses in cylinder-to-cylinder intersections. WRC 297 differs from the widely used
WRC 107 primarily in that WRC 297 is designed for larger d/D ratios (up to 0.5), and that WRC 297 also
computes stresses in the nozzle and the vessel. (WRC 107 only computes stresses in the vessel.)

The CAESAR II WRC 297 module shares the same interface with WRC 107. To enable the WRC 297 analysis,
click the 297 button located near the upper-left corner of the window. The module provides spreadsheets for
vessel data, nozzle data, and imposed loads. Vessel and Nozzle data fields function the same way as those in
WRC 107. Currently WRC 297 supports one set of loads. The loads may be entered in either Global
CAESAR II convention, or in the Local WRC 107 coordinate system. If Global CAESAR II convention is
selected vessel and nozzle direction cosines must be present in order to convert the loads into the Local WRC
297 convention as discussed in the WRC 297 bulletin.

The CAESAR II version of WRC 297 also adds the pressure component of the stress using Lame’s equations,
multiplied by the stress intensification factors found in ASME Section VIII, Div. 2, Table AD-560.7. The
pressure stress calculation is not a part of the WRC 297 bulletin, but is added here as a convenience for the user.

Note CAESAR II also uses, through the piping input processor, the nozzle flexibility calculations
described in WRC 297 refer to Chapter 3 of the Technical Reference Manual.

When provided with the necessary input, CAESAR II calculates the stress components at the four locations on the
vessel around the nozzle and also the corresponding locations on the nozzle. Stresses are calculated on both the
outer and inner surfaces (upper and lower). These stress components are resolved into stress intensities at these
16 points around the connection. Refer to the WRC 107 discussion for more information on the allowable limits
for these stresses and output processing.
Flange Leakage/Stress Calculations
The Flange Leakage/Stress Calculations are started by selecting the Main Menu option ANALYSIS-FLANGES.

There have been primarily two different ways to calculate stress and one way to estimate leakage for flanges that
have received general application over the past 20 years. The stress calculation methods are from the following
sources:
 ASME Section VIII
 ANSI B16.5 Rating Tables
The leakage calculations were also based on the B16.5 rating table approach. Leakage is a function of the relative
stiffnesses of the flange, gasket and bolting. Using the B16.5 estimated stress calculations to predict leakage does
not consider the gasket type, stiffness of the flange, or the stiffness of the bolting. Using B16.5 to estimate
leakage makes the tendency to leak proportional to the allowable stress in the flange, i.e. a flange with a higher
allowable will be able to resist higher moments without leakage. Leakage is very weakly tied to allowable stress,
if at all.

The CAESAR II Flange Leakage Calculation is our first attempt to improve upon the solution of this difficult
analysis problem. Equations were written to model the flexibility of the annular plate that is the flange, and its
ability to rotate under moment, axial force, and pressure. The results compare favorably with three dimensional
finite element analysis of the flange junction. These correlations assume that the distance between the inside
diameter of the flange and the center of the effective gasket loading diameter is smaller than the distance
between the effective gasket loading diameter and the bolt circle diameter, i.e. that (G-ID) < (BC-G), where, G is
the effective gasket loading diameter, ID is the inside diameter of the flange, and BC is the diameter of the bolt
circle.

Several trends have been noticed as flange calculations have been made:
 The thinner the flange, the greater the tendency to leak.
 Larger diameter flanges have a greater tendency to leak.
 Stiffer gaskets have a greater tendency to leak.
 Leakage is a function of bolt tightening stress.
 11

Input for the Flange Module is broken into four sections_ The first section describes flange geometry_

!":".!Flange leakage/Stress Calculat1ons -[C:\CAESAR\tutor) 1111£J

E.ile dit Iools A_ iew t:!elp

Flange ) Bolts and Gasket ) MaterialData ) Loads )

,--------------- Flange Type ---------------,

lnteg1al Weld Neck lnteg1al Slip On IntegralRing Loose Slip On

r. r r
Loose Ring Lap Joint Blind Reverse

r r r
Flange Class :1300 :.:J
Flange G1ade: j1.2000

Flange Outside Oiamete1[AJ: 141.5000

Flange Inside Oiamete1 IBJ: j30.5600
Flange Thickness ltJ: 14.0600
Flange Face 00 01 Lapjt cnd34.5000
Flange Face 10 01 Lapjt cnt 10: j33.0000

Small End Hub Thickness igOJ:11.6900

La1ge End Hub Thickness lgl J: j3.4400
Hub Length lhl: 16.6200

Ready

Flu.ae AAalyair
The second section contains data on the bolts and gasket.

Bolts and G asket

 11

The third section is used to enter material and stress-related data.

t":".!Fiange leakage/Stress Calculatoons -[C:\CAESAR\tutor) £J

Eile dit Iools Jl l!jew t[elp

Flange ) Bolts and Gasket Material Data ) Loads )

Flange Material:f.1r.l•$(i;,fjl #fi1ijjl _ Browse...

Bolt Mateoial: SA-193 B7 Browse...

Design Tempeoatuoe:1650.0000
Flange Allowable @Design Tempeoatuoe: 11BBOO.OOOD

Flange Allowable @Ambient Tempeoatuoe: j2oooo.OOOD

Flange Modulus of Elasticity @Design: j27900000.DOO

Flange Modulus of Elasticity @Ambient: j27900000.DOO

Bolt Allowable @Design Tempeoatuoe: 11BBOO.OOOD

Bolt Allowable @Ambient Tempeoatuoe: 11BBOO.OOOD

Flange Allowable Stoess Multiplieo: 11.0000

Bolt Allowable Stoess Multiplieo [VIII DIV 21f:"l."o'"o'oo :--- ]

Ready

Mlltwielcd Btn11Deta
The fourth section contains the imposed loads.

!'!.!Flange leakage/Stress Calculatoons -[C:\CAESAR\tutor) £J

Eile dit Iools Jl lijew t[elp

Flange ) Bolts and Gasket ) MaterialData Loads )

Exteonal Loads ---------------------,

Design Pressure IPJ: Jtmmu!llml

Axial Fooce (Optional): j1000.0000

Bending Moment (Optional): j2400.0000

Disable Leakage Calculations r

Disable Stress Calculations r
Disable ANSI 816.5 Check r

Ready

lapa114Loa4•
 Chapter 11 Equipment Component and Compliance 11-23

Bolt Tightening Stress Notes

This is a critical item for leakage determination and for computing stresses in the flange. The ASME Code bases
its stress calculations on a prespecified, fixed equation for the bolt stress. The resulting value is however often
not related to the actual tightening stress that appears in the flange when the bolts are tightened. For this reason,
the initial bolt stress input field that appears in the first section of data input, Bolt Initial Tightening Stress, is
used only for the flexibility/leakage determination. The value for the bolt tightening stress used in the ASME
Flange Stress Calculations is as defined by the ASME Code:
Bolt Load = Hydrostatic End Force + Force for Leaktight Joint

If the Bolt Initial Tightening Stress field is left blank, CAESAR II uses the value

where 45,000 psi is a constant and d is the nominal diameter of the bolt (correction is made for metric units).

This is a rule of thumb tightening stress that will typically be applied by field personnel tightening the bolts. This
computed value is printed in the output from the flange program. It is interesting to compare this value to the
bolt stress printed in the ASME stress report (also in the output). It is not unusual for the “rule-of-thumb”
tightening stress to be larger than the ASME required stress. When the ASME required stress is entered into the
Bolt Initial Tightening Stress data field, a comparison of the leakage safety factors can be made and the
sensitivity of the joint to the tightening torque can be ascertained. Users are strongly encouraged to “play” with
these numbers to get a feel for the relationship between all of the factors involved.
 11-24 Equipment Component and Compliance

Using the CAESAR II Flange Modeler

Only the following input parameters are required to get a leakage report. These parameters include
 Flange Inside Diameter
 Flange Thickness
 Bolt Circle Diameter
 Number Of Bolts
 Bolt Diameter
 Effective Gasket Diameter
 Uncompressed Gasket Thickness
 Effective Gasket Width
 Leak Pressure Ratio
 Effective Gasket Modulus
 Externally Applied Moment
 Externally Applied Force
 Pressure
The help screens (press [F1] or ? at the data cell) are very useful for all of the input items and should be used
liberally here when there are questions. Unique input cells are discussed as follows:

Leak Pressure Ratio

This value is taken directly from Table 2-5.1 in the ASME Section VIII code. This table is reproduced in the
help screens. This value is more commonly recognized as “m”, and is termed the “Gasket Factor” in the ASME
code. This is a very important number for leakage determination, as it represents the ratio of the pressure
required to prevent leakage over the line pressure.

Effective Gasket Modulus

Typical values are between 300,000 and 400,000 psi for spiral wound gaskets. The higher the modulus the
greater the tendency for the program to predict leakage. Errors on the high side when estimating this value will
lead to a more conservative design.

Flange Rating
This is an optional input, but results in some very interesting output. As mentioned above, it has been a widely
used practice in the industry to use the ANSI B16.5 and API 605 temperature/pressure rating tables as a gauge
for leakage. Because these rating tables are based on allowable stresses, and were not intended for leakage
prediction, the leakage predictions that resulted were a function of the allowable stress for the flange material,
and not the flexibility, i.e. modulus of elasticity of the flange. To give the user a “feel” for this old practice, the
minimum and maximum rating table values from ANSI and API were stored and are used to print minimum and
maximum leakage safety factors that would be predicted from this method. Example output that the user will get
upon entering the flange rating is shown as follows:
EQUIVALENT PRESSURE MODEL ————————-
Equivalent Pressure (lb./sq.in.) 1639.85
ANSI/API Min Equivalent Pressure Allowed 1080.00
 Chapter 11 Equipment Component and Compliance 11-25

ANSI/API Max Equivalent Pressure Allowed 1815.00

This output shows that leakage, according to this older method, occurred if a carbon steel flange was used, and
leakage did not occur if an alloy flange was used. (Of course both flanges would have essentially the same
“flexibility” tendency to leak.)

The following input parameters are used only for the ASME Section VIII Division 1 stress calculations:
 Flange Type
 Flange Outside Diameter
 Design Temperature
 Small End Hub Thickness
 Large End Hub Thickness
 Hub Length
 Flange Allowables
 Bolt Allowables
 Gasket Seating Stress
 Optional Allowable Multipliers
 Flange Face & Gasket Dimensions
The flange type can be selected from the icons on the first spreadsheet.

Material allowables may be acquired from the Section VIII, Division 1 material library that is accessed from the
pull-down list.
 11-26 Equipment Component and Compliance

An input listing for a typical flange analysis is shown below:

CA E S A R I I MISCELLANEOUS REPORT ECHO

Flange Inside Diameter [B](in.) 30.560

Flange Thickness [t](in.) 4.060

Flange Rating (Optional) 300.000

Bolt Circle Diameter (in.) 38.500

Number of Bolts 32.000

Bolt Diameter (in.) 1.500

Bolt Initial Tightening Stress(lb./sq.in.)

Effective Gasket Diameter [G] (in.) 33.888

Uncompressed Gasket Thickness (in.) 0.063

Basic Gasket Width [b0] (in.) 0.375

Leak Pressure Ratio [m] 2.750

Effective Gasket Modulus(b./sq.in.) 300,000.000

Externally Applied Moment (optional)(in.lb.) 24,000.000

Externally Applied Force (optional)(lb.) 1,000.000

Pressure [P](lb./sq.in.) 400.000

The following inputs are required only if you wish to perform stress calcs as per Sect VIII Div. 1

Flange Type (1-8, see ?-Help or Alt-P to plot) 1.000

Flange Outside Diameter [A](in.) 41.500

Design Temperature°F 650.000

Small End Hub Thickness [g0](in.) 1.690

Large End Hub Thickness [g1](in.) 3.440

Hub Length [h](in.) 6.620

Flange Allowable @Design Temperature(lb./sq.in.) 17,500.000

Flange Allowable @Ambient Temperature(lb./sq.in.) 17,500.000

Flange Modulus of Elasticity @Design(lb./sq.in.) 0.279E+08

Flange Modulus of Elasticity @Ambient(lb./sq.in.) 0.279E+08

Bolt Allowable @Design Temperature(lb./sq.in.) 25,000.000

Bolt Allowable @Ambient Temperature(lb./sq.in.) 25,000.000

Gasket Seating Stress [y](lb./sq.in.) 3,700.000

Flange Allowable Stress Multiplier 1.000

Bolt Allowable Stress Multiplier (VIII Div 2 4-1411.000

Disable Leakage Calculations (Y/N) N

Flange Face OD or Lapjt Cnt OD(in.) 34.500

Flange Face ID or Lapjt Cnt ID(in.) 33.000

Gasket Outer Diameter (in.) 36.000

Gasket Inner Diameter (in.) 33.000

Nubbin W idth (in.)

Facing Sketch 1.000

Facing Column 2.000

Disable Leakage Calculations (Y/N) N

 Chapter 11 Equipment Component and Compliance 11-27

Remaining Strength of Corroded Pipelines B31G

The B31G criterion provides a methodology whereby corroded pipelines can be evaluated to determine when
specific pipe segments must be replaced. The original B31G document incorporates a healthy dose of
conservatism and as a result, additional work has been performed to modify the original criteria. This additional
work can be found in project report PR-3805, by Battelle, Inc. The details of the original B31G criteria as well as
the modified methods are discussed in detail in this report.

CAESAR II implements these B31G computations from the Main Menu select ANALYSIS-B31G. The user is then
presented with two spreadsheets on which the problem specific data can be entered.

CAESAR II determines the following values according to the original B31G criteria and four modified methods.

These values are

 the hoop stress to cause failure

 the maximum allowed operating pressure
 the maximum allowed flaw length
The four modified methods vary in the manner in which the corroded area is estimated. These methods are
 .85dL—The corroded area is approximated as 0.85 times the maximum pit depth times the flaw
length.
 Exact—The corroded area is determined numerically using the trapezoid method.
 Equivalent—The corroded area is determined by multiplying the average pit depth by the flaw
length. Additionally, an equivalent flaw length (flaw length * average pit depth / maximum pit
depth) is used in the computation of the Folias factor.
 Effective—This method also uses a numerical trapezoid summation, however, various sub lengths of
the total flaw length are used to arrive at a worst case condition. Note that if the sub length which
produces the worst case coincides with the total length, the Exact and Effective methods yield the
same result.
The input screens from the B31G processor are shown below. All input cells have associated help text for user
convenience. Note that most of the data required by this processor is acquired through actual field
measurements.
 11-28 Equipment Component and Compliance

Data Spr ea dsheet

 11

A maximum of twenty pit measurements may be entered on the Measurements spreadsheet.

t":".!Pipehne Rema1n1ng Strength Calculatoons (B31G) -[C:\CAESAR\tutor) I!I EJ

i Eile dit Iools Jl l!jew t[elp

Data Measurements )

r Measurements are (in.)...-----,

r. Pits

r Thicknesses

liW!J!M 6.1o 1880 11.10.1360 16 1 II

13 h
2.1o 1360 7.1o 1570 12.1o.oooo 17 1 II
3. 0.1880 8. 0.1780
18R
4. 0.2610 9. 0.1780 14. -II 19. -II
5.102190 10.10.1570 151 Jl 20 1 Jl

Ready

MM-tiiUIIIa Sprndllhttt
 11-30 Equipment Component and Compliance

Once the data has been entered, the Analyze menu option initiates the computations. A typical output report is
shown as follows.

The data in the input and the resulting output are consistent with the example from the PR-3-805 report on page
B-19. For additional information or backup on these computations, an intermediate computation file is
generated.

For additional information on this processor, please refer to either the B31G document or the Battelle project
report PR-3-805.
 11

Expansion Joint Rating

CAESAR II provides a computation module which computes a limit for the total displacement per corrugation of
an expansion joint. According to EJMA (Expansion Joint Manufacturers Association), the maximum permitted
amount of axial movement per corrugation is defined as erated where
ex + ey + eq < erated
The terms in the above equation are defined as:
ex = The axial displacement per corrugation resulting from imposed axial movements.
ey = The axial displacement per corrugation resulting from imposed lateral deflections.
eq = The axial displacement per corrugation resulting from imposed angular rotation, i.e. bending.
erated= The maximum permitted amount of axial movement per corrugation. This value should be obtained from
the Expansion Joint Manufacturer’s catalog.
In addition, EJMA states,
“Also, [as an expansion joint is rotated or deflected laterally] it should be noted that one side of the bellows
attains a larger projected area than the opposite side. Under the action of the applied pressure, unbalanced forces
are set up which tend to distort the expansion joint further. In order to control the effects of these two factors a
second limit is established by the manufacturer upon the amount of angular rotation and/or lateral deflection
which may be imposed upon the expansion joint. This limit may be less than the rated movement. Therefore, in
the selection of an expansion joint, care must be exercised to avoid exceeding either of these manufacturer’s
limits.”
This CAESAR II computation module is provided to assist the expansion joint user in satisfying these limitations.
This module computes the terms defined in the above equation and the movement of the joint ends relative to
each other. These relative movements are reported in both the local joint coordinate system and the global
coordinate system.

The expansion joint rating module can be entered by selecting MAIN MENU ANALYSIS -EXPANSION JOINT RATING option.

The user is then presented with two input spreadsheets on which the joint geometry and end displacements are
specified.
 11-32 Equipment Component and Compliance

Geometr y Spr ea dsheet

 11

Displa cements and R otation

 EHpanston Rattng II!I EJ
D[I}. I
Ejle dit JL lijew t!elp

Geometry ) Displacements and Rotations Allowables J

Per Convolution --------,

Axiai: Jm!I!I!: Jl
Latetal: jo.0625 Jl

Bending: jo.0200 _jl

Totsional: jo.0050 Jl

-Total -----------,

Axial jo 1600 _II

Latetal: jo.2500 Jl

Bending: jo.OBOO Jl

Totsional: jo.0200 _jl

Ready
 11

A report displaying both the input echo and the output calculations are shown as follows. The units used for the
coordinate and displacement values are the length units defined in the active units file. Rotations are in units of
degrees.

Rat10g II!I EJ
16
Ejle dit JL lijew t!elp

Geometry ) Displacements and Rotations ) Allowables Output )

AXIAL DISPLACEMENTS
(TOTAL)

Axial Displacement (in.) 0.401

Axial Displacement due to Late al (in.) 0.532
Axial Displacement due to Rotation (in.) 0.066
Axial Displacement TOTAL (in.) 0.999

UNITY CHECK FAILED ON A "TOTAL LENGTII" BASIS

(axial) + ( late<al) + (bending) < 1.0
0.4010 0.1578 1.5106
22.0195
0.1600 0.2500 0.0800
and
(tot:sional) < 1.0
0.0190
0.9495
0.0200

Equivalent Axial Movements (Total)

(axial) + (late<al) + (bending) < 0.1600
0.4010 0.5319 0.0659 0.9987

Ready
 11-36 Equipment Component and Compliance

C A E S A R II MISCELLANEOUS REPORT ECHO

EJMA EXPANSION JOINT RATING

Node Number for “FROM” end 120.000

Node Number for “TO” end 125.000
Number of Convolutions 4.000
Flexible Joint Length (in.)4.447
Effective Diameter(in.)4.996

X Coordinate of “from” end (in.).000

Y Coordinate of “from” end (in.).000
Z Coordinate of “from” end (in.).000

X Coordinate of “to” end (in.)4.447

X Displacement of “from” end (in.).300

Y Displacement of “from” end (in.).250
Z Displacement of “from” end (in.).000
X Rotation of “from” end (deg).000
Y Rotation of “from” end (deg)1.222
Z Rotation of “from” end (deg).030
X Displacement of “to” end (in.)-.100
Y Displacement of “to” end (in.).120
Z Displacement of “to” end (in.).000
X Rotation of “to” end (deg).000
Y Rotation of “to” end (deg)-.020
Z Rotation of “to” end (deg).890

OUTPUT:
AXIAL DISPLACEMENTS PER CONVOLUTION

Axial Displacement.100
Axial Displacement due to Lateral .133
Axial Displacement due to Rotation.016
Axial Displacement TOTAL.250

RELATIVE MOVEMENTS OF END “i” WITH RESPECT TO END “j”

(Local Joint Coordinate System)

Relative Axial Displacement, “x”.401

Relative Lateral Displacement, “y”.158
Relative Bending, “theta” (deg)1.511
Relative Torsion (deg) .019

RELATIVE MOVEMENTS OF END “i” WITH RESPECT TO END “j”

(Global Piping Coordinate System)

Relative X Displacement-.399
Relative Y Displacement-.132
Relative Z Displacement.095
Relative Rotation about X (deg).000
Relative Rotation about Y (deg)-1.242
Relative Rotation about Z (deg).860
 Chapter 11 Equipment Component and Compliance 11-37

In the previous output, the axial displacement total in the report is the total axial displacement per corrugation
due to axial, lateral, and rotational displacement of the expansion joint ends. This is the value that would be
compared to the rated axial displacement per corrugation. If e(total) is greater than the rated axial displacement per
corrugation, then there is the possibility of premature bellows failure. Be sure that the displacement rating from
the manufacturer is on a per corrugation basis. If not then multiply the axial displacement total by the number of
corrugations and compare this value to the manufacturer’s allowable axial displacement. Note that most
manufacturers allowed rating is for some set number of cycles (often 10,000). If the actual number of cycles is
less, then the allowed movement can often be greater. Similarly, if the actual number of cycles is greater than
10,000, then the allowed movement can be smaller. In special situations manufacturers should almost always be
consulted because many factors can affect allowed bellows movement.

The “y” in the report is the total relative lateral displacement of one end of the bellows with respect to the other,
and “theta” is the total relative angular rotation of one end of the bellows with respect to the other. (Note that
CAESAR II does not include “x” into the denominator for the lateral displacement calculations as outlined in
EJMA.
 11-38 Equipment Component and Compliance

Structural Steel Checks - AISC

Code compliance for structural steel shapes is performed according to the AISC (American Institute of Steel
Construction) code. This code check uses the forces and moments at the ends of the structural members, computes
stresses, and allowables, and determines a unity check value. If the “unity check” value is less than 1.0, the
member is acceptable for the given loading conditions.

CAESAR II performs the AISC unity check according to either the 1977 or the 1989 edition of the AISC code.

Note Member properties are obtained from the AISC database and used to compute the actual and
allowable stress values for the axial and bending terms comprising the unity check equations. The
specific database is set using the Configure-Setup module. The database must be either AISC77.BIN
or AISC89.BIN.

To perform unity check calculations from the Main Menu click Analyze - AISC.

Global Parameters
After launching this module, the user is presented with the Global Input spreadsheet.

Global Input Spr ea dsheet

 Chapter 11 Equipment Component and Compliance 11-39

This screen is used to enter data that applies to all members being evaluated. Particular fields are:

Structural Code
The entry in this field should be either AISC 1977 or AISC 1989 respectively. Users should set this entry to
match the database in use.

Allowable Stress Increase Factor

The Allowable Stress Increase Factor is a multiplication factor applied to the computed values of the axial and
bending allowable stresses. Typically this value is 1.0. However, in extreme events the AISC code permits the
allowable stresses to be increased by a factor. Normally a 1/3 increase is applied to the computed allowables,
making the Allowable Stress Increase Factor = 1.33. Examples of extreme events are earthquakes and 100 year
storms. For more details see the AISC code, section 1.5.6.

Stress Reduction Factors Cmy and Cmz

Cmy and Cmz are interaction formula coefficients for the strong and weak axis of the elements (in-plane and
out-of-plane).
 0.85 for compression members in frames subject to joint translation (sidesway).
 For restrained compression members in frames braced against sidesway and not subject to
transverse loading between supports in the plane of bending: 0.6 - 0.4(M1/M2); but not less than 0.4
 Where (M1/M2) is the ratio of the smaller to larger moments at the ends, of that portion of the
member unbraced in the plane of bending under consideration.
 For compression members in frames braced against joint translation in the plane of loading and
subject to transverse loading between supports, the value of Cmy may be determined by rational
analysis. However, in lieu of such analysis, the following values are suggested per the AISC code:
0.85 for members whose ends are restrained against rotation in the plane of bending
1.0 for members whose ends are unrestrained against rotation in the plane of bending

Young’s Modulus
The slope of the linear portion of the stress-strain diagram. For structural steel this value is usually 29,000,000
psi.

Material Yield Strength

The specified minimum yield stress of the steel being used.

Bending Coefficient
The bending coefficient Cb shall be taken as 1.0 in computing the value of Fby and Fbz for use in Formula 1.6-
1a. Cb shall also be unity when the bending moment at any point in an unbraced length is larger than the moment
at either end of the same length. Otherwise, Cb shall be

Cb = 1.75 + 1.05(M1/M2) + 0.3(M1/M2)2 but not more than 2.3 where (M1/M2) is the ratio of the smaller to
larger moments at the ends.

Form Factor Qa
 11-40 Equipment Component and Compliance

The form factor is an allowable axial stress reduction factor equal to the effective area divided by the actual area.
(Consult the latest edition of the AISC code for the current computation methods for the effective area.)

Allow Sidesway
The ability of a frame or structure to experience sidesway (joint translation) affects the computation of several of
the coefficients used in the unity check equations. Additionally, for frames braced against sidesway, moments at
each end of the member are required. Normally sidesway is allowed (i.e., the box is checked).

Resize Members Whose Unity Check Value Is . . .

This check box determines whether or not the AISC program attempts to resize specific members as a result of
the unity check computations. Activating this option requires the user to specify a desired minimum unity check
and a desired maximum unity check. If the computed unity check falls outside this range, the program resizes the
member appropriately. The final member size is shown in the output report.

Minimum Desired Unity Check

This is a required entry if the redesign option has been activated. This entry defines the minimum acceptable
unity check allowed. If a unity check falls below this point, the element is resized to a smaller shape.

Maximum Desired Unity Check

This is a required entry if the redesign option has been activated. This entry defines the maximum acceptable
unity check allowed. If a unity check falls above this point, the element is resized to a larger shape.
 Chapter 11 Equipment Component and Compliance 11-41

Local Member Data

Local Member Data must be entered for each member being evaluated.

Local M ember Dat a Spr ea dsheet

 11-42 Equipment Component and Compliance

Particular fields are the following:

Member Start Node

The member start node is the “i” end of a structural element. The node number entered should be an integer
value between 1 and 32,000. This is a required entry.

Member End Node

The member end node is the “j” end of a structural element. The node number entered should be an integer value
between 1 and 32,000. This is a required entry.

Member Type
The member type is the AISC shape label found in the AISC manual. The shape label is used to acquire the
member geometric properties from the database. The label entered in this field must match exactly the label in
the database for properties to be obtained. Use the on line help to list typical member designations.

Since many of the angle labels can be found in the single angles, the double angles (long legs back to back), and
the double angles (short legs back to back), require an “angle type” to tell them apart. This cell should contain a
D for double angles with equal legs, and double angles with long legs back to back. This cell should contain a B
for double angles with short legs back to back.

In- And Out-Of-Plane Fixity Coefficients Ky And Kz

The coefficients used to compute the strong and weak axis slenderness ratios, respectively are

End Conditions Theoretical K Recommended Design K

fixed-fixed 0.5 0.65

fixed-pinned 0.7 0.8

fixed-sliding 1.0 1.2

pinned-pinned 1.0 1.0

fixed-free 2.0 2.1

pinned-sliding 2.0 2.0

 Chapter 11 Equipment Component and Compliance 11-43

Unsupported Axial Length

This length is the length used to determine the buckling strength of the member. Typically, this is the total length
of the member.

Unsupported Length (In-Plane Bending)

This length is the length of the member between braces or supports which prevent bending about the strong axis
of the member.

Unsupported Length (Out-Of-Plane Bending)

This length is the length of the member between braces or supports which prevent bending about the weak axis
of the member.

Double Angle Spacing

Double angles normally have a gap or space separating the adjacent legs. The spacing as defined in the AISC
manual must be 0.0, .375, or .75 inches.

Young’s Modulus
The slope of the linear portion of the stress-strain diagram. For structural steel this value is usually 29,000,000
psi. This value of Young’s modulus overrides the value specified on the “global” input spreadsheet.

Material Yield Strength

The specified minimum yield stress of the steel being used. This value of the material yield strength overrides
the value specified on the “global” input spreadsheet.

Axial Member Force

This is the force (tension or compression) which acts along the axis of the member. The sign of the number is not
significant, since a worst case load condition will be assumed, i.e. all positive loads.

In-Plane Bending Moment

The maximum bending moment in the member (when sidesway is permitted) which will cause bending about the
strong axis Y-Y of the member. The sign of the number is not significant, since a worst case load condition will
be assumed, i.e. all positive loads.

Out-of-Plane Bending Moment

The maximum bending moment in the member (when sidesway is permitted) which will cause bending about the
weak axis Z-Z of the member. The sign of the number is not significant, since a worst case load condition will be
assumed, i.e. all positive loads.

In-Plane “Small” Bending Moment

For structures braced against sidesway, the end moments must be specified. This value is the smaller of the two
in-plane bending moments which cause bending about the strong axis Y-Y of the member.

In-Plane “Large” Bending Moment

 11-44 Equipment Component and Compliance

For structures braced against sidesway, the end moments must be specified. This value is the larger of the two
in-plane bending moments which cause bending about the strong axis Y-Y of the member.

Out-of-Plane “Small” Bending Moment

For structures braced against sidesway, the end moments must be specified. This value is the smaller of the two
out-of-plane bending moments which cause bending about the weak axis Z-Z of the member.

Out-of-Plane “Large” Bending Moment

For structures braced against sidesway, the end moments must be specified. This value is the larger of the two
out-of-plane bending moments which cause bending about the weak axis Z-Z of the member.

AISC Output Reports

The output reports can be directed to either the terminal or a printer. The output report begins with a one page
summary describing the current global data and units. This summary is shown on the following page:

AISC Out put Summa r y

 Chapter 11 Equipment Component and Compliance 11-45

The remaining pages in the output report show the data for the individual members. The last column of the report
contains the most important data (namely the unity check value) and the governing AISC equation. Two sample
member output reports are shown in the following figures. The first report is applicable to jobs where sidesway
is allowed, the second report is applicable to jobs where sidesway is prevented.

M ember O utput Repor t, Sidesway Per mitted

Differences Between the 1977 and 1989 AISC Codes

There are a few differences between the 1977 and 1989 AISC Code Revisions that affect unity check
computation. The most noticeable difference between these two revisions is that the 1989 code provides a
method for computing the unity check on single angles. This procedure (which was not addressed in the 1977
code) can be found in a special code section following the commentary. The steps necessary to compute the
unity check for single angles can be followed by reviewing the message file (generated upon user request).

The other differences between these two code revisions deal with members in compression. Several constants for
Qs have been altered, and a new factor “kc” has been added. “kc” is a compression element restraint coefficient
defined in the 1989 edition of the code.

Because of these code differences, CAESAR II stores the name of the active database in the input file for the
AISC Program when the data file is first created. Attempting to switch databases or compute unity checks on
angles using the 1977 code will generate error messages and the program will abort. Users are urged to consult
the applicable AISC Manuals when using this program.
 11-46 Equipment Component and Compliance

NEMA SM23 (Steam Turbines)

There are two types of force/moment allowables computed during a NEMA run:
• Individual nozzle allowables.
• Cumulative equipment allowables.
Each individual suction, discharge, and extraction nozzle must satisfy the equation:
3F + M < 500De

Where:
F = resultant force on the particular nozzle.
M = resultant moment on the particular nozzle.
De = effective nominal pipe size of the connection.

A typical discharge nozzle calculation is shown as follows:

 Chapter 11 Equipment Component and Compliance 11-47

For cumulative equipment allowables NEMA SM23 states "the combined resultants of the forces and moments
of the inlet, extraction, and exhaust connections resolved at the centerline of the exhaust connection", be within
a certain multiple of Dc; where Dc is the diameter of an opening whose area is equal to the sum of the areas of
all of the individual equipment connections. A typical turbine cumulative (summation) equipment calculation is
shown as follows:

SFX, SFY, and SFZ are the respective components of the forces from all connections resolved at the discharge
nozzle. FC(RSLT) is the result of these forces. SMX, SMY and SMZ are the respective components of the
moments from all connections resolved at the discharge nozzle. Dc is the diameter of the equivalent opening as
discussed above.

NEMA Turbine Example

Consider a turbine where node 35 represents the inlet nozzle and node 50 represents the outlet nozzle.

The output from a CAESAR II analysis of this piping system includes the forces and moments acting on the pipe
elements that attach to the turbine:

NODE FX FY FZ MX MY MZ

30 -108 -49 -93 73 188 603

35 108 67 93 162 -47 -481

50 -192 7 -11 369 -522 39

55 192 -63 11 78 117 -56

 11-48 Equipment Component and Compliance

To find the forces acting on the turbine at points 35 and 50 simply reverse the sign of the forces that act on the
piping:
LOADS ON TURBINE @ 35 -108 -67 -93 -162 47 481
LOADS ON TURBINE @ 50 192 -7 11 -369 522 -39
Aside from the description, there is only one input spreadsheet for the NEMA turbine. Applied loads should be
entered in global coordinates or extracted directly from the CAESAR II output file (using the on-screen button).
This interface enables iterative addiction of an arbitrary number of nozzles to the model. To add a nozzle, click
Add Nozzle.

NEM A Input I nlet

 Chapter 11 Equipment Component and Compliance 11-49

NEM A Input Exhaust

The first page of the output is the input echo, the second and some of the remaining pages display the individual
nozzle calculations while, the last page displays the summation calculations.

Note The actual number of output pages will vary and depends on the number of nozzles defined in
the input.
 11-50 Equipment Component and Compliance

NEM A Input Echo Repor t

 Chapter 11 Equipment Component and Compliance 11-51

The NEMA output report for the above turbine example shows that the turbine passed. The highest summation
load is only 56% of the allowable. If the turbine had failed, the symbol **FAILED** would have displayed, in
red, under the “STATUS” column opposite to the load combination that was excessive.

NEM A Output Nozzle C alculations

 11-52 Equipment Component and Compliance

NEM A Output Summa tion Calcs

 Chapter 11 Equipment Component and Compliance 11-53

API 610 (Centrifugal Pumps)

In August of 1995, API released the 8th edition of API 610 for centrifugal pumps for general refinery service.

The API 610 load satisfaction criteria is outlined below:

If clause F.1.1 is satisfied, then the pump is O.K. Clause F.1.1 states that the individual component nozzle loads
must fall below the allowables listed in the Nozzle Loadings table (Table 2) shown below:
 11-54 Equipment Component and Compliance

If clause F.1.1 is NOT satisfied, but clauses F.1.2.1, F.1.2.2, and F.1.2.3 ARE satisfied then the pump is still
O.K.

Clause F.1.2.1 states that the individual component forces and moments acting on each pump nozzle flange shall
not exceed the range specified in Table 2 by a factor of more than 2. Referring to the API 610 report, the user
can see if F.1.2.1 is satisfied by comparing the Force/Moment Ratio to 2. If the ratio exceeds 2, the nozzle status
is reported as “FAILING”.

The F.1.2.2 and the F.1.2.3 requirements give equations relating the resultant forces and moments on each
nozzle, as well as on the pump base point respectively. The requirements of these equations, and whether or not
they have satisfied API 610, are shown on the bottom of the report.

The following example is taken from the API 610 code and shows the review of an overhung end-suction
process pump in English units. The three CAESAR II input screens are shown, followed by the program output.

API 610 Input Data

 Chapter 11 Equipment Component and Compliance 11-55

API 610 Suction Nozzle

 11-56 Equipment Component and Compliance

API 610 Dischar ge Nozzle

Chapter 11 Equipment Component and Compliance 11-57
 11-58 Equipment Component and Compliance

Vertical In-Line Pumps

Note that on the first screen there is a check box for a vertical in-line pump. This is to be used when the pump is
the vertical in-line type supported only by the attached piping. API states that if this is the case then 2.0 times the
loads from Table 2 can be used. However, even if the pump fails the 2.0 Table 2 criteria, it may still pass. If the
principal stress on the nozzle is less than 6,000 psi, then that nozzle passes. If the principal stress on either
nozzle is greater than 6,000 psi, the overall status will be reported as “Failed.”

In API 610 there is an example problem which illustrates the way stresses are computed on these in-line pump
nozzles. The two basic equations for determining stress are
Stresses (s) = Force / Area + Moment / Section Modulus
Shear Stresses (t) = Force / Area + Torque * distance / J

Where J is the polar moment of inertia.

In the second equation, both terms of the equation will always add together. On the other hand, the Force/Area
term in the first equation will depend on the sign of the force (tension or compression) that the user enters in the
force and moment spreadsheet. The sign of the force is determined from the user-entered Centerline Direction
Cosine, which for vertical in-line pumps should be entered in the direction extending from the discharge to the
suction nozzle. The distances that are usually entered for pedestal mounted pumps can be left blank since they
are not used.
 Chapter 11 Equipment Component and Compliance 11-59

API 617 (Centrifugal Compressors)

The requirements of this standard are similar to those of NEMA SM-23 (1991). The allowable load values for
API-617 are approximately 85% higher than the NEMA allowables.

The input screens for this evaluation display below:

API 617 Input

 11-60 Equipment Component and Compliance

API 617 Suction/Discha r ge Input

 Chapter 11 Equipment Component and Compliance 11-61

API 661 (Air Cooled Heat Exchangers)

This calculation covers the allowed loads on the vertical, co-linear nozzles (item 9 in the figure) found on most
single, or multi-bundled air cooled heat exchangers.

The several figures from API 661 illustrate the type of open exchanger body analyzed by this standard.

API 661 Heat Exchanger s

 11-62 Equipment Component and Compliance

The input for API 661 is self-explanatory. The Heat Exchangers” figure and the Resultant Force/Multiplier
inputs for Spreadsheet #1 are optional (default equals 1).

The two requirements needed for API 661compliance:

5.1.11.1 - “Each nozzle in the corroded condition shall be capable of withstanding the moments and forces
defined in Heat Exchangers figure.”

5.1.11.2 - The sum of the forces and moments on each fixed header (i.e. each individual bundle) will be less than
1,500 lb. transverse to the bundle, 2,500 lb. axial to the bundle, and 3,000 pound axial on the nozzle centerline.
The allowed moments are 3,000, 2,000, and 4,000 ft.lb. respectively. “This recognizes that the application of
these moments and forces will cause movement and that this movement will tend to reduce the actual loads.”

API 661 Input Data

 Chapter 11 Equipment Component and Compliance 11-63

API 661 Inlet Nozzle Data

 11-64 Equipment Component and Compliance

API 661 Outlet Nozzle Data

 Chapter 11 Equipment Component and Compliance 11-65

A typical API 661 report is shown as follows:

 11-66 Equipment Component and Compliance

Heat Exchange Institute Standard For Closed Feedwater Heaters

This module of the CAESAR II Rotating Equipment program provides a method for evaluating the allowable
loads on shell type heat exchanger nozzles. Section 3.14 of the HEI bulletin discusses the computational methods
used to compute these allowable loads.

The method employed by HEI is a simplification of the WRC 107 method, where the allowable loads have been
linearized to show the relationship between the maximum permitted radial force and the maximum permitted
moment vector. If this relationship is plotted (using the moments as the abscissa and the forces as the ordinate), a
straight line can be drawn between the maximum permitted force and the maximum permitted moment vector,
forming a triangle with the axes. Then for any set of applied forces and moments, the nozzle passes if the
location of these loads falls inside the triangle. Conversely, the nozzle fails if the location of the loads falls
outside the triangle. The CAESAR II HEI output has been modified to include both the plot of the allowables
and the location of the current load set on this plot. The HEI bulletin states that the effect of internal pressure has
been included in the combined stresses; however, the effect of the pressure on the nozzle thrust has not. This
requires combination with the other radial loads. CAESAR II automatically computes the pressure thrust and adds
it to the radial force if the Add Pressure Thrust check box is enabled. A sample input for the HEI module is
shown below. Note that since the pressure is greater than zero, a pressure thrust force will be computed and
combined with the radial force.

HEI Nozzle/Vessel Input

 Chapter 11 Equipment Component and Compliance 11-67

API 560 (Fired Heaters for General Refinery Services)

This module of the CAESAR II Rotating Equipment Program provides a method for evaluating the allowable
loads on Fired Heaters.

Input consists of the tube nominal diameter and the forces and moments acting on the tube, as shown in the
figure below:

API 560 Input Data

 11-68 Equipment Component and Compliance

Upon execution of the analysis, CAESAR II compares the input forces and moments to the allowables as
published in API 560 Example output is shown below.

API 560 Equip ment Repor t

 Analysis Menu • 3-7

Index
Analyzing the dynamics job
Eigensolver • 7-36
Mode shapes • 7-36
3 Performing a harmonic analysis
3D Graphic Highlights • 4-80 For • 7-37
Diameters, Wall, Insulation, Cladding &
Pha • 7-37
Refractory Thickness, Materials, Piping
Codes • 4-56 Performing a modal analysis
3D Graphics Configuration • 4-74 Eigens • 7-36
3D Graphics Highlights Freque • 7-36
Corrosion and Densities • 4-81
Displacements, Forces, Uniform Loads, Modes • 7-36
Wind/Wave Loads • 4-59 Natura • 7-36
Temp.and Press. • 3-9
Temperature and Pressure • 3-9 Sturm • 7-36
3D Graphics Interactive Feature Performing a spectral analysis
Walk Through • 4-89 Mas • 7-38
3-D Modeler • 4-69
Selection of phase angles
3D/HOOPS Graphics • 9-7
3D/HOOPS Graphics Animation Processor 8-16 Harmonic • 7-37
3D/HOOPS Graphics Static Output Processor6-34 Angle spacing, double • 11-36
3D/HOOPS in the Animation Processor • 8-16 Animation
Motion • 6-38
A Animation Dynamic Result Modal Spectrum 8-17
About the CAESAR II Documentation • 1-5 Animation of Dynamic Results-Harmonic • 8-17
ABS • 5-28 Animation of Dynamic Results Time History 8-17
ABS Method • 7-30 Animation of static results • 6-38
Actual cold loads • 5-30 Animation of Static Results Displacements • 8-17
Adjust Deflection Scale • 6-34 Animation of Static Results Notes • 6-38
Advanced • 7-23, 7-35 Announcing Builds • 1-8
Advanced Parameters • 7-31 ANSI B16.5 • 11-20
Advanced Parameters Show Screen • 7-23 API 560 (Fired Heaters for General Refinery
Advanced PCF Import (APCF) • 4-40 Services) • 11-62
AISC code comparisons • 11-40 API 605 rating tables • 11-20
AISC database • 9-2 API 610
AISC Output Reports • 11-39 Centrifugal pumps
AISC unity checks Load Satisfaction Criteria, API 610 • 11-48
Allow sidesway • 11-34
API 610 (Centrifugal Pumps) • 11-48
Allowable stress increase factor • 11-34
API 617 (Centrifugal Compressors) • 11-54
Bending coefficient • 11-34
API 661 (Air Cooled Heat Exchangers) • 11-56
Double angle spacing • 11-36
Application guide • 1-5
Fixity coefficients • 11-36
Applications of CAESAR II • 1-3
Form factor qa • 11-34
Archive • 5-19
Member type • 11-36
Archiving and Reinstalling an Old, Patched
Stress reduction factors • 11-34
Version • 1-9
Structural code • 11-34
ASCE #7 wind loads • 5-16
Algebraic • 5-28
ASCE7 • 7-12
Allowable stress increase factor • 11-34
Auxiliary Data Area • 4-11
Allowable Stresses • 4-21 Auxiliary data fields
Alpha tolerance • 4-7
Ambient temperature • 4-7
American Lifelines Alliance Soil Model • 10-10
2 Index

Auxiliary screens • 4-11 Cold loads • 5-30

Expansion joint Column reports • 6-2
Effective diameter of b • 4-15 Combination load cases • 5-21
Combination Method • 7-30
Pressure thrust in expa • 4-15 Combination Methods • 5-28
Axial length, Unsupported • 11-36 Concentrated forces • 7-2
Axial member force • 11-36 Connecting nodes • 9-17
Construction element • 4-8
B
Control Parameters • 7-3, 7-23, 7-26, 7-31, 7-35
B31.1 Appendix II (Safety Valve) Force Response Corroded pipelines, B31G
Spectrum • 7-17 Calculating corroded area • 11-23
Backfill • 10-8 Flaw Lengt • 11-23
Backfill efficiency • 10-8
Cumulative usage • 8-4
Bandwidth • 5-19
Cumulative Usage Report • 6-26
Basic Load Cases • 5-21, 5-23
Custom Reports • 6-9
Basic Operation • 2-6
Custom Reports Toolbar • 6-8, 6-14
Batch run • 5-2
Customizable Toolbar • 4-3, 4-4
Bend Data • 4-12
Customize Toolbar • 4-3
Bend Stress Intensification Factors • 11-6
Cutoff frequency • 7-23
Bending coefficient • 11-34
Cyclic stress range • 7-2
Bending moment, In-plane • 11-36
Bending moment, Out-of-plane • 11-36 D
Bending stress • 11-12
Damping • 7-26
Bends with Trunnions • 11-8
Data Fields • 4-4
Bilinear springs • 10-8
Definition of a Load Case • 5-21
Bolt Tightening Stress Notes • 11-19
Definition of a load case • 5-21
Bolts and gasket • 11-15
Deflected Shape • 6-34
Boundary Conditions • 4-9, 8-4
Densities • 4-10
BS-806 • 11-8
Design
Building Load Cases • 2-11
CADWorx/PIPE • 1-4
Building Static Load Cases • 5-8
Detecting/Checking Builds • 1-9
Building the load cases • 2-11
Diagnostics Menu • 3-16
Builds, Version • 1-8
Differences Between the 1977 and 1989 AISC
Buried pipe displacements • 10-3
Codes • 11-40
Buried pipe example • 10-16
Disp • 5-26
Buried Pipe Modeling • 10-1
Disp/Force • 5-26
Buried pipe restraints • 10-3
Disp/Force/Stress • 5-26
C Disp/Stress • 5-26
Displacement load case • 5-29
C2Isogen Export • 3-12
Displacements • 4-16, 6-14, 8-4
CADWorx/Plant • 1-4
DLF/Spectrum Generator • 7-8
CAESAR II Basic Model (Peng) • 10-9
DLF/Spectrum Generator Spectrum Wizard 7-8
CAESAR II Quick Reference • 2-2
Double angle spacing • 11-36
CAESAR II, About • 1-2
Driving frequencies • 7-3
Can Builds Be Applied To Any Version? • 1-8
Dynamic amplitude • 7-2
Center of gravity report • 2-9
Dynamic analysis input processor • 7-5
Tutorial • 2-9
Dynamic analysis types • 7-5
Code compliance • 7-3
Dynamic input commands • 7-5
Code Compliance Report • 6-25
Initiating dynamic input • 7-5
Code Stress Colors by Percent • 6-34
Prerequisites for dynamic inp • 7-5
Code Stress Colors by Value • 6-34
Dynamic Analysis Input Processor Overview • 7-5
Code stresses for dynamics • 8-4
Dynamic capabilities
Index 3

Harmonic analysis • 7-2 Boundary conditions • 8-4

Concentrated forces • 7-2 Friction resista • 8-4
Cyclic stress range • 7-2 Nonlinear restra • 8-4
Dynamic amplitude • 7-2 Forces/stresses, dynamics • 8-4
Global forces, dynamics • 8-4
Equipment start-up • 7-2 Harmonic results • 8-2
Fluid pulsation • 7-2 General results • 8-2
Forcing frequencies • 7-2 Included mass data • 8-4
Phase angle • 7-2 % Force active • 8-4

Rotating equipment • 7-2 % Force added • 8-4

Vibration • 7-2 % Mass included • 8-4

Modal analysis • 7-2 Extracted modes • 8-4
Mode shapes • 7-2 Missing mass corr • 8-4
Natural frequency • 7-2 System response • 8-4
Spectrum analysis • 7-2 Local forces, dynamics • 8-4
Impulse analysis • 7-2 Mass model • 8-4
Relief valve • 7-2 Lumped masses • 8-4
Mass participation factors • 8-4
Response spectrum meth • 7-2 Modes mass normalized • 8-4
Response vs. frequency • 7-2 Modes unity normalized • 8-4
Natural frequencies • 8-4
Sustained stresses in • 7-2 Report types, dynamics
Time history analysis • 7-2 Displacements • 8-4
Dynamic Capabilities in CAESAR II • 7-2
Dynamic imbalance • 7-24 Report option • 8-4
Dynamic Input and Analysis • 7-1 Restraints, dynamics • 8-4
Dynamic load case number • 7-30 Maximum load on • 8-4
Dynamic load factor • 7-32
Dynamic load specification • 7-3 Maximum modal c • 8-4
Dynamic Output Processing • 8-1 Mode identifica • 8-4
Dynamic output processor • 8-2
Spectrum results • 8-2
Static/dynamic comb • 8-2
Stresses, dynamics • 8-4
Code stresses for • 8-4
Stress intensific • 8-4
Stress report • 8-4
Time history results • 8-2
E
Earthquake (Spectrum) • 7-27
Earthquake input spectrum
4 Index

Spectrum definitions • 7-27 Bend SIFs

Response spect • 7-27 Trunnion • 11-6
Shock definiti • 7-27 Bends with trunnions
Trunn • 11-8
Spectrum data • 7-27
Equipment checks • 11-2
Spectrum name • 7-27 Flanges attached to bend en • 11-8
Spectrum load cases Intersection SIFs • 11-3
Earthquake • 7-29 Pressure stiffening
Flexib • 11-7
El Centro earth • 7-29
Independent sup • 7-29 Stress • 11-7
Spectrum load cases example • 7-29 Stress concentrations and i • 11-8
Equipment and Component Evaluation • 11-2
Static/dynamic combinations
Equipment Checks/Screening • 4-16
ABS • 7-30 Equipment Component and Compliance • 11-1
Combina • 7-30 Equipment start-up • 7-2
Error Check • 5-2
Hanger • 7-30 Error checking • 5-2
Occasio • 7-30 Errors, warnings, and notes • 5-2
Error Checking • 5-2
Piping • 7-30 Error Checking and Static Load Cases • 5-1
SRSS • 7-30 Error Checking the Model • 2-9
Error Handling and Analyzing the Job • 7-36
Sustain • 7-30
Errors
Earthquakes • 7-21 Errors and warnings • 2-9
Edit Dynamic Load Case • 4-30 ESL • 7-36
Edit Menu • 4-30 ESL Menu • 3-17
Edit Static Load Case • 4-30 Example • 10-16
Effective diameter • 4-15 Excitation frequency • 7-24
Effective gasket modulus • 11-20 Executing Static Analysis • 2-12
Eigensolution • 7-3 Execution of Static Analysis • 5-19
Eigensolver • 7-36 Expansion Joint • 4-8, 4-15, 4-35
EJMA (expansion joint manufacturers association) Expansion joint rating • 11-27
• 11-27 Ejma • 11-27
El centro • 7-27 Maximum axial movement • 11-27
Element Direction Cosines • 4-6 Maximum lateral deflection • 11-27
Element length • 10-3 Maximum rotation • 11-27
Element Lengths • 4-4 Output • 11-27
End connections • 9-2 Expansion Joint Rating • 11-27
Entering the Dynamic Analysis Input Menu • 7-5 Expansion load cases • 2-11, 5-29
Entering the Static Output Processor • 6-2 Exporting Displacements To A File • 4-42
Entry into the processor • 8-2 External software lock
Entry into the Processor • 8-2 ESL updating • 3-17
Environment Menu • 4-38 Extracted modes • 8-4
Equipment and component evaluation • 11-2
F
Fatal error dialog • 5-3
Fatal Error Message • 5-3
Fatigue (FAT) • 5-5, 5-21
Fatigue curve • 4-21
Fatigue curve data • 4-21
Index 5

Fatigue curve dialog • 4-21 Global Parameters • 11-34

Fatigue failure • 8-4
Fatigue load cases • 8-4 H
Fatigue loadings • 6-26 Hanger • 4-25, 5-30
Fatigue stress types • 5-5, 7-24, 7-29, 8-4 Hanger Design • 5-26
Fatigue-type load cases • 6-26 Hanger design control data • 4-35
File Menu • 3-3, 4-28 Hanger selection
Filtering Reports • 6-12 Actual cold loads • 5-30
Limiting the Amount of Displayed Info • 4-61 Additional hanger • 5-30
Fixity coefficients ky and kz • 11-36 Design load cases • 5-30
Fixity coefficients, AISC • 11-36 Hanger sizing load cases • 5-30
Flange Checks - Equipment Screening • 4-11 Hot load • 5-30
Flange leakage/stress calculations • 11-15 Operating load cases • 5-30
Flange leakage • 11-15 Recommended load cases • 5-30
Methodology • 11-15 Restrained weight • 5-30
Flange rating Spring hanger design • 5-30
Hanger sizing • 5-30, 7-30
ANSI B16.5 • 11-20 Hanger Stiffness • 5-26
API 605 • 11-20 Hanger Table with Text • 6-28
Hangers • 4-25
Rating Table • 11-20 Harmonic • 7-24, 7-37
Leak pressure ratio Harmonic analysis • 7-2, 7-3
Gasket • 11-20 Harmonic analysis input
Flange Leakage/Stress Calculations • 11-15 Harmonic displacements • 7-24
Flange modeler • 11-20 Harmonic forces • 7-24
Flange rating • 11-20 Harmonic load definition • 7-24
Flange Reports • 6-20 Excitation f • 7-24
Flanges Attached to Bend Ends • 11-8 Phasing of harmonic loads
Flaw length • 11-23 Damping • 7-26
Flexible Nozzles • 4-24
Fluid pulsation • 7-2 Frequency • 7-24
Force • 5-26 Harmonic co • 7-26
Force Sets • 7-3, 7-21, 7-33, 7-34
Force spectrum methodology • 7-32 Harmonic fo • 7-24
Force Stress • 5-26 Pressure wa • 7-24
Forces • 4-18
Forces/stresses • 8-4 Reciprocati • 7-24
Force-time profiles • 7-33, 7-34 Rotating eq • 7-24
Forcing frequency • 7-2, 7-37
Harmonic control parameters • 7-26
Form factor QA • 11-34
Harmonic displacements • 7-24
Frequency • 7-24
Harmonic force • 7-24
Frequency cutoff • 7-36
Harmonic loads • 7-24
Friction Multiplier • 5-26
Harmonic results • 7-37, 8-2
Friction resistance • 8-4
Harmonic stress • 7-37
Full Run • 1-10
Heat Exchange Institute Standard For Closed
G Feedwater Heaters • 11-61
Heat exchangers • 11-56
Gasket factor • 11-20 HEI standard for closed feedwater heaters • 11-61
General Computed Results • 6-27 Help menu • 3-19
Global Element Forces • 6-21 Help Menu • 3-19
Global forces • 8-4
6 Index

HOOPS Toolbar Manipulations • 4-79 Load cases • 2-2, 2-13, 4-7, 4-9, 4-25, 4-28, 5-5,
Hot load • 5-30 5-19, 5-21, 5-30, 6-2, 6-26, 6-32, 6-38, 7-
22, 7-24, 7-27, 7-38, 8-2, 8-4, 9-2, 9-28,
I 11-9
IBC • 7-13 Basic load cases • 2-11
Identifying Builds • 1-8 Combination load cases • 2-11, 5-21
IGE/TD/12 • 4-6 Example of load cases • 5-21
Importing Displacements From A File • 4-42 Expansion load case • 5-29
Impulse • 7-22 Occasional load cases • 5-29
Impulse analysis • 7-2 Operating load cases • 5-29
Included mass data • 8-4 Recommended load cases • 2-11
Incore solution • 5-19 Stress category • 5-21
Independent support motion • 7-29 Stress types • 5-21
Index numbers, structural steel input • 9-2 Sustained load case • 5-29
In-plane bending moment • 11-36 Types of load cases • 2-11
In-plane large bending moment • 11-36 Types of loads • 5-21
In-plane small bending moment • 11-36 Load Cases for Other Types of Occasional Loads •
Input Echo • 6-28 5-11
Input listing • 8-4 Load Cases with Hanger Design • 5-9
Input Menu • 3-6 Load Cases with Pitch and Roll • 5-10
Input overview based on analysis category • 7-7 Load Cases with Thermal Displacements • 5-9
Input Overview Based on Analysis Category • 7-7 Load Cases with Thermal Displacements and
Installing Builds • 1-9 Settlement • 5-10
Insulation density • 4-10 Load cycles • 5-21
Intersection Stress Intensification Factors • 11-3 Load, Ultimate • 10-8
Introduction • 1-1 Loading Conditions • 4-9
Local Element Forces • 6-22
K Local forces • 8-4
Kaux menu items Local member data • 11-36
Include Piping Input Files • 4-38 Local Member Data • 11-36
Include structural input files • 4-38 Lumped masses • 7-7
Review sifs • 4-38
M
Review SIFs at Bend Node • 4-38
Special execution parameters • 4-38 Main menu • 3-2
Kaux-include structural files • 9-2 Analysis
L Menu items • 3-7
File • 2-2
Lateral bearing length • 10-3
Leak pressure ratio • 11-20 Default data directory • 3-3
Lease • 1-10 Input file types • 3-3
License types
Full run • 1-10 New command • 3-3
Lease • 1-10 Open command • 3-3
Limited run • 1-10
Select an existing job file • 3-3
Limited Run • 1-10
Limiting the Amount of Displayed Info. Find Input
Node, Range, Cuttin • 4-85 Data entry • 2-6
Line Numbers • 4-5
Input menu items • 3-6
Load Case Definition in CAESAR II • 5-8
Load case list • 5-5 Main Menu • 3-1
Load Case Options Tab • 5-26 Major Steps in Dynamic Input • 7-4
Load Case Report • 6-27 Mass and stiffness model • 7-3
Index 7

Mass and stiffness model, Modifying • 7-22, 7-25, Expansion joints • 4-35
7-31, 7-33, 7-35 Hanger design control data • 4-35
Mass correction, Missing • 8-4 Title • 4-35
Mass model • 7-7, 8-4 Valve • 4-35
Mass participation factors • 7-38, 8-4 Model modifications for dynamic analysis
Material Elastic Properties • 4-10 Control parameter • 7-3
Material fatigue curve • 4-21 Dynamics • 7-3
Material name • 4-9 Conversion • 7-3
Material number • 4-9
Material yield strength • 11-34, 11-36 Mass and st • 7-3
Max • 5-28 Specifying loads • 7-3
Maximum Code Stress • 6-34 Cod • 7-3
Maximum desired unity check • 11-34
Maximum Displacements • 6-34 Dri • 7-3
Maximum Restraints Loads • 6-34 Dyn • 7-3
Member data, Local • 11-36
Member end node • 11-36 For • 7-3
Member start node • 11-36 Har • 7-3
Member type • 11-36
Loa • 7-3
Membrane stress • 11-12
Menu Commands • 4-28 Nat • 7-3
Mexican Response Spectrum • 7-15
Occ • 7-3
Min • 5-28
Minimum desired unity check • 11-34 Poi • 7-3
Miscellaneous Data • 6-29
Sho • 7-3
Missing mass correction • 8-4
Modal • 7-7 Sta • 7-3
Modal analysis • 7-2 Model Modifications for Dynamic Analysis • 7-3
Modal analysis input Modeler Overview • 10-2
Control parameters Modes • 7-36
Cutoff frequency • 7-23 Modes mass normalized • 8-4
Modes of vibration • 7-7, 7-23, 7-36
Modes of vibration • 7-23
Modes unity normalized • 8-4
Lumped masses • 7-7 Modifying Mass and Stiffness Model • 7-22, 7-25,
Modes of vibration • 7-7 7-31, 7-33, 7-35
Modifying Mass and Stiffness Models • 7-35
Natural frequencies • 7-7
More • 6-2
System response • 7-7 Motion • 6-38
Mass model • 7-7 N
Modes of vibration • 7-7
Natural frequencies • 7-3, 7-7, 7-36, 8-4
Natural frequencies • 7-7 NEMA SM23
System response • 7-7 Steam turbines
Mode identification line • 8-4 Cumulative equipment calculations, N • 11-41
Mode shapes • 7-2, 7-36 NEMA SM23 (Steam Turbines) • 11-41
Model Menu • 4-35 NEMA turbine example • 11-42
Model menu items NEMA Turbine Example • 11-42
Node Names • 4-26
Node Numbers • 4-4
Nominal pipe size • 4-6
Nonlinear restraints • 5-19, 8-4
8 Index

Note dialog • 5-8 Alpha tolerance • 4-7

Note Message • 5-5, 5-8 Ambient temperature • 4-7
Notes on CAESAR II Load Cases • 5-21 Construction element • 4-8
Notes on Printing or Saving Reports to a File • 6- Densities • 4-10
32, 8-15 Expansion joints • 4-8
Notes on the Soil Model • 10-8 Input spreadsheet • 4-2
Nozzle Check Report • 6-19 Insulation density • 4-10
Nozzle data • 11-9 Material name • 4-9
Nozzle flexibility • 11-14 Material number • 4-9
Nozzle loads • 11-9 Nominal pipe size • 4-6
Nozzle screen • 11-14 Rigid elements • 4-8
Sif & tees • 4-8
O Specific gravity • 4-10
Obtaining Builds • 1-8 Stress intensification factors • 4-8
Occasional dynamic stresses • 7-30 Thermal strains • 4-7
Occasional load cases • 5-29 Piping Input • 4-1
Occasional stress • 7-2, 7-3, 7-30 Piping Input Generation • 2-6
Offsets • 4-27 Piping job • 9-2
Operating conditions Piping Material • 4-9
Temperatures and pressures • 4-7 Piping System Loads • 5-21
Operating Conditions Plot • 4-46
Temperatures and Pressures • 4-7 Plotting
Operating load cases • 5-29 Static output review • 2-13
Out-of-plane bending moment • 11-36 Tutorial • 2-6
Out-of-plane large bending moment • 11-36 Point loads • 7-3
Out-of-plane small bending moment • 11-36 Pressure Stiffening • 11-7
Output Menu • 3-10 Pressure thrust • 4-15
Output Type • 5-26 Pressure vs. elevation table • 5-16
Output Viewer Wizard • 6-31 Pressure wave • 7-24
Ovalization, bends • 11-8 Printing or saving reports to a file • 8-15
Overstress • 6-34 Printing or Saving Reports to File Notes • 6-32
Overview of Structural Capability in CAESAR II • Proctor number • 10-8
9-2 Produced Results Data • 5-26
Program support • 1-6
P Technical support phone numbers • 1-6
PCF Import • 4-40 Training • 1-6
Peak stress index • 11-8 Program Support/User Assistance • 1-6
Performing the analysis • 7-36 Providing Wind Data • 5-16
Performing the Analysis • 7-36 Pulse TableDLF Spectrum Generation • 7-33, 7-33
Phase angle • 7-2, 7-24, 7-37
Q
Phasing • 7-24
Pipe modeler • 10-3 Quick reference • 2-2
Pipe section properties • 4-6 Quick Start and Basic Operation • 2-1
Pipe Section Properties • 4-6
R
Piping codes for earthquakes • 7-30
Piping dimensions • 9-17 Reciprocating pumps • 7-24
Piping input • 2-6 Recommended Load Cases • 5-29
Recommended Load Cases Hanger Selection 5-30
Recommended Procedures • 10-15
Relief Load Synthesis • 7-32
Relief load synthesizer • 7-33
Relief loads (spectrum) • 7-32
Index 9

Relief Loads (Spectrum) • 7-32

Relief loads spectrum
S
Force sets for relief loads Sample Input • 9-9
Earthquakes • 7-21 Save Animation to File • 8-17
Save As Graphics Image • 4-61
Relief valv • 7-21 Scalar • 5-28
Skewed load • 7-21 Screens • 4-11
Seismic analysis • 7-2
Water hamme • 7-21 Select by Single Click • 6-34
Relief load synthesis Select Case Names • 6-2
Dynamic load fact • 7-32 Selection of Phase Angles • 7-37
Shape factor, wind • 5-16
Force spectrum me • 7-32 Shock definition • 7-27
Relief valve • 7-32 Shock results • 7-3
Shock spectra • 7-2
Thrust loads • 7-32
Show Event Viewer Gr • 6-34
Spectrum definitions Sidesway • 11-34
DLF spectrum gener • 7-20 Sidesway, AISC • 11-34
SIFs & tees • 4-8
Spectrum data • 7-20
SignMax • 5-28
Spectrum load cases SignMin • 5-28
Impulse • 7-22 Skewed load • 7-21
Time history • 7-22 Slug flow
Specifying the load
Relief valve • 7-2, 7-21, 7-32, 7-33
Remaining Strength of Corroded Pipelines B31G Force sets, slug flow • 7-33
11-23 Force-time profile • 7-33
Report Options • 6-14
Load cases, slug flow • 7-33
Report Template Editor • 6-9
Report types • 8-4 Relief load synthesizer • 7-33
Report Types • 8-4
Relief valve • 7-33
Reports Navigation Toolbar • 6-6
Resize members • 11-34 Water hammer • 7-33
Resize Model/Element Stretch • 4-5 Slug flow analysis • 7-2
Response spectrum method • 7-2 Snubbers • 7-7
Response spectrum table • 7-27 Snubbers Active • 5-26
Response vs. frequency spectra • 7-2 Software Revision Procedures • 1-8
Restrained weight • 5-30 Soil model • 10-8
Restraint auxiliary data • 9-17 Soil model numbers • 10-8
Restraint Report - In Local Element Coordinates • Soil Models • 10-3
6-16 Soil properties • 10-2
Restraint summary • 6-18 Soil stiffnesses • 10-2
Restraint Summary • 6-18 Soil supports • 10-8
Restraints • 4-14, 6-15, 8-4 Special element information • 4-8
Review Current Units • 4-30 Special Element Information • 4-8
Review Units • 4-30 Special execution parameters • 4-38
Rigid elements • 4-8 Specific gravity • 4-10
Rigid weight • 4-13 Specifying Hydrodynamic Parameters • 5-18
Rigid Weight • 4-13 Specifying loads, dynamics • 7-3
Rotating equipment • 7-2, 7-24 Specifying the Load • 7-33
Specifying the Load • 7-34
10 Index

Specifying the loads • 7-7, 7-24, 7-27, 7-32, 7-33, Stress • 5-26
7-34 Stress category • 5-21
Specifying the Loads • 7-24, 7-27, 7-32 Stress concentration factor • 11-8
Spectrum • 7-38 Stress Concentrations and Intensification • 11-8
Spectrum analysis • 7-2 Stress increase factor
Spectrum data • 7-20, 7-27 AISC • 11-34
Spectrum Definitions • 7-20, 7-33 Stress increase factor, Allowable • 11-34
Spectrum load cases • 7-22, 7-29, 7-33, 8-2 Stress intensification factors • 4-8, 8-4
Spectrum Load Cases • 7-29, 7-33 Stress Intensification Factors/Tees • 4-23
Spectrum name • 7-27 Stress reduction factors cmy and cmz • 11-34
Spectrum results • 8-2 Stress reduction factors, aisc • 11-34
Spectrum/Load Cases • 7-22 Stress report • 8-4
Spreadsheet Overview • 4-2 Stress Summary • 6-24
Spring hanger design • 5-30 Stress types • 2-11, 5-5, 5-21, 7-29
SRSS • 5-28, 7-30 Stresses • 6-23, 8-4
Start, CAESAR II • 2-2 Stresses, Allowable • 4-21
Starting CAESAR II • 2-2 Structural capability in CAESAR II • 9-2
Static Load Case Editor • 5-6 Structural code • 11-34
Static load case number • 7-30 Structural code, AISC • 11-34
Static load cases Structural files, Include • 4-38
Building static load cases • 5-5 Structural Steel Checks - AISC • 11-34
Limitations of the load case editor • 5-5 Structural steel example • 9-10, 9-17, 9-28
Recommended load cases • 5-5 Structural Steel Example #1 • 9-10
Static output plot • 9-17 Structural Steel Example #2 • 9-17
Static output processor Structural Steel Example #3 • 9-28
132 column reports • 6-2 Structural steel input • 9-2
Animation of static solution • 6-2 AISC database, structural steel input • 9-2
Commands in static output • 6-2 Connecting pipe to structure • 9-17
Initiating the static output processor • 6-2 Connectin • 9-17
Plotting statics • 6-2
Report options • 6-2 Displaced • 9-17
Report titles • 6-2 Editing structural steel input • 9-2
View-reports • 6-2 End connections,structural steel input • 9-2
Static Output Processor • 6-1 Format of structural steel input • 9-2
Static output review • 2-13 Include in piping job • 9-2
Plotting static output • 2-13 Include a struct • 9-2
Static Output Review • 2-13
Static results • 7-3 Kaux-include str • 9-2
Static Seismic Load Cases • 5-12 Index numbers, structural steel input • 9-2
Static solution methodology • 5-19 Initiate structural steel input
Archive • 5-19 Struct • 9-2
Incore solution Initiating structural steel input • 9-2
Bandwidth • 5-19 Help • 9-2
Nonlinear restrai • 5-19 Keywords in structural steel input • 9-2
Static analysis Running structural steel input • 9-2
Stiffness matrix • 5-19 Static output plot • 9-17
Static/Dynamic Combinations 7-22, 7-30, 7-33, Range command • 9-17
7-35 , 8-2 Structural Steel Modeler • 9-1
Stiffness matrix • 5-19 Structure dimensions • 9-17
Stiffness model, Modifying • 7-22, 7-25, 7-31, 7- Structure nodes • 9-17
33, 7-35 Sturm sequence check • 7-36
Index 11

Sustained load cases • 5-29 Bilinear supports • 10-8

Sustained stresses • 7-2, 7-30 Bilinear sprin • 10-8
Sustained sustained load cases • 2-11
System response • 7-7, 8-4 Soil supports • 10-8

T Ultimate load • 10-8

Technical reference manual • 1-5 Yield displace • 10-8

Technical support phone numbers • 1-6 Yield stiffnes • 10-8
The CAESAR II Main Menu • 3-2 Convert input command • 10-3
The Spectrum Wizard • 7-8 Element length • 10-3
Thermal load case • 5-29
Buried pipe displ • 10-3
Thermal strains • 4-7
Thrust loads • 7-32 Lateral bearing l • 10-3
Time history • 7-22, 7-34, 7-38 Meshing
Force-time profiles • 7-34
Lateral bearing meshes • 10-3
Vibration • 7-34
Time History • 7-34, 7-38 Overburden Compaction Multiplier • 10-8
Time history analysis • 7-2 Soil model numbers • 10-8
Time history load cases • 7-29, 7-35, 8-2 Spreadsheet
Time History Load Cases • 7-35 Buried element descr • 10-3
Time History Profile Definitions • 7-34 Underground pipe modeler • 10-2
Time history results • 8-2
Buried • 10-3
Time vs. force • 7-34
Title • 4-35 Soil pr • 10-2
Tools Menu • 3-11, 4-63 Soil st • 10-2
Training • 1-6
Trunnion • 11-6, 11-8 Zones • 10-3
Tutorial Lateral bearing regions • 10-3
Center of gravity report, tutorial • 2-9 Uniform Loads • 4-19
Plotting, tutorial • 2-6 Unsupported axial length • 11-36
Sample model input, tutorial • 2-6 Unsupported length (in-plane bending) • 11-36
Unsupported length (out-of-plane bending) •11-36
U
Updates and License Types • 1-10
UBC • 7-9 Usage factor • 8-4
Underground pipe modeler • 10-2, 10-3 User assistance
Underground pipe/buried pipe Technical support phone numbers • 1-6
Training • 1-6
User Control of Produced Results Data • 5-26
User Defined Time History Waveform • 7-18
User-Controlled Combination Methods • 5-28
Using the CAESAR II Flange Modeler • 11-20
Using the Underground Pipe Modeler • 10-3
V
Valve • 4-35
Velocity vs. elevation table • 5-16
Vertical in-line pumps • 11-53
Vertical In-Line Pumps • 11-53
Vessel attachment stresses/WRC 107
12 Index

Input data, WRC 107 • 11-9 Yield stiffness • 10-8

Nozzle data, WRC 107 • 11-9 Young's modulus • 11-34, 11-36
Nozzle loads, WRC 107 • 11-9
Z
Curv • 11-9
Zone definitions • 10-3
Inte • 11-9
Reinforcing pad • 11-9
Stress summations, WRC 107 • 11-12
Vessel data • 11-9
Vibration • 7-2, 7-34
View Menu • 3-18
View Output • 4-30
W
Warning Message • 5-4
Warnings • 6-30
Water hammer • 7-21
Specifying the load
Force sets, slug flow • 7-33
Force-time profile • 7-33
Load cases, slug flow • 7-33
Relief load synthesizer • 7-33
Relief valve • 7-33
Slug problems • 7-33
Water hammer analysis • 7-2
Water Hammer/Slug Flow (Spectrum) • 7-33
Welding Research Council Bulletin 297 • 11-14
What are the Applications of CAESAR II? • 1-3
What Distinguishes CAESAR II From Other Pipe
Stress Packages? • 1-4
What is CAESAR II? • 1-2
What is Contained In A Specific Build? • 1-8
Wind data
ASCE #7 wind loads • 5-16
Methods of wind loading • 5-16
Pressure vs. elevation table • 5-16
Shape factor • 5-16
Velocity vs. elevation table • 5-16
Wind/Wave • 4-20
WRC 107 Stress Summations • 11-12
WRC 107 Vessel Stresses • 11-9
WRC 297
Nozzle flexibility • 11-14
Nozzle screen • 11-14
WRC axes orientation • 11-9
WRC Bulletin 297 • 11-14
Y
Yield displacement • 10-8